pare tebe pat a ces Sa Ay) rea irists Ait Mi ‘a ip \ it AH Gr i i, in ye 6 a uly i} bit nt 1a Gent i a i mud ite ai ths ; iy What ane i a oR ' ai se bh aid aia nh int teh 4 ay vy ae Nin} 14 Hw aay ee eee Sah Ve ye rane a "i ie Wy Vy rd By Aust i iY j ie id 4 ty Willen ity a aie hy stay a6 ryisdihs a oe 2 hy EG aie ne 4 iy sf ei) h, : ' ( IAA i xe as ' 1 ' #, J ae | | MY titan) / thatngh e Pyare Ct Te | ( ‘ diy! Meat any We i aly py is Ma aks f 4 4 ! a er ht fel i 1h en 1 Ren ANAL hee ANCHE TRH ELOY tae Ren ae Hi NK citee Hy Ay ts At ni Hie te ot ip Ou ats cae pes ' , faint ne ae Vk i irate ee ee ns e : tre: wr vn hanay Henan ieee . * ' 4 1" CIENCE A WEEKLY JOURNAL DEVOTED TO THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE, PUBLISH- ING THE OFFICIAL NOTICES AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE. \ EDITORIAL CoMMITTEE : S. NEwcomMB, Mathematics; R. 8S. WoopWARD, Mechanios; E. C. PICKERING, Astronomy ; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics ; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry; CHARLES D. WALcort, Geology ; W. M. Davis, Physiography; HENRY F. OsBoRN, Paleontology; W. K. Brooks, C. HART MEERIAM, Zoology; S. H. ScupDER, Entomology; C. E. BEssEY, N. L. BRiTTon, Botany ; C. S. Minot, Embryology, Histology ; H. P. BowpitcH, Physiology; Wint1aAm H. WeEtc#H, Pathology ; J. MCKEEN CATTELL, Psychology. NEW SERIES. VOLUME XVIII. JULY - DECEMBER, 1903. NEW YORK THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 1903 THE NEW ERA PRINTING COMPANY, 41 NORTH QUEEN STREET, LANCASTER, Pa. O'S. 15 CONTENTS AND INDEX. N.S. VOL. XVIII.—JULY TO DECEMBER, 1903. The Names of Contributors are Printed in Small Capitals. Apnery, W. DE W., Address of President of Section of Education of British Association, 577 Apams, C. C., Breeding Area of Kirtland’s Warbler in Michigan, 217 Apams, F. D., Washington on the Chemical Anal- ysis of Igneous Rocks, 470 Apter, C., The International Catalogue of Scien- tific Literature, 268 Agricultural Education, A. C. TRUE, 684 Aupricu, T. H., and E. A. Smiru, Grand Gulf Formation, 20 Allegheny Observatory Library, Exchanges, F. L. O. WapswortH, 471 ALLEN, J. A., Antedated Publications, 631 American Association for the Advancement of Science, and Affiliated Societies, 669; St. Louis Meeting, 506, 673, 705, 787; Member- ship in, 822 Andrews, E. J., and H. N. Howland, Elements of Physies, W. LEC. Stevens, 271 ANGELL, J. R., Villa’s Contemporary Psychology ; Royce’s Outlines of Psychology; Judd’s Gen- etic Psychology; Stratton’s Experimental Psychology; Strong’s Why the Mind has a Body, 748 Antarctica, E. S. Batcn, 55, 303; H. R. Miu, 182 Anthropological, Society of Washington, W. Hoven, 18, 148; Association, German, G. G. MacCurpy, 623 Archeology and Ethnology, International Commis- sion of, 250 Arctic Nomenclature, E. S. Baton, 501 Armssy, H. P., Isodynamie Replacement of Nu- trients, 481 ARNOLD, R., and De W. C. Wirey, Geological So- ciety of American Universities, 691 Arrhenius, S. A., Physik, R. DeC. W., 498 Atomic Theory, F. W. CLarke, 513 Auroras, 27-day Period in, and its Connection with Sun-spots, H. H. Crayton, 632 B., A. P., Cornell School of Geography, 380 B., F. A., Gonionemus versus Gonionema, 501 Bacterial Spot, A. F. Woops, 537 ae Islands, Expedition to, G. B. SHarruck, Bailey, S. I, Variable Stars in the Cluster Cen- tauri, G. Miitrer, 593 Batcn, E. S., Antarctica, 55, 303; Arctic Nomen- elature, 501 Barsour, E. H., Distribution of Daimonelix, 504 Barometer, The Word, J. C. Suepp, 278 BASKERVILLE, U., Kunzite, 303; Browning on the Rarer Elements, 497; Elisha Mitchell Scien- tifie Society, 603; and G. F. Kunz, Action of Radium, Roentgen Rays and Ultra-violet Light on Minerals and Gems, 769 Baum, H. E., Name of the Breadfruit, 439 Betz, A. G., and Z. T. Sowers, Radium and Can- eer, 155 Bett, R. G., and V. L. Kettoee, Variations in- duced in Bombyx mori by Controlled Varying Food Supply, 741 Benepict, F. G., Teaching of Chemistry in Graded and Secondary Schools, 465 BenJAMIN, M., John Elfreth Watkins, 300 Bessey, C. E., Botanical Notes, 27, 121, 246, 315, 540, 796; Peirce’s Plant Physiology, 52; Liv- ingston’s Diffusion and Osmotic Pressure in Plants, 208 Bibliographical Soc. of Chicago, C. H. Brown, 275 BicEtow, M. A., N. Y. Acad. of Sci., Biology, 559 Biological, Laboratory at the Tortugas, C. Mac- MILLAN, 57; H. M. Ricuarps, 58; R. T. Cor- BURN, 86; Society of St. Louis, W. L. Erken- BERRY, 210; of Washington, F. A. Lucas, 689, 722 Biarn, JR., A. W., Mich. Ornithological Club, 435 Blatchley’s Orthoptera of Indiana, F. M. WrrstEr, 557 Botton, H. C., Ben Jonson’s Alchemist, 556 Bolton, Henry Carrington, 798 Bombyx mori, Variations induced in, by Controlled Varying Food Supply, V. L. Kettoce and R. G. Betty, 741 Botanical, Society of Washington, H. J. WEBBER, 19; Notes, C. E. Bessry, 27, 121, 246, 315, 540, 796; F. D, Heap, 374; Station, Tropical, D. S. Younson, 210 ° Brain-weights, of Japanese, E. A. SprrzKa, 371; of Brothers, E. A. SprrzKa, 699 Breadfruit, Name of, H. E. Baum, 439 British Association for the Advancement of Sci- ence: Southport Meeting, 321; Address of President, N. Lockyer, 385, 417; Grants, 444; Address of President of Geological Sec- tion, W. W. Warts, 449; of Subsection of Astronomy and Meteorology, W. N. SuHaw, 487; of Anthropological Section, J. Sym1nc- Ton, 545; of Educational Section, W. pe W. ABNEY, 577; Meteorology at, A. L. Rotcu, 657; Anthropology at, G. G. MacCurpy, 716 Brown, A. E., The A. O. U. Code, 535 Brown, C. H., Bibliographical Society of Chicago, 275 Browning, P. E., Introduction to the Rarer Ele- ments, C. BASKERVILLE, 497. Bucuner, E. F., Ten Years of American Psy- chology, 193, 233 Burpon-SANDERSON, J., The Limits of Science, 140 Cameron, F. K., Toxie Effect of Acids on Seed- lings, 411 Carnegie Institution, 797, 833, 801 iv SCIENCE. CastLp, W. E., Mendel’s Law of Heredity, 396; Heredity of ‘ Angora’ Coat in Mammals, 760 Catalogue, International, of Scientific Literature, C. ADLER, 268 CHAMBERLAIN, A, F., Right-Handedness, 788 Chemical Society, American, General Meeting, A. M. Parrerson, 97; New York Section, H. C. SHERMAN, 602, 753; Northeastern Section, ArTHuR M. Comey, 826; Washington, A. SEIDELL, 828 Chemistry, New Terms in, H. C. Cooper, 153; High School, in Relation to Work of a Col- lege Course, R. P. WILLIAMS, 330; Teaching of, in Graded and Secondary Schools, F. G. Benepicr, 465 Cheston, H. C., P. R. Dean and C. E. Timmerman. Physies, W. LEC. Stevens, 271 Chicago, University of, Medical Club, 54; Investi- gations in Progress at, 375; T. D. A. Cocxk- ERELL, 500 Chwolson, 0. D., Physik, W. LeC. Stevens, 271 Criarke, F. W., The Atomic Theory, 513 Crayton, H. H., Professor Bell on Kite Construc- tion, 204; Auroras and Sun-spots. 632 Clemson College Science Club, F. S. Suiver, 691, 728 Coast and Geodetic Survey, O. H. TirrmMann, 33; Magnetic Work of, 374 CocKERELL,’ T. D. A., Abbreviations of New Mexico, 58; Investigations in Progress at the University of Chicago, 500 Code, A. O. U., A. E. Brown, 535 CorsurN, R. T., Proposed Biological Station at the Tortugas, 86 Core, F. N., American Mathematical Society, 410. 664 Colorado College, Medical Research Laboratory, W. F. Stocum, 58 Colton, B. P., Zoology, J. H. Grrouxp, 112 Commy, A. M., Northeastern Section of American Chemical Society, 826 Congress, International, of Arts and Science at St. Louis Exposition, J. Dewey, 275, 665; R. S. Woopwarp, 302; H. MuNsTERBERG, 559, 788, 764 Convocation Week Meetings of Scientific Societies, 751, 825 Coox, O. F., Four new Species of Central Ameri- can Rubber Tree, 436 Coorrr, H. C., New Terms in Chemistry, 153 Covitin, F. V., Small’s Flora of Southeastern United States, 627 Crane, T. F., E. W. Hurecut and W. F. Duranp, Resolutions of Faculty of Cornell University on Death of Professor Thurston, 732 craniology of People of Scotland, A. Hrovicka, Craw ey. H.. ‘Tablettes Zoologiques,’ 59 Currie, R. P., Entomological Society of Wash- ington, 82 Daimonelix, Distribution of, E. H. Barsour, 504 Dari, W. H., Grand Gulf Formation, 83; Prince- ton University Expedition to Patagonia, 146 DanveEno, J. B., Phototropism under Light-rays of Different Wave-lengths, 604 ‘ Danizxs, F., Upland Plant Societies of Kent Co., Michigan, 215 Davenport, C. B., Vernon on Variation in Ani- mals and Plants, 16 ‘CONTENTS AND INDEX Davy, J. B., Vegetation of the Transvaal, 696 DELLENBAUGH, F. S., Indian Pottery, 148 Devil-fish, A Little Known, T. Gini, 473 Dewey, J., St. Louis Congress of Arts and Sci- ence, 275, 665 Discussion and Correspondence, 20, 55, 83, 113, 148, 180, 210, 243, 275, 302, 337, 369, 411, 435, 471, 500, 530, 559, 603, 631, 665, 693, 729, 755, 787 Doctorates Conferred by American Universities, 257 ‘Dodge, C. W., General Zoology, 824 Drawing Board and Scales in Trigonometry and Navigation, R. A. Harris, 108 Drude’s Theory of Optics, C. R. Mann, 432 Duerden’s West Indian Madreporarian Polyps, J. P. McM., 80 Earte, F. S., Torrey Botanical Club, 630, 690, 754, 790 Edser, E., Light for Students, W. LEC. STEVENS, 271 ‘ Education, Specialization in, S. W. WILLISTON, 129; and the World’s Work, R. S. Woopwarp, 161; Technical, Efficiency of, W. C. MmenpEn- HALL, 295 Edueational Assoec., National Resolutions of, 283 EIGENMANN, C. H., Water’Supply of Havana, 281 EYkENBERRY, W. L., Biological Society of St. Louis, 210 Electrical Engineering, College Courses and, D. C. Jackson, 710 Electricity at High Pressures, E. THOMSON, 337 Electrochemical Society, American, 284 Extot, C. W., Definition of a Cultivated Man, 76 Eliot and Soulé on Caterpillars and their Moths, C. M. WeeEp, 53 Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc., C. BASKERVILLE, 603 English, Better, in Science, P. C. WarMAN, 563 Entomological Society of Washington. R. P. Currin, 82 Ethnological and Archeological Survey of Cal., B. I. WHEELER and F. W. Purnam, 570 Examinations, Scientific and Technical, 413 F., W. S., Notes on Physics, 282, 312 Fereuson, M. C., Spongy Tissue of Strasburger, 308 : Ferry, E. 8., Physics, W. LeC. Stevens, 271 Finuay, G. I, N. Y. Acad. of Sciences, Geology and Mineralogy, 17 Fisheries, Bureau of, 476 Fishes of African Family Kneriide, T. Gmx, 338 Flageolets, Primitive, E. H. HAwtey, 412 Frexner, §., An Aspect of Modern Pathology, 3 Flora of Serpentine Barrens of Southeast Pa., J. W. HARSHBERGER, 339 Flower, Sir William, Memorial to, 249 Formal, Dangers of, E. A. SprrzKa, 87 ; Formation, Grand Gulf, E. A. Smrrx and T, H. Apricu, 20; W. H. Dat, 83; E. W. Hi- GARD, 180 Fossils, Carboniferous, in ‘Ocoee’ Slates in Ala., E. A. Smitru, 244 Frankiin, W. S., Oudin’s Polyphase Apparatus and Systems, 241; Hobbs on the Arithmetic of Electrical Measurements, 242; Misuse of Physies by Biologists and Engineers, 641 Frazer, P., A Visual Phenomenon, 729 Fruit, Food Value of, 540 New SERIES. VoL. XVIII. Fuuuer, M. L., and A. C, Veatcu, Results of Re- survey of Long Island, 729 Gage, A. P., Introduction to Physical Science, W. LeC. Srevens, 271 GenTHE, K. W., Seminar Method in Natural Sci- ences, 116 Geological, Survey, Summer Work of, 187; Ex- plorations in Egypt, 441; Soc. of Amer. Uni- versities, R. ARNOLD and De W. C. WILEY, 691 GeEROULD, J. H., Colton’s Zoology, 112 Git, T., Fishes of the African Family Kneriide, 338; A Little Known Devil-fish, 473 Gonionemus versus Gonionema, L. Mursacu, 373; F, A. B., 501 Goutp, C. N., Evidences of Human Remains in Jacobs’ Cavern, 151 Goutp, G. M., Hitherto Undescribed Visual Phe- nomenon, 536 Granite, New Spheroidal, J. F, Kemp, 503 Hate, G. E., and R. H. Tucker, Fifth Satellite of Jupiter, 500 Hatt, E. H., American Association for the Ad- vancement of Science, 787 Haller, B., Lehrbuch der vergleichenden Anatomie, J. P. MoM., 368 Harris, R. A., Drawing Board and Seales in Trigonometry and Navigation, 108 HARSHBERGER, J. W., Flora of Serpentine Barrens of Southeast Pa., 339 Harvard University, Endowment of Applied Sci- ence, 668 Hartcuer, J. B., Vertebrate Paleontology at the Carnegie Museum, 559; and J. W. STanron, Judith River Beds and their Correlation with Belly River Beds, 211 Hatcher’s Reports of Princeton University Expe- ditions to Patagonia, W. H. Dat, 146 Hathaway’s Edition of Jonson’s Alchemist, H. C. Bouton, 556 Havana, Water Supply of, C. H. E1ceENMANN, 281 Hawtey, E. H., Primitive Flageolets, 412 Hay, O. P., and S. W. Wixutston, The Society of the Vertebrate Paleontologists of America, 827 Hayrorp, J. F., Longitude of Honolulu, 589 Hearp, F. D., Botanical Notes, 374; Toxie Effect of O and OH Ions on Seedlings of Indian Corn, 472 Herterin, A., Ascending Obelisk of Mont Pelé, 184 Heredity of ‘Angora’ Coat in Mammals, W. FE. CastTLE, 760 Herrick, ©. J., The Summer Laboratory as an Instrument of Biological Research, 263 Heyt, P. R., Specific Heat of Mercury, 56 Hinearp, E. W., Grand Gulf Formation, 180; Chemistry of Soils as Related to Crop Pro- duetion, 755 Hosss, W. H., The Frontier of Physiography, 538 Hobbs, W. R. P., Arithmetic of Electrical Measure- ments, W. S. FRANKLIN, 242 Hoiianp, W. J., Rothschild and Jordan’s Revision of Sphingide, 15 Honolulu, Longitude of, J. F. Hayrorn, 589 Hopkins, T. C., Onondaga Academy of Science, 530 Horticultural and Agricultural Terms, New, H. J. WEespeER, 501 Hortvet. J.. Elementary Practical Physics, W. LEC. Stevens, 271 SCIENCE. v Houeu, T., and W. T. Sepawick, Training in Phys- iology and Hygiene and Publie Schools, 353 Houen, W., Anthropological Society of Washing- ton, 18, 148 Hovey, E. O., N. Y. Acad of Sci., Geology and Mineralogy, 17, 631, 789; Mont Pelé, 633 Howarp, L. O., Mexican Cotton Boll Weevil, 693 Hrpiicka, A., Contribution to the Craniology of the People of Scotland, 568 Hutt, G. F., Mann’s Advanced Opties, 661 Hurp, H. M., Duty and Responsibility of the Uni- versity in Medical Education, 65 Huxley Memorial Lecture, 634 Ichthyosauria, Triassic, Recent Literature on, J. C. Merriam, 311 Indian Pottery, F. S. DELLENBAUGH, 148 Jackson, D. C., Typical College Course dealing with Phases of Electrical Engineering, 710 Jonson, D. S., Jamaica as a Tropical Botanical Station, 210 Judith River Beds and Belly River Beds, J. W. Hatcuer and T. W. Sranton, 211 Jupiter, Fifth Satellite of, R. H. Tuoxer, G. FE. HAtg, 500 Kearney, T. H., Protective Function of Raphides, 244 Kertioee, V. L., Some Insect Reflexes, 693; and R. G. Bett, Variations Induced in Bombyx mori by Controlled Varying Food Supply, 741 Kemp, J. F., A New Spheroidal Granite, 503 Kine, F. H., Soluble Salts in Soils, 343 Kirtland’s Warbler, Breeding Area of, in Mich- igan, C. C. ADAMS, 217 Kite Construction, Professor Bell on, H. H. Cray- TON, 204 Knight, Wilbur Clinton, A. Netson, 406 Kunz, G. F., A New Lilac-colored Spodumene, 280; and C. BASKERVILLE, Action of Radium, Roentgen Rays and Ultra-violet Light on Min- erals and Gems, 769 Kunzite, C. BASKERVILLE, 303 L., F. A., Exhibit of U. S. National Museum at St. Louis, 248 Laborde, Professor, Brain of, E. A. SprrzKa, 346 Lambe, L. M., Recent Zoopaleontology, 60 Lang, A. C., Absorbed Gases and Vulcanism, 760 LANKESTER, E. R., The Limits of Science, 143 Lrg, 8., American Method of Appointing Univer- sity Professors, 89 Lehfeldt, R. A., Text-book of Physies, W. LreC. STEVENS, 271 Lenuer, V., Univ. of Wisconsin Science Club, 755 Lesley, J. Peter, J. J. STEVENSON, 1 Lister Institute, 219 Livineston, B. E., Michigan Plant Societies again, 435 Livingston, B, E., Diffusion and Osmotie Pressure in Plants, C. E. Bessey, 208 Lockyer, N., Address of President of British Asso- ciation, 385, 417; Simultaneous Solar and Terrestrial Changes, 611 Loner, O., The Limits of Science, 145 Loew, F. A., Toxic Effect of H and OH Ions on Seedlings of Indian Corn, 304 vi SCIENCE. Long Island, Geology of, A. C. Vreatou, 213; Re- survey of, M. L. Funter and A. C. VEATCH, 729 f Loucu, J. E., N. Y. Acad. of Sci., Anthropology and Psychology, 81, 724 Loueuiin, G. F., Mass. Inst. Technology Geolog- ical Journal Club, 791 Lucas, F. A., Biological Society of Washington, 689, 722 McM., J. P., Duerden’s West Indian Madrepo- rarian Polyps, 80; Haller’s Lehrbuch der ver- gleichenden Anatomie, 368; Plate’s Ueber die Bedeutung Darwinische Selectionsprincips, 628 MacCurpy, G. G., German Anthropological Assoc., 623; Anthropology at the British Assoc., 716 MAcFARLANE, J. M., Relation of Science to Com- mon Life, 169 MacMurray, C., Biological Laboratory at the Tor- tugas, 57 Malaria Expedition to the Gambia, 381 Man, Cultivated, Definition of, C. W. Etior, 76 Many, ©. R., Drude’s Theory of Optics, 432 Mann, ©. R., Advanced Optics, G. F. Hurt, 661 Marine, U. S., Hospital Service, W. Wyman, 289; Biological Survey of Univ. of California, W. E. Rirrer, 360 Massachusetts Inst. Technology Geological Journal Club, G. F. Lovexutuin, 791 Mathematical Society, American, F. N. Cotx, 410, 664 Mathematics, Association of Teachers of, in Mid- dle States and Maryland, 791 Matter, Modern Views of, 122 May, D. W., Relation of Lime and Magnesia to Metabolism, 149 Mayer, A. G., Bahamas vs. Tortugas as a Station for Research in Marine Zoology, 369 Medical Education, Duty and Responsibility of , the University, H. M. Hurp, 65 Mendel’s Law of Heredity, W. E. CastiE, 396 MENDENHALL, W. C., Technical Education, 295 Mercury, Specific Heat of, P. R. Hey, 56 Merriam, J. C., Triassic Ichthyosauria, 31 Merritt, E., Radioactive Substances, 41; Amer- ican Physical Society, 662 Metabolism, Relation of Lime and Magnesia to, D. W. May, 149 Meteorie Fall, Bath Furnace, A. M. Minter, 243 Meteorological, Observations with Kites at Sea, A. L. Roren, 113; Investigation, Methods of, W. N. Suaw, 487 Meteorology, Current Notes on, R. DEC. Warp, 90, 154, 185, 217, 314, 345, 505, 731, 795; at the British Association, A. L. Rotcu, 657 Mitty, H. R., Antarctica, 182 Mittrr, A. M., Bath Furnace Meteorie Fall, 243 Millikan, R. A., Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat, W. LEC. Stevens, 271 Minerals and Gems, Action of Radium, Roentgen Rays and Ultra-violet Light on, G. F. Kunz and C. BASKERVILLE, 769 — ‘ Mirenett, §. A., N. Y. Acad. of Sci., Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry, 559, 727 Morse, M., Unusual Abundance of Myriapods, 59 Moseley Educational Commission, 505 Mosquito, A New, W. L. UnpERwoop, 182: Migra- tions, J. B. Smrry, 761 t CONTENTS AND INDEX. Mixer, G., Bailey’s Discussion of Variable Stars in the Cluster Centauri, 593 Misrersera, H., International Congress of Arts and Science at St. Louis, 559, 788 Mourpacu, L., Gonionemus versus Gonionema, 373 Museum, U. S. National, Exhibit of, at St. Louis, F. A. L., 248 Myers, B. D., Schneider’s Histologie der Tiere, 409 Myriapods, Unusual Abundance of, M. Morse, 99 National Academy of Sciences, 688 Naturalists, American Society of, 766 Navy, Civil Engineers of, 440 .Netson, A., Wilbur Clinton Knight, 406 New Mexico, Abbreviations of, T. D. A. CocK- ERELL, 58; Higher Educational Institutions of, W. G. TicHT, 85 New York Academy of Sciences, Geology and Mineralogy, G. I. Frytay, 17; E. O. Hovey, 17, 631, 789; Anthropology and Psychology, J. E. Loven, 81, 724; Biology, M. A. BiGE- Low, 559; Astronomy, Physics and Chemis- try, S. A. MircHert, 559, 727; Zoological Park, H. F. O., 218 Nutrients, Isodynamie Replacement of, H. P. Armssy, 481 Nutrition Experiments, 475. O., H. F., New York Zoological Park, 218; Re- cent Zoopaleontology, 665, 699, 835 Oertel, T. E., Medical Microscopy, G. F. WHITE, 434 Ohio State University, Lake Laboratory, 92 Onondaga Acad. of Sci., T. C. HopKins, 530 Ornithological Club, Michigan, A. W, Bain, JR., 435 Ornithologists’ Union, American, J. H. Sacr, 783 Osteological Terms, S. W. WILLISTON, 829 Oudin, M. A., Polyphase Apparatus and Systems, W. S. FRANKLIN, 241 Oxalate of Lime in Plants, H. W. Wizey, 115 Paleontologists, Vertebrate, Society of the, S. W. Wrtriston, O. P. Hay, 827 Paleontology, Vertebrate, at the Carnegie Mu- seum, J. B. HarcHer, 569 Parker, G. H., Willey’s Zoological Results, 179 Parthenogenetic Workers, Origin of Female and Worker Ants from the Eggs of, W. M. WHEELER, 830 Pathology, Modern, An aspect of, S. FLEXNER, 3 Parrerson, A. M., American Chemical Society, 97 Pearson, K., The Limits of Science, 140 Peirce’s Plant Physiology, C. E. Brssry, 52 Pelé, Mont, Obelisk of, A. Herprin, 184; E. O. Hovey, 633; I. C. Russex1, 792 Philosophical Society of Washington, WeEAD, 723 Phototropism under Light-rays of Different Wave- lengths, J. B. DANDENO, 604 Physical Society, American, BE. Mrrrirr, 662 Physics, Notes on, W. 8. F., 282, 312; Misuses of, by Biologists and Engineers, W. S. FRANKLIN, 641 Physiography, The Frontier of, W. H. Hopss, 538 Physiology and Hygiene, Public School Training in, W. T. Sepewick and T. Houeu, 353 Pittsburgh Academy of Science, Biology, F. 8. WEBSTER, 791 Coie NEW SERIES. VoL, XVIII. Plant, Upland, Societies of Kent Co., Mich., F. DaniEts, 215; B. E. Livineston, 435 Plate, L., Ueber die Bedeutung des Darwinische Selectionsprincips, J. P. McM., 628 Pomologieal Society of America, 369 Psychological Literature, J. R. ANGELL, 748 Psychology, American, Ten Years of, E. F. BucHNER, 193, 233 Publications, Antedated, J. A. ALLEN, 631 Putnam, F. W., and B. I. WHEELER, Ethnological and Archeological Survey of California, 570 QuE Sgais-JE? The Limits of Science, 142 Quotations, 89, 122, 138, 186, 219, 440, 441, 474, 634, 833 Radioactive Substances, E. Merritt, 41 Radium, 347; and Cancer, A. G, Bett, Z. T. Sowers, 155; and Helium, 186; A Possible Use for, X., 338 Raphides, Protective Function of, T, H. Kearney, 244 Reed, Walter, Memorial of, 316 Reflexes, Some Insect, V. L. Ketioae, 693 Remains, Bear and Deer, on Onondaga Lake, W. M. Smattwoop, 26; Human, Evidences of, in Jacob’s Cavern, C. N. Gouxp, 151 Rhizoctonia solani, Fruiting Stage of, F. M. Rotrs, 729 Rhodes Scholarships, 156, 834 Ricuarps, H. M., Biological Laboratory at the Tortugas, 58 Right-handedness, A. F. CHAMBERLAIN, 788 Ritter, W. E., Marine Biological Survey Work of University of California, 360 Rotrs, F. M., Rhizoctonia solani, 729 Rorcu, A. L., Meteorological Observations with Kites at Sea, 113; Meteorology at the Brit- ish Association, 657 Rothschild and Jordan’s Revision of Lepidopter- ous Family Sphingide, W. J. HoLianp, 15 Rowland and FitzGerald, Collected Papers of, R. 8. W., 366 Rubber Tree, Central American, New Species of, O. F. Coox, 436 RusseEtt, I. C., The Pelé Obelisk, 792 Sage, J. H., American Ornithologists’ Union, 783 St. Louis Academy of Sciences, W. TRELEASE, 688, 753 Salisbury, Lord, as a Man of Science, 440 Salts, Soluble, found in Soils, F. H. Kine, 343 Sanford, F., Physics, W. LeC. Stevens, 271 Sanitation and the Panama Canal, 732 Schneider, K. C., Lehrbuch der vergleichenden Histologie der Tiere, B. D. Myers, 409 Science, Limits of, W. T. THiserron-Dyer, 138, 141, 143; K. Pearson, 140; J. Burpon-Sanp- ERSON, 140; Quer Sgais-JE?, 142; E. R. LANKESTER, 143; O. Loner, 145; Relation of, to Common Life, J. M. Macrartane, 169; and Medicine in the Modern University, C. S. SHERRINGTON, 675 Seientifie Books, 15, 52, 80, 112, 146, 179, 208, 241, 271, 336, 366, 409, 432, 470, 497, 529, 556, 593, 627, 661, 748, 785, 824; Notes and News, 28, 60, 93, 124, 157, 191, 220, 252, 285, 316, 348, 382, 413, 445, 476, 508, 541, 571, 606, 636, 669, 702, 733, 766, 798, 837; Jour- nals and Articles, 54, 148, 180, 209, 242, 435, 499, 530, 558, 602, 629, 662, 687, 751, 786, 825 SCIENCE. Vii Sepewick, W. T., and T. Hoveu, Training in Physiology and Hygiene and Publie Schools, 353 SEIDELL, A., Washington Chemical Soe., 828 Seminar Method in Natural Sciences, K. W. GENTHE, 116 SHarruck, G. B., Expedition to Bahama Islands, 427 Suaw, W. N., Methods of Meteorological Investi- gation, 487 Sepp, J. C., The Word Barometer, 278 SHERMAN, H. C., American Chemical Society, New York Section, 602, 753 SHERRINGTON, C. S., Science and Medicine in the Modern University, 675 ee F. S., Clemson College Science Club, 691, 8 Shorter Articles, 26, 59, 87, 115, 149, 182, 211, 244, 280, 303, 338, 371, 412, 436, 473, 501, 537, 563, 604, 633, 693, 729, 760, 792, 829 Srmonps, F. W., Texas Academy of Science, 301 Stocum, W. F., Medical Research Laboratory of Colorado College, 58 Small’s Flora of Southeastern United States, F. V. CovILyE, 627 SMaLLwoop, W. M., Bear and Deer Remains on Shores of Onondaga Lake, 26 Smiru, E. A., and T. H. Atpricu, Grand Gulf Formation, 20; Carboniferous Fossils in ‘Ocoee’ Slates in Ala., 244 Sairu, J. B., Mosquito Migrations, 761 Smitnu, J. C., Animal Parasite supposed to be Cause of Yellow Fever, 530 Societies and Academies, 17, 54, 81, 148, 210, 275, 301, 369, 410, 435, 530, 559, 602, 630, 662, 688, 722, 751, 789, 825 Soils, Chemistry of, as related to Crop Produc- tion E. W. Hirearp, 755 Solar and Terrestrial Changes, Simultaneous, N. LooxyeEr, 611 Sowers, Z. T., and A. G. Bett, Radium and Cancer, 155 Spirzka, E. A., Dangers of Formal, 87; Brain of Professor Laborde, 346; Brain-weight of Japanese, 371; Brain-weight of Brothers, 699 Spodumene, New Lilac-colored, G. F. Kunz, 280 Stanton, T. W., and J. B. Harcuer, Judith River and Belly River Beds, 211 Stearns, R. E. C., Eucalypts in the Philippines, 439 Stevens, W. LEC., Cheston, Dean and Timmer- man’s Laboratory Physics; Twiss’ Laboratory Physics; Hortvet’s Elementary Physics; Ferry’s Practical Physies; Millikan’s Me- chanics, Molecular Physics and Heat; San- ford’s Elements of Physics; Andrews and Howland’s Elements of Physics; Gage’s In- troduction to Physical Science; Lehfeldt’s Physics; Edser on Light; Chwolson’s Lehr- buch der Physik, 271 Stevenson, J. J., J. Peter Lesley, 1 Symineton, J., Address to Anthropological Sec- tion of British Association, 545 T., R. H., Scientific Journals and Articles, 558 *Tablettes Zoologiques,’ H. Craw ery, 59 Texas Academy of Science, F. W. Srronps, 301 Theobald, F. V., Economic Zoology of British Mu- seum, F. M. WeEBSTER, 529 vill Thermodynamics, Graphics of, R. H. THurston, 247 THISELTON-DyER, W. T., The Limits of Science, 138, 141, 143 Thompson, Elizabeth, Science Fund, 442 Tuomson, E., Electricity at High Pressures, 337 Tuurston, R. H., Graphics of Thermodynamics, 247 Thurston, Robert Henry, 609; Resolutions of Fac- ulty of Cornell Univ. on Death of, T. F. Crane, E. W. Hurrcut and W. F. DuRAND, 732 TicHt, W. G., Higher Educational Institutions of New Mexico, 85 Tissue, of Strasburger, M. C. Fereuson, 308 TrrcHEner, E. B., Hitherto Unpublished Visual Phenomenon, 603 TirrTMann, O. H., Coast and Geodetic Survey, 33 Tomso, JR., R., University Registration Statistics, 737 Torrey Botanical Club, F. S. Earwe, 630, 690, 754, 790 Toxie Effect of H and OH Ions on Seedlings of Indian Corn, F. A. Lonw, 304; F. K. Cam- ERON, 411; F. D. Heaxp, 472 Transvaal, Vegetation of, J. B. Davy, 696 TRELEASE, W., St. Louis Acad. of Sci., 688, 753 True, A. C., New Agricultural Education, 684 Tucker, R. H., and G. EH. Hats, Fifth Satellite of Jupiter, 500 Twiss, G. R., Laboratory Exercises in Physics, W. LEC. StEvens, 271 Unprrwoop, W. L., A New Mosquito, 182 University, and Educational News, 31, 64, 95, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 288, 320, 352, 384, 415, 448, 478, 512, 543, 576, 608, 640, 672, 704, 736, 768, 800, 840; Professors, American Method of Appointing, S. Lex, 89; Registration Statis- tics, R. TomsBo, JR., 737 Vaccination, A Case for, C.-E. A. Winstow, 101 Vaueuan, V. C., Johns Hopkins Hospital Reports, 785 Vaughan, Dr. V. C., Twenty-fifth Anniversary of Graduation, 48 Veatcu, A. C., Geology of Long Island, 213; and M. L. Fourier, Results of Resurvey of Long Island, 729 Vernon, H. M., Variation in Animals and Plants, C. B. Davenport, 16 Visual Phenomenon, Hitherto Undescribed, G. M. Goutp, 536; E. B. TircHener, 603; P. FRAZER, 729 Vulcanism, Absorbed Gascs and, A. C. Lanes, 760 W., R. DeC., Arrhenius’s Physik, 498 W., R. 8., Collected Papers of Rowland and Fitz- Gerald, 366 WapsworrtH, F. L. O., Exchanges offered by Alle- gheny Observatory Library, 471 Washington, H. §., Chemical Analysis of Igneous Rocks, F. S. Apams, 470 SCIENCE. CONTENTS AND INDEX. Warp, R. DeC., Current Notes on Meteorology, 90 154, 185, 217, 314, 345, 505, 731, 795 WarMaAN, P. C., A Plea for Better English in Sei- ence, 563 Washburn College Observatory and Physical Lab- oratory, 444 Watkins, John Elfreth, M. Benzamin, 300 Warts, W. W., Address to Geological Section of British Association, 449 Weap, C. K., Philosophical Society of Washing- ton, 723 WesperR, H. J., Botanical Society of Washington, 19; New Horticultural and Agricultural Terms, 501 =. WessterR, F. M., Theobald’s Report on Economic Zoology of British Museum of Natural His- tory, 529; Blatchley’s Orthoptera of Indiana, 557 Wesster, F. S., Pittsburgh Academy of Science, Biology, 791 Weep, C. M., Eliot and Soulé on Caterpillars and their Moths, 53 Weevil, Cotton Boll, Mexican, L. O. Howarp, 693 WHEELER, B. I., and F. W. Putnam, Ethnological and Archeological Survey of California, 570 WHEELER, W. M., Dodge’s General Zoology, 824; Origin of Female and Worker Ants from the Eggs of Parthenogenetic Workers, 830 Wurepte, G. C., Whinery on Municipal Public Works, 336 Wuirtr, G. F., Oertel’s Medical Microscopy, 434 Witey, De W. C., and R. Arnoxp, Geological So- ciety of American Universities, 691 Winey, H. W., Oxalate of Lime in Plants, 115 Willey, A., Zoological Results, G. H. Parker, 179 WILLIAMS, R. P., High School Chemistry in Rela- tion to Work of a College Course, 330 Wituiston, S. W., Specialization in Education, 129; and O. P. Hay, The Society of Verte- brate Paleontologists of America, 827; Some Osteological Terms, 829 WinNsLow, C.-E. A., A Case for Vaccination, 101 Wisconsin University Science Club, V. LENHER, 755 Woops, A. F., Bacterial Spot, a New Disease of Carnations, 537 Woopwarp, C. M., New Opportunity for Second- ary Schools, 225 : Woopwarp, R. S., Education and the World’s Work of To-day, 161; International Confer- ence of Arts and Science, 302 Wyman, W., U. S. Marine Hospital Service, 289 X., A Possible Use for Radium, 338 Yellow Fever, Animal Parasite supposed to be Cause of, J. C. Smiru, 530 Zoology, Marine, Bahamas vs. Tortugas for Re- search in, A. G. Maymr, 369 Zoopaleontology, Recent, L. M. Lamser, 60; H. F. 0., 665, 699, 835 PieNCE 4& WEEKLY JOURNAL DEVOTED TO THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE, PUBLISHING THE OFFICIAL NOTICES AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE, EpriToRiaL CoMMITTEE: S. NEwcomsB, Mathematics; R. S. WoopwaRD, Mechanics; E. C. PICKERING Astronomy ; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics ; R. H. THURSTON, Engineering ; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry ; CHARLES D. WaAtcort, Geology ; W. M. Davis, Physiography ; HrNRyY F. OsBorRN, Paleon- tology ; W. K. Brooxs, C. HART MERRIAM, Zoology ; S. H. ScupDER, Entomology ; C. E. BessEy, N. L. Brirron, Botany ; C. S. Minot, Embryology, Histology; H. P. BowpiTcH, Physiology; WILLIAM H. WELCH, Pathology ; J. McKEEN CATTELL, Psychology. Fripay, Juty 3, 1903. CONTENTS: J. Peter Lesley: Proressor J. J. STEVENSON. = 1 An Aspect of Modern Pathology: Dr. Suwon FLEXNER Scientific Books :— Rothschild and Jordan’s Revision of the Lepidopterous Family Sphingide: Dr. W. J. Hottanno. Vernon on Variation in Ani- mals and Plants: Prorrssor C. B. DAveN- Socicties and Academies :— Section of Geology and Mineralogy of the New York Academy of Sciences: GEORGE I. Frytay, Dr. E. O. Hovey. Anthropolog- ical Society of Washington: Dr. WALTER Hovucu. Botanical Society of Washing- REE cette VV RBBEIR Ad.) o.< ics sata a, ia eletelts sis, « 17 Discussion and Correspondence :— The Grand Gulf Formation: PRoressor Evucene A. SmirH, Dr. Truman H. ULATED REES MES Cave Sohd yeh Reelin, Wars oe 20 Shorter Articles :— The Remains of Bear and Deer on the Shores of Onondaga Lake: W. M. SMALt- UME Ara AS 3 acohal'e: a [0 2 wie: 0 «ya dole ” Jury 24, 1903.] In the discussion one of the members stated that another sample, drawn from the same locality but at a different time, was found by him to be of normal com- position. On the Relation of the Specific Gravity of Urine to the Solids Present: J. H. Lone. (By title.) Cereal Foods: EpwarpD GUDEMAN. Analysis of a large number of samples from forty-three different manufacturers shows an average composition of PS Maca che arc w oh seein ole axe Pubs ah atatet as 0.3 ivvnah po Sihetengancn: sehen cece 0.5 TUPI pn eek BEBGer OPE taser eos 0.7 TR IGTO EWS Ge cabiGe RDS OPAUr Eee 10.5 Carbohydrates (by difference) ..... 88.0 100.0 The Determination of Starch: W. A. Noyes and R. B. Arno. One of the objects of this work was to determine the best conditions for hy- drolysis. One hour is the most favorable length of time with 0.5 per cent. acid at a temperature of 100°, or half an hour at 111°. Solutions giving 2 per cent. glucose give better results than those giving 0.5 per cent. glucose. In neutralizing the acid, it is much more desirable to stop a little short of the exact point rather than to overstep it. The greatest hydrolysis that could be obtained was 96-99 per cent. of the theoretical. Austin M. Patrerson. THE CASE FOR VACCINATION, Tue recent appearance of an admirable book entitled ‘A Concise History of Small- pox and Vaccination in Europe,’ by Ed- ward J. Edwardes, has aroused new en- thusiasm among British sanitarians in their efforts to undo the evil effects of the last Vaccination Act, which permitted the exemption of those persons known as ‘con- scientious objectors.’ Its lesson is equally SCIENCE. 101 salutary in this country, where the vaccina- tion laws are at present far too lax, and where the opponents of vaccination are conducting an active campaign for their repeal. It should be frankly acknowledged that the responsibility incurred by the state in compelling its citizens to submit to the in- troduction of vaccine matter is a grave one. It is, in the first place, a serious infringe- ment of personal liberty ; and, in the second place, it must be owned that the process is attended with a certain, though an almost inappreciable, amount of danger. When arm-to-arm vaccination was practised, loath- some diseases were occasionally conveyed from one human being to another, but the general introduction of calf lymph now prevents the possibility of any such con- tingency. The transmission of tuberculosis, too, is effectually precluded by the tests to which the calves are submitted and by the addition to the lymph of glycerin. Erysipelas and tetanus, on the other hand, still sometimes follow vaccination. In a very large majority of cases these complica- tions are due to secondary infection by the removal of dressings from the vaccination wound; in a few instances they have been traced to infection of the lymph itself. The extent of these dangers is, however, very slight. Dr. McFarland* in a careful review of all previous medical literature, was last year only able to find 95 cases of tetanus recorded as due to vaccination. The total number of deaths from erysipelas in the United States in 1900 was 2,861, and the total number from tetanus, 1,664, in a population of 75,994,575 with 1,039,094 deaths from all causes; and it can scarcely be claimed that any large proportion of this insignificant number was due to vac- cination. On the other hand, the benefits which **Tetanus and Vaccination,’ Journal of Med- ical Research, VII, 1902, p. 474. 102 vaccination has bestowed upon the human race may best be estimated by comparing the popular dread of smallpox prior to 1800 with the indifference with which it is regarded now. The ‘Concise History,’ re- ferred to above, begins with a series of cita- tions from the earliest medical writers, and we note that Rhazes, in the tenth century, attempted to explain how it happened that scarcely any one could escape the disease, and Mercurialis (born in 1530) said that ‘almost every person must have it once.’ In the eighteenth century statistics first became available from the works of Stissmileh, De la Condamine and others. The most important are those of Sweden, where in the period from 1774 to 1800 the annual smallpox death rate averaged 2,049 per million living and accounted for about one thirteenth of the total deaths from all causes. The statistics for Copenhagen, for London, for Berlin, for Liverpool and for’ Glasgow show in general the same rela- tions, although in the latter city from 1783 to 1800 smallpox caused nearly one fifth of the total deaths. Nine tenths of the fatal eases of smallpox occurred in children un- der ten years of age. Towards the end of the eighteenth cen- tury the struggle against this dread disease seemed almost hopeless. The practise of inoculation, which consisted in the intro- duction of actual smallpox matter under the skin, in order to induce a mild attack at a time when the body was in condition to meet it, had failed to effect any reduction in the general death rate. Just when it seemed that ‘the continued raging of that pitiless plague’ was the only prospect for mankind, Edward Jenner proved that an attack of the mild disease of cattle known as cowpox furnished protection against in- fection with the smallpox. He suggested ‘vaccination’ with cowpox material as a simple prophylactic against smallpox, and it is the introduction of this process which SCIENCE. [N.S. Vox. XVIII. No. 447. Dr. Edwardes calls ‘the greatest sanitary fact which the world has ever known.’ It was in June, 1798, that the physician of Gloucestershire published his ‘Inquiry into the Causes and Effects of the Variole Vaccine,’ and by 1801 it had been trans- lated into Latin, German, French and Dutch. ‘‘As if an angel’s trumpet had sounded over the earth, thus spread the good tidings into all lands, that a pre- ventive had been found against the horrible disease smallpox, so long the scourge of humanity.’’ The protective effect of vaccination was at once established by actual experiment, and on a very large scale, by inoculating those who had been vaccinated with the true smallpox virus. Woodville stated in 1802 that of 7,500 persons vaccinated at the smallpox hospital, about one half had been since inoculated, without any effect being produced. Dr. Charles Creighton and Alfred Russel Wallace, the chief au- thorities of the ‘anti-vaccinationists,’ have attempted to discredit these tests by claim- ing that Woodville’s lymph was contami- nated and that the vaccination was really inoculation in itself. It is amusing to note that Wallace adopts this explanation on page 8 of his ‘ Vaccination a Delusion,’ and on page 76 of the same book seriously main- tains not only that vaccination exercises no protective effect, but that after a pre- vious attack of smallpox ‘instead of there being any immunity, there is really a some- what increased susceptibility to a second attack.’ It is odd that this startling fact was not noticed in the days when every one had the smallpox at least once! Wood- ville’s account of his experiments shows that only a very small proportion of his cases—and those all prior to June, 1799— lay open to the objection mentioned above, and his conclusions were confirmed by sim- ilar tests, notably by 8,000 cases treated at the Medical College in Berlin. A small but JuLy 24, 1903.] well-controlled experiment was carried out at Milton, Massachusetts, in 1809, with the same result. The statistics of the early part of the nineteenth century furnish the first evi- dence of the effect of vaccination as ap- plied upon a large seale. In Sweden, for example, the average annual smallpox rate “per million was 1,914 from 1792 to 1801, 623 from 1802 to 1811, and 133 from 1812 to 1821. In Berlin the actual deaths from the disease amounted to 4,453 for the ten years 1782-91, 4,999 for the next decade, 2,955 for, 1802-11, and 555 for 1812-22. The facts are brought out in a still more striking manner when the figures are plot- ted graphically, as was done for London from 1650 to 1900 by Dr. Newsholme.* Wallace published a similar diagram of the Swedish death rates which is alone enough to convince a candid student that something remarkably affected smallpox mortality about 1800; but he closed his eyes to its obvious teaching, and maintained that inasmuch as the curve fell off sharply from 1800 to 1803 before vaccination had become general, the decrease was due not to vaccination, but to ‘sanitation.’ It is certainly true that the deaths from small- pox decreased in the two or three years after 1800 without reference to vaccination, just as they had decreased periodically after every epidemic in the eighteenth century. But after every such previous decrease the mortality had risen again within five or ten years to another maxi- mum. Why, after the decrease in 1803, did the death rate in Sweden remain at a minimum, never having risen since 1809 over 1,000 per million, and but four times over 500, while in 1801 it was 2,566, in 1800 5,126, in 1799 1,609, in 1796 1,963 and in 1795 2,956? There is not the **The Epidemiology of Smallpox in the Nine- teenth Century,’ British Medical Journal, July 5, 1902. SCIENCE. 103 smallest shred of evidence that ‘sanitation’ received any great and sudden impetus at exactly this time, unless sanitation be used to cover all the arts which tend toward ‘the prevention of premature death.’ In this wholly legitimate sense sanitation in- eludes a number of prophylactic measures, each adapted to the diminution of a specific disease. When sanitation covered only isolation and quarantine it could control plague to a certain extent, but not small- pox, not typhoid fever, not diphtheria, not measles. When vaccination became a sanitary measure, sanitation conquered smallpox; but typhoid fever was not re- stricted until the day of water supplies and sewerage systems; diphtheria, not until the introduction of antitoxin. A fairly steady decrease in the general death rate has, indeed, occurred, due to a complex of fac- tors not easily analyzed, but a sudden col- lapse such as that which affected the smallpox death rate after 1800 has never been manifest without a definite and tangible cause. That ‘sanitation’ has not affected the other zymoties to the same de- gree as smallpox has been graphically shown by A. F. Burridge in a recent pub- lication.* During the first quarter of the nineteenth century it was thought that a single vac- cination in infaney would give indefinite protection against smallpox; but about 1830 this view began to lose ground. An adult population now existed, protected, not, as in other times, by previous attacks of smallpox, but only by the less potent effect of vaccination. Smallpox began, therefore, to recur, but modified in two notable re- spects. In the first place, its age incidence had shifted ; whereas of 1,252 cases in three Prussian towns before vaccination began, 94.5 per cent. were under ten and not one over twenty years; of 1,677 cases in Wiir- ** Vaccination and the Act of 1898,’ Journal of the Institute of Actuaries, October, 1902. 104 temberg after vaccination began, 18.4 per cent. only were under 10, and 42 per cent. over twenty years. So it is shown by Dr. Creighton in his article on ‘Vaccination’ in the ‘Encyclopedia Britannica,’ that, in England and Wales, about 1847, three fourths of the deaths occurred under five years, while in the eighties less than a quarter, of the decedents were of this age. In the second place, beside this shifting of incidence, smallpox among the vaccinated proved much less fatal, even when it was contracted, than among the unvaccinated. Although minor epidemics began to re- cur, smallpox in vaccinated countries was insignificant in amount until 1870-5, when a ‘pandemic’ swept over Europe which recalled the normal conditions of the pre- vaccination period. Considering the vary- ing virulence of disease at different periods, and the fact that the importance of re- vaccination was not at all realized, such an epidemic was to be expected. The statistics for the early seventies have been used most dishonestly by the anti-vaccina- tionists in comparison with selected years of low mortality immediately after the introduction of vaccination in the attempt to show that no progress has been made. The worst year of this period in Hngland and Sweden, however, showed a death rate about half the average yearly rate for the last quarter of the eighteenth century. A comparison of the incidence of small- pox in this pandemie of 1870-5 upon dif- ferent countries introduces the second class of evidence as to the value of vaccination. Thus Dr. Edwardes shows that for four countries havine compulsory vaccination the average yearly smallpox death rate per million inhabitants was as follows: Eng- land, 361; Scotland, 314; Bavaria, 346; Sweden, 333. On the other hand, the rate for the same period was 953 in Prussia, 1,360 in Austria, 1,293 in Belgium and 958 in the Netherlands. All these countries SCIENCE. [N.S. Vox. XVIII. No. 447. had at this time no compulsory vaccina- | tion. The reverse has been affirmed in the ease of Prussia, and Creighton, in the ‘Eneyclopedia Britannica,’ states that re- vaccination ‘has been more or less the law in Prussia since 1835,’ and that ‘Prussia was the best revaccinated country in Europe’ in 1871. Dr. Edwardes discusses this question in some detail and quotes the official documents, which show explicitly. that there existed in Prussia ‘kein gesetz- licher Zwang zur Impfung.’ Further- more, the actual ratio of vaccination to births in Berlin is on record, and the per- centage ranged from 29 to 58 between 1865 and 1870. In this city there were 6,326 smallpox deaths per million living in 1871! The ‘great pandemic’ taught the lesson that both- vaccination and revaccination were essential. In 1874 Germany enacted a law providing for compulsory vaccina- tion within the second year and revaccina- tion within the twelfth year. In Prussia the death rate, which had ranged from 95 to 2,624 per million from 1866 to 1874, drop- ped to 36 in 1875 and has been under 10 since 1885. For the empire as a whole, statistics, available only since 1886, show a rate of 4.2 in that year, decreasing to .5 in 1895 since which there has been annually less than one death per million. A com- parison with the statistics of Austria graphically made by Dr. Edwardes fur- nishes as striking a proof that vaccination is the only kind of sanitation which affects smallpox as could well be desired. Before 1870 the two countries had about the same amount of smallpox; since 1875 that in Austria has increased and that in Prussia has practically disappeared. The only dif- ference in conditions lies in the law of 1874. : Army statistics furnish striking confirm- atory evidence. Thus Burridge* compares moctmeute JULY 24, 1903.] the Prussian army, in which revaccination on entrance has been compulsory since 1834, with the French army, where it has only been thoroughly carried out since 1888, and with the Austrian army, where there was no revaccination prior to 1886. The attack rate per 100,000 in 1875-85 was 4.7 in the Prussian army, 133.6 in the French army and 333.7 in the Austrian army. In the twenty-five years 1875-99 there were only two deaths from smallpox in the Prussian army, one in 1884 and one in 1898. The main point to notice is that these extraordinary results have been at- tained by a general revaccination of the whole population. Revaccination of only a single class in the community can not prevent the occurrence of occasional cases in that class, because in a large body of men there must always be some vaccina- tions which have not been successful. Thus the smallpox death rate in the English army with revaccination has ranged from zero to twenty-nine during the last forty years. Wallace in ‘Vaccination a De- lusion’ made these figures look larger by raising them to rates per million (the basis of calculation being about 200,000 men), and then compared them with the rates for Ireland at the age period 15 to 45, which were only slightly higher from 1864 to 1894 (58 for the army, 65.8 for Ireland). Later he showed that the rate for 1873-94 was 37 in the army, 36.8 in the navy and 14.4 in the city of Leicester, and coneluded that ‘all the statements by which the publie has been gulled for so many years as to the almost complete immunity of the revac- einated army and navy are absolutely false.’ ‘There is no immunity. They have no protection.’ That is, Mr. Wallace selects one island in Europe where, largely from its isolation, smallpox happens not to have been serious, and one town in Eng- land where there has been almost no small- pox, and because these two places have had SCIENCE. 105 extraordinarily low death rates he main- tains that the low army death rate, indi- cates no protection! Yet the figures were before him which showed that the average of the annual death rates in the navy, which was less than 32 from 1873 to 1899, had been 257 from 1860 to 1873; in 1873 an order was issued which provided for the vaccination of all recruits on joining. The evidence derived from a comparison of the same country before and after the in- troduction of vaccination, and that based on the contrast at the same period between countries having different degrees of vac- cination, have now been briefly considered. The third class of facts includes the ‘direct evidence’ of the incidence of smallpox upon persons in the same community protected and unprotected by vaccination. At Chem- nitz in 1870-1, a special census was made to determine the condition of the population as regards vaccination, and it appeared that among those protected by vaccination or. previous smallpox the death rate was 1.2 per 10,000, while in the unprotected it was 442.9. Similarly at Sheffield in 1887-8* the deaths per 10,000 were 7.5 among the vaccinated and 347.9 among the unvac- cinated. An objection to statistics of this sort, made with some plausibility, is that the unvaccinated class includes a large pro- portion of children and of persons in feeble health or living under poor sanitary condi- tions. Regarding the first point, the Sheffield figures are conclusive. They are divided according to age periods and show that the rates per 10,000 living between fifteen and twenty years were, 7.0 in the vaccinated and 1,355.5 in the unvaccinated. Here no age difference comes in question. The second contention is met by the statistics collected by K6rési with reference to 14,678 persons dying from various causes in some Hungarian hospitals in 1886. The unvaccinated constituted 14 * Reviewed by Burridge, loc. cit. 106 per cent. of those who died from other dis- eases than smallpox and 81 per cent. of those who died from smallpox. Obviously it was the lack of vaccination which was at fault here, not feeble health nor unsanitary conditions. In opposition to these figures the anti-vaccinationists quote the experi- ence of the city of Leicester, where since 1882 the number of vaccinations has steadily decreased, falling to less than two per cent. of the births in some recent years. Smallpox has been introduced a number of times (38 cases in 1892, 308 in 1893, 8 in 1894, 4 in 1895, 4 in 1901), but has not spread extensively, and the death rate has remained very low. The opponents of vac- cination also quote, by way of contrast, statistics showing that an increasingly large proportion of hospital cases of smallpox oceur among the vaccinated,* and that in epidemics the attack of an unvaccinated person is often not recorded for some time.t Facts of the last two classes have, of course, no special significance except to indicate the need for revaccination. No one now supposes that a single vaccination affords absolute permanent protection, and with the increase of vaccination there must naturally come an increase of cases among the vaccinated. The experience of Leices- ter, on the other hand, is certainly of in- terest. It shows that under certain condi- tions the dangers of neglected vaccination may for a time be braved with impunity by a considerable portion of the community. This has been so far accomplished by prompt reporting and strict isolation of cases, and, according to the chairman of the public health committee of the town by the fact that ‘a handful of the population, including the medical men, sanitary staff, * London smallpox hospital, 40 per cent. in 1838, 94°/,, per cent, in 1879—Wallace. 7 The first unvaccinated case was the 174th at Cologne in 1870, the 42d at Bonn in the same year, and the 225th at Liegnitz in 1871—Creighton. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vox. XVIII. No. 447. smallpox nurses, ete., are as well vaccinated in Leicester. as in any other town, so that a cordon of protected persons can at once be drawn around any ease of smallpox which may oceur.’* It should be remem- bered, however, that the population of Leicester is still to some extent protected by the vaccinations carried out prior to the anti-vaccinationist agitation. Thus of the 358 persons attacked in 1892-5, 198 were returned as having been at some time vac- cinated. The experience of Gloucester is ominous for the future of the ‘Leicester experiment.’ Prior to 1892-3, according to Dr. Edwardes, ‘vaccination had been almost in abeyance, in Gloucester, and the inhabitants lived in a fools’ paradise.’ The result was an epidemic of 1,979 eases, with 434 deaths in a population of about 40,000, giving a death rate of 10,000 per million! With regard to the smallpox occurring im persons once vaccinated, there are two poimts to notice. In the first place, the ratio of deaths to cases is far lower than among the unvaccinated. Thus at the Leipsie city hospital in 1870-2 99 died among 139 unvaccinated cases, 116 died among 1,504 vaccinated cases, and none among 13 revaccinated cases. Creighton and Wallace object to these statistics on the ground that the death rate thus ap- parent among the unvaccinated is obviously too high, because ‘in pre-vaccination times the death rate (18.8 per cent.) was almost the same as it is now in the vaccinated and unvaccinated together’ (Creighton. Now it is quite impossible to fix any such general fatality rate; the ratio of deaths to cases has varied within wide limits both in the eighteenth century and recently. In the second place, it has been claimed that the ‘unvaccinated’ death rate is swollen by the inclusion in that class, of children who escaped vaccination on account of feeble * Windley, ‘Leicester and Smallpox, Journal of State Medicine, January, 1903, p. 21. JuLy 24, 1903.] health. In the ease of Gloucester, where vaccination has been so generally neglected, this objection can hardly apply. Yet at Gloucester in 1892-3, there were, under ten years of age, 26 attacks among the vaccinated with one death, and 680 at- tacks among the unvaccinated with 279 deaths. Statistics for six towns collected by the English Royal Commission of 1889 showed fatality rates of 35.4 among the unvaccinated and 5.2 among the vaccinated. The third objection made to the hospital statistics, namely, that the deaths of the unvaccinated class are unfairly increased by the inclusion of doubtful cases and those who have been vaccinated but show no sears, can scarcely apply to the commis- sion’s analyses. It will not, at any rate, have much weight, except with those who, like Mr. Wallace, believe that ‘‘in this mat- ter of official and compulsory vaccination both doctors and government officials, how- ever highly placed, however eminent, how- ever honorable, are yet utterly untrust- worthy.’’ A second important characteristie of the eases of smallpox in a once vaccinated population is that they are not only com- paratively light, but that they affect the later periods of life; and this represents an important gain in the life capital of the community. During the epidemic of 1870-3, Bavaria, with compulsory vaccina- tion, had 851 deaths under, and 3,520 deaths over, twenty years, while the Nether- lands without compulsory vaccination had 14,048 deaths under twenty and 6,524 at higher ages. In the same great epidemic 71 per cent. of the deaths at Leicester and 64 per cent. of the death at Gloucester oc- eurred under ten years. In London the percentage falling in this age class was 37, and in Warrington, with still more thor- ough vaccination, it was 22.5. A single vaccination then greatly reduces the probability of an attack of smallpox, SCIENCE. 107 postpones it to a later period of life and renders it less dangerous if it does ensue. To ensure absolute protection revaccination is required; and its efficacy is well indi- . eated by the experience of the Prussian army. In addition, one single bit of evi- dence may be adduced which is more stri- king, perhaps, than all the rest, the statisties of nurses in smallpox hospitals. These fig- ures are of special interest because we have here a fairly large class of persons whose condition as to vaccination is accurately known, and who are uniformly exposed to the contagion of the disease; and the ex- perience of two such communities is quoted by Dr. Edwardes. ‘‘During the epidemic of 1871 there were 110 persons engaged in the Homerton Fever Hospital, in attend- ance on the smallpox sick; all these, with two exceptions, were revaccinated, and all but these two escaped smallpox.’’ ‘‘Of 734 nurses and attendants in the Metro- politan Asylums Board Hospitals, 79 were survivors from smallpox attack—they es- eaped infection; 645 were revaccinated on entrance—they all escaped; 10 were not revaccinated, and the whole 10 took small- pox.’’ If statistics ever proved anything those quoted above prove the protective influence of vaccination. If any fact in science is certain, it is certain that a successful vac- cination absolutely prevents smallpox for a period of some seven to ten years, that after that period it renders the disease less fatal, and that its complete protective effect may be renewed by revaccination. The conclusion is obvious, not only that the state should oblige primary vaccination, but, in the words of a minority of the British Royal Commission, that ‘a second vaccination, at the age of twelve, ought to be made compulsory.’ C.-E. A. WINSLow. BroLoGicaAL DEPARTMENT, Massacnusetts INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY. 108 ON USES OF A DRAWING BOARD AND SCALES IN TRIGONOMETRY AND NAVIGATION.* Ir may seem a little strange that any one should think it worth while to eall special attention to a drawing board and scales as a means of solving spherical tri- angles and a few somewhat similar prob- lems. For, accurate results can be ob- tained through simple computations and rough results by aid of suitable diagrams = 230 120, 50. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 447. Suppose the dimensions of the drawing board to be about 22 by 40 inches. Let it be trimmed, as it were, with a metallic border three margins of which are divided into degrees and fractions of degrees so as to form a large rectangular protractor, as sketched in Fig. 1. The border of the fourth side may be graduated uniformly from its center, where is situated a pivot or pin about which the scales may revolve. Fig. 1. Sea py eeeaiee i) Such, for instance, are many cartographic pro- jections of the great and small circles of composed chiefly of curve systems. a hemisphere. But where results reliable to about 5’ of are or angle are required, and where computation is to be altogether dispensed with, it seems to me that the methods about to be described certainly possess merits which have not heretofore been fully recognized. * Delivered before the Philosophical Society of Washington, January 31, 1903. The scales to be used in the solution of spherical triangles are scales of sines, co- sines, tangents, ete., like those shown in Fig. 2, but having, of course, much finer graduations along the edges. For use upon a 20-by-40-inch board, the extreme length of the scales should be about 30 inches. For increasing the size of the di- visions, we shall suppose sines and cosines to have been multiplied by 2 in constructing the scales. In addition to trigonometrical scales it is supposed that we have several JuLy 24, 1903.] uniformly graduated scales, which are es- pecially useful in problems involving plane trigonometry, and a set of scales of merid- ional parts for various latitudes, each scale representing, say, 10 degrees of latitude. In all eases the scales must be straight and beveled on their edges. It is supposed that we have also a T-square with a uniformly graduated blade. RIGHT SPHERICAL TRIANGLES. By means of the board and scales we can find such products as cot b X tan c by lay- ing off cot b, according to the scale labeled cot x, along the base line of the protractor. Let a straight edge, turning about the Fia. 3. pivot, be directed toward value ¢ on the margin. The T-square shows the line ex- tending from the point where cot b was laid off to the straight edge. The distance is the product cot b X tan c. By reading this distance on a scale cos z, or double this distance on a scale 2 cos x we obtain a cer- tain angle which is the value of the angle A of a triangle right-angled at B. Napier’s rules enable one to see at a glance what product is required and how it is to be read. Where tangents and cotangents are involved, the application of this method is, of course, somewhat restricted on account of the length of the scales. SCIENCE. 109 SINE RATIOS IN SPHERICAL TRIANGLES. If two of the three given parts of a tri- angle are opposites, the unknown part op- posite the third given part becomes known through the equality of the sine ratios; viz., sin A: sin a=sin B: sin b=sin @: sine, or sin A sin 6 =sin B sin a, ete. The process of mechanically solving such problems can be illustrated by taking a particular case or problem; given A, a, B to find b. Find a on the scale labeled 2 sin x and direct the scale (pivoted to the board) towards B as found on the margin of the board; this locates a certain point. Next direct the scale towards A. Find on the scale as now directed a second point whose altitude is the same as that of the first. This is done by sliding the graduated T- square. The reading of the second point on the scale labeled 2 sin & (still pivoted to the board) is the required side b. RELATION BETWEEN THE THREE SIDES AND ONE ANGLE, In treating the problem—given the three sides to find an angle, or given two sides and the included angle to find the remain- ing side—it is important to consider two 110 methods, or constructions, analogous, but differing somewhat from each other. The first may be referred to as the gnomonic method, and the second as the sterographie. Let ABO, Fig. 3, be the spherical tri- angle. A plane tangent to the sphere at A contains the lines AD, AE, whose lengths are tan c, tan b. Imagine the triangle ODE revolved about DE into the plane ADE. In the plane quadrilateral ADOEA thus obtained, OD—sece c, OH =sec b, OB=0OC =1; also are BC=a, which measures the angle O. Assume now that we have scales of tan- gents and secants. The quadrilateral con- structed by aid of such scales and a pro- tractor gives the angle A when a, b, ¢ are the known parts, or a when A, b, c are known. In practice the quadrilateral is not actually constructed; but the work of finding the required unknown part of the triangle is arranged in accordance with the diagram in Fig. 3, which shows A and O as coinciding. More particulars about this arrangement may be gathered from the example. Given the two sides b, c of a spherical triangle and the included angle A, find the side a by means of the above-described apparatus. Lay off with the scale of tangents when pivoted to the drawing board a distance along the initial direction which reads c; this fixes on the board the pomt D. Lay off towards A, as found on the margin of the board, a distance which reads 6 on the tangent scale; this fixes on the board the point H. On beam compasses set the dis- tance DH, or mark it off upon a strip of paper. Next remove the scale of tangents and pivot to the board the scale of secants. Lay off on the secant scale, and beyond D, a distance which reads c; this fixes the point D,. With the beam compasses cen- tered at D,, describe an are. Lay off on the secant scale, still pivoted to the board SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. XVIII. No. 447. (and revolving about O) a distance which reads b and note where it intersects the are just drawn; this fixes the poimt £,. The angle read off on the margin of the board is the side a. The same construction taken in a slightly different order serves for finding A where a, b, c are the known parts. We now take up the stereographie method. The problems to be considered are the same as those to which the gno- moni¢ method applies. The advantage of the stereographiec method lies in the fact that tan $ aw does not approach infinity until « approaches 180°. A plane tangent to the sphere at A, Fig. 4, contains the lines AD’, AE’ whose lengths are 2 tan 4c, 2 tan 46. Imagine the triangle O’D’E’ revolved about D’H’ into the plane AD’H’. In the plane quad- rilateral AD’O’'H’A thus obtained, O’D’ = 2 see 4c, O'H' =2 sec 4 b, O'B=2 cost cc, O'C =2 cos 4 b and line BC =2 sin $ a. With suitable scales and a protractor. the quadrilateral AD’O’E’A could be con- structed and the required part of the spherical triangle could be thus deter- mined; but the more practical arrange- ment is that shown in the figure where O’ is made to fall upon A. Moreover, it is convenient to omit the factor 2 before tangents and secants. Given b, c, A to find a by means of ine above-described apparatus. Lay off by means of the scale labeled tan 4 a, pivoted to the drawing board, a distance along the initial direction which reads c; this fixes a point D’. Lay off on this scale now directed towards A, as. found on the margin of the board, a dis- tance which reads b; this fixes on the board a point EZ’. On beam compasses set the distance D’E’, or mark it off upon a strip of paper. Next remove the tan 4 & scale and pivot to the board the double scale shown in Fig. 2. Lay off with the Jury 24, 1903.) seale labeled see $ x, and beyond D’, a distance which reads c; this fixes a point D,’. With the beam compasses centered at D,’, describe an are. Lay off on the see 3 x scale, still pivoted to the board (and revolving about 0’), a distance which reads b and note where it intersects the are just drawn; this fixes a poimt £,’. Along the directions AD,’ and AE,’ locate the points B, C by laying off distances which read c and 6 upon the scale labeled 2 cos $ x The reading of the distance BC upon the seale labeled 2 sin $ « is the value of the side a. The same construction taken in a slightly different order serves for finding A when a, b, c are the known parts. In passing, it may be well to note that plane trigonometry applied to the triangles ADE and OED gives DE?= AD? + AE*?—2AD AE cos A = OD + 0? — 20D OE cosa .*. tan? e+ tan? ) —2 tan ¢ tan b cos A = sec? c + sec? b— 2 sec ¢ sec b cos a. Noting that sec? —=1-++ tan? and multiply- ing through by cos b cos c, we have, after transposing, cos a = cos b cos ¢ + sin b sin ec cos A. The same equation follows from the sec- ond method by noting that DE”? = AD? + Ak/?—2AD/ AE’ cos A; and ‘D/E’ : BC= sec } c: cos } b where BC —2 sin } a, and later on that 2 sin? } a=1— cos a, 2 cos? } a = 1 + cosa. POLAR TRIANGLES. Cases analogous to any of the above, but having sides and angles interchanged throughout, can be solved by the foregoing methods provided we first subtract all SCIENCE. P11 known parts from 180°, interchanging capital and small letters, and then after having solved this polar triangle, subtract the parts from 180°, and finally inter- change the capital and small letters. APPLICATIONS. The methods already described may be used to advantage in some classes of plane- table work. To obtain-the azimuth of the sun by one mechanical solution of the tri- angle, it is necessary that the telescope of the alidade be supplied with a vertical cirele. The direction of the sun could be ascertained by means of a good watch, but the spherical triangle would then have to be solved for two of its parts. The azimuth and hour angle of the sun or other heavenly body ean be obtained from an observed altitude with sufficient accuracy for enabling one to lay down a Sumner line at the assumed or dead-reckon- ing latitude, and for ascertaining the varia- tion of the magnetic needle at sea. Tables of sunrise and sunset can be com- puted with great facility by means of the stereographic method. In fact, the true zenith distance (BC) of the rising or set- ting body is a constant for all latitudes and dates. The distance between pole and zenith at any particular latitude is con- stant for all dates. (That is, D’, B and D,’ are fixed points for a given latitude, and about. B, the zenith, a circle can be de- scribed with 2 sin $ @ as radius.) Since the polar distance of sun or moon never exceeds 120°, scales of moderate length will suffice for all possible cases. Consider now the question of great circle sailing. The distance and initial course between two points specified by their latitudes and longitudes require the solution for two parts of a triangle whose given parts are two sides and the included angle. The longitude and latitude of the 112 vertex involve the solution of a right- angled triangle for two of its parts. Since it seems to be almost certain that a proposed great circle track will in reality be sailed as a series of rhumb lnes each terminating in or near the great circle, the methods of Mereator sailing will still be found useful. By aid of a set of merid- ional scales, problems in Mercator sailing ean be worked with great facility. For, the board, the uniformly divided scales, and the T-square constitute an ordinary traverse table, and the departure is readily ’ converted into difference of longitude through the equation merid. diff. lat. Dit NONee = re gid. ie > departure. To do this, suppose the meridional differ- ence of latitude to be laid off upon a uni- form scale rotating about the pin or pivot. Let the true difference be laid off along, or parallel to, the initial line. Rotate the former seale until the T-square indicates that the point representing meridional dif- ference is directly above that representing true difference. Now slide the T-square alone until a point in the initial line is reached which denotes the value of the de- parture. The reading of the rotated scale directly above this point is the difference of longitude. In conclusion, it should be said that the aim has been to use the drawing board proper merely as a surface upon which to loeate points or lines temporarily, the ac- curacy of the work depending upon the fact that the scales and border of the board are not subject to any considerable atmospheric or temperature changes. R. A. Harris. SCIENTIFIC BOOKS. ‘Zoology: Descriptive and Practical. P. Couron, A.M. Boston, D. C. Heath & Co. 1903. Part I., Descriptive, pp. x-+ 375. Part I1., Practical, pp. xvii + 204. Colton’s ‘Practical Zoology,’ which was pub- By Burn SCIENCE. sense of what is interesting. [N.S. Von. XVIII. No. 447. lished seventeen years ago, did excellent pio- neer work as a laboratory guide for secondary schools. This useful hand-book, revised and amplified, now appears in connection with an excellent descriptive zoology. In the latter the author introduces each of the larger groups of animals by a description of a typical example, treating of its morpho- logical and physiological characteristics and paying especial attention to its habitat, move- ments, senses, capture of prey, taking of food and manner of self defense. Naturally, Arthropods, and particularly In- sects, have a prominent place at the begin- ning, followed by a brief account of the An- nulata, a somewhat longer description of the Mollusca and an extended discussion of the Chordata. Thereupon the Protozoa, Porifera, Celenterata, Echinodermata, Platyhelminthes, Trochelminthes and Molluscoidea are taken up in the order given. This is an excellent practical arrangement on the whole, though it might have been still better to have placed the Annulata and Echinodermata last and thus have preserved the ascending order through- out each of the two sections, for the sake of avoiding those misconceptions which are wont to arise in the mind of the beginner, to whom position in a text-book has a profound signifi- cance. é The strongest feature of the book is its broad treatment of animal life, in other words, its natural history. The author has a keen His style is simple and direct, and the book is thoroughly readable. The author did not cease to do pioneer work when he published his ‘ Practical Zoology’ seventeen years ago. In the present book he makes free use of ‘tho,’ ‘thru, ‘thoro’? and their various compounds, while ‘ celom, ‘ ce- cum,’ ‘hemal’? and a few other words have been stripped of superfluous letters. He does not attempt to set right names like Ameba, which are apparently protected by their Latin form, but one is surprised that ‘ ccelenterates,’ ‘diaphragm’ and a few other terms should not have been pruned. Spelling reform has much in its favor, and it must be introduced Juty 24, 1903.) by such gradual changes that a conservative public may not be offended. In the present instance the author’s zeal does not seem to have led him to the point of giving offense, even though he may have laid himself open to the charge of inconsistency. The book is comparatively free from minor errors or infelicities. On page 90, the skin of the earthworm is said to consist of three layers, the cuticle and epidermis, no mention being made of the derma. The celomic epi- thelium is omitted in the enumeration of the eoats of the body wall. The description of the papule of the starfish as ‘holes thru the aboral wall from which extend slender pro- jections of the thin, soft lining membrane of the body cavity’ needs considerable re- vision. The term ‘digestive tube’ is used when the cavity of the digestive tube, not its walls, is meant. The statement that in the echinoderms the digestive tube is ‘ distinct from the body cavity’ is not very illuminating as it stands. The illustrations are mostly well chosen, and about forty of them are original. It is unfortunate that greater care was not given to matters of detail in some of the original diagrams; thus the oviducts in the snake and the oviduct in the pigeon are each incorrectly represented as opening in front directly into the cavity of the ovary. The capital press work of the descriptive part contributes in no small degree to the gen- eral excellence of the book. Part II., on ‘ Practical Zoology,’ is a great improvement over the original laboratory guide with which teachers in secondary schools are familiar. Full directions are given for the observation of living animals in the field and in captivity. This part, however, might be made much stronger in respect to its teaching of morphol- ogy, without greatly increasing its size. For example, the attention of the student is not ealled to the eelom of the earthworm either in connection with the dissection or in the study of the cross-section; and the term body- cavity is used loosely to apply to the enteric cavity in Hydra and to the celom in verte- SCIENCE. 115 brates. The directions for the study of the brain, particularly that of the rabbit, are ex- ceedingly inadequate. We are told that the optic nerves ‘directly enter the cerebrum’; and both diencephalon and midbrain are ig- nored. While this is in line with the popular notion that the brain consists of only two parts, it is not the sort of teaching that ought to find place even in a very elementary text- book. This part is remarkably free, however, from positive errors, and ean be heartily ree- ommended as a laboratory guide for second- ary schools; the descriptive part is an ele- mentary text-book of unusual merit. Joun H. Geroutp. DARTMOUTH COLLEGE. DISCUSSION AND CORRESPONDENCE. METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS WITH KITES AT SEA. To THe Eprtor or Sctence: Under the titles “A New Field for Kites in Meteorology’ and the above there were described in Vol. XIV. of Science experiments by the writer and his assistants of flying kites in calm weather from a tug-boat and from a transatlantic steam- ship. The demonstration that meteorological observations might be obtained at high alti- tudes, independently of the natural wind, over the greater portion of the globe and where no observations had been possible before, at- tracted the immediate attention of European meteorologists. The following brief accounts show that their application of this new method of meteorological research has been both extensive and successful. The first to repeat the pioneer experiments of the late Mr. Sweetland and the writer dur- ing their voyage across the North Atlantic in 1901 were Messrs. Berson and Elias, of the Prussian Meteorological Institute, who, last August, made a voyage from Germany to Spitzbergen and back, achieving satisfactory results with their kites. Meanwhile Pro- fessor Képpen, of the Deutsche Seewarte, carried out analogous experiments on the Baltic Sea. About the same time, Mr. Dines, aided by grants from the Royal Meteorological Society and the British Association, employed 114 a small steamer for kite-flying off the west coast of Scotland, in connection with a fixed station on land. The vessel could be ma- neeuvered at will, as in the writer’s initial ex- periment in Massachusetts Bay, and the re- sults published show that 38 records of the various elements were obtained at an average height of 6,000 feet, and that once an altitude of nearly 15,000 feet was reached, although, in this case, the upper kites and the recording - instrument were lost, owing to breakage of the wire. It is probably known to many of your read- ers that at several stations in Europe, and on Blue Hill in this country, balloon ascen- sions or kite-flights are made upon a specified day every month, in order to obtain meteor- ological data in the upper atmosphere simul- taneously over a large region. In order to be independent of the natural wind, which is frequently unsuited to kite-flying, and to ac- celerate or diminish it as required, meteor- ological kites have recently been flown from steamboats on Lake Constance by Count von Zeppelin and Professor Hergesell on some of these term-days. Similar experiments upon the smaller lakes of Prussia and Russia have also shown that kites may be rendered nearly independent of the wind even in the interior of the continents. A most remarkable campaign has been conducted by M. Teisserene de Bort, who, with the aid of Scandinavian colleagues, es- tablished last summer a kite-flying station in Jutland, Denmark, where aerial soundings were made day and night, wind permitting, during nine months. After the termination of this work the apparatus was transferred to a Danish gunboat, and on a cruise in the Baltic Sea the following extraordinary re- sults, which have just been communicated by the director, were obtained on five con- secutive days: April 22, at an altitude of 9,450 feet a temperature of —14.°8 F. was found; April 23, at 13,500 feet, the tempera- ture was 9.°1; April 24, at 4,660 feet, 38.°3. On April 25, an altitude of 19,360 feet, which is probably the greatest height ever reached by a kite, was exceeded, and an instrument on SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 447. the lower portion of the wire, at a height of 7,415 feet, recorded 24.°4. In this flight the total length of the wire was 38,000 feet, and the upper 4,000 feet, with the highest register- ing instrument, broke away, but were recoy- ered. On the morning of April 26 an alti- tude of 8,140 feet, with a temperature of 15.°2, was obtained and in the afternoon 13,320 feet with a temperature of 3.°2. Since the gun- boat steamed only nine and a half knots, the kites could not be flown when there was a complete absence of wind. These various experiments amply prove the practicability of the writer’s project to in- vestigate the atmospheric strata lying above the doldrums and trade-winds, by means of kites flown from a specially chartered steam- ship. This plan, which was outlined in SciENCcE, received the approval of the Inter- national Aeronautical Congress at Berlin last year, and an application for a grant to aid its execution is now before the trustees of the Carnegie Institution. Although the German, British and Scottish antarctic expeditions Were equipped with meteorological kites, the reports received confirm the prediction of the writer that little use would be made of them during the voyages southward. On the vessel which the Baltimore Geographical Society sent last month to the Bahamas, Dr. Fassig, of the Weather Bureau, expected to fly kites, but, owing to the substitution of a schooner for a steamer, this could not well be done and, therefore, the kites were probably flown only at Nassau. It is to be hoped that Dr. Fassig¢ has obtained observations of temperature and humidity in the trade-winds which, even if he did not succeed in getting through, owing to their becoming light above, will be of con- siderable value. These observations might serve as a starting point for the work of the expedition proposed by the writer, which would proceed across the equator and be capable of sounding the atmosphere to the height of four miles, notwithstanding the fact that winds either too light or too strong for the kites may be encountered when the steamer is stationary. A. Lawrence Rorcu. BivuE Hi~t MrrEorRoLoGicaL OBSERVATORY, July 8, 1903. Jury 24, 1903.] SHORTER ARTICLES. CRYSTALS OF OXALATE OF LIME IN PLANTS. Agricultural and physiological chemists are generally of the opinion that one of the func- tions of lime in the nutrition of plants is to form an insoluble compound with oxalic acid and thus neutralize any toxic effect which this acid might have upon the plant tissues. Whether this theory is true or not it is quite certain that erystals of calcium oxalate are found in many plant tissues, while in some, especially those developing large quantities of organic acids, they are very abundant. A re- markable occurrence of such crystals has lately been disclosed by an investigation carried on in this bureau by Mr. B. J. Howard, chemical microscopist and histologist, on a sample of Colocasia antiquorum, the well-known taro, one of the principal food staples of Polynesia, brought to the bureau by Mr. W. E. Safford, assistant curator of the Bureau of Plant In- dustry, who is preparing a report on the eco- nomic plants of Polynesia. Mr. Safford stated that the intense burning and pricking sensa- tion which is experienced on chewing parts of certain plants, such as the Indian turnip (Arisema triphyllum) and the plant above mentioned, has been alleged to be due to the action of the acicular crystals of calcium oxalate which are said to exist in immense numbers, and which attach themselves to and enter, at least superficially, the mucous and other membranes with which they come in contact. I requested Mr. Howard to make a micro-chemical examination of this sample in order to determine whether or not such crys- tals were present. A simple trituration of the parts of the plant, as, for instance, a leaf, in water until a pulp is produced, is a sufficient preparation. A small portion of the pulp is placed upon a glass slide, a drop of water added (or water and glycerine) covered with a glass, and placed in the field of the micro- scope. When thus prepared, numerous very oblate spheroidal bodies were discovered with- in which were enclosed fine necdles in a dense bundle. Some of these acicular and very long delicate crystals were dissolved in hydrochloric acid and were found to produce a precipitate SCIENCE. 115 of oxalate of lime when made alkaline by ammonia. The crystals of oxalate of lime produced in this way were not acicular as in the original case, but tetrahedral. While ex- amining the field of the microscope, Mr. Howard observed in the case of one of the oblate spheroids the projection of these erys- tals into the ambient liquid with what seemed to be a considerable: degree of force. This observation was so interesting that I requested Mr. Howard to prepare another portion of the material and see if the phenomenon be re- peated. I first examined carefully the field of the microscope as prepared, but found no crystals, but a large number of spheroids above mentioned in which the bundles of long acicular crystals could be easily distinguished. These were surrounded by a membrane of quite uniform thickness, apparently of a cellu- lar nature and probably consisting mostly of a cellulose—in other words, the crystals seemed to be encysted. During a period of observa- tion of from five to ten minutes I did not notice the recurrence of the phenomena above described. Mr. Howard then observed the field in the microscope, and in a few minutes he said that one of the bombs had begun to discharge its projectiles. I immediately took Mr. Howard’s place at the microscope and saw, for a period of five or ten minutes, a most remarkable display. Continual dis- charges were made from this bomb, the ends of the arrows spreading out as they emerged in groups of from four to ten. As these groups were finally separated from the bombs, they were discharged with considerable ve- locity into the ambient liquid, the bomb itself suffering a corresponding recoil. I did not keep an accurate account of the discharges made; but I would say that they would aver- age not less than two per minute. Some- times one or two needles only would be dis- charged, projecting rapidly, and then leaving the bomb finally with a sharp advance. At other times, as before mentioned, groups of from four to ten arrows would discharge at once. The field of vision in the vicinity of the bomb became partly covered with these long crystals, but the supply within the bomb did not seem to diminish materially. There 116 must have been many hundreds of these ar- rows in one single spheroid. Perhaps an ob- late spheroid is not the best description of one of these masses. They resemble more a long capsule used in pharmacy with rather sharper ends, or the cigar-shaped balloon of an airship. In looking for the cause of the discharge I suggested to Mr. Howard that it might be due to the contraction of the cell walls, due either to pressure of the cover glass or to drying. Mr. Howard suggested, and it is a very plaus- ible reason, that it might be osmotic pressure due to the presence of certain mineral sub- stances in the mother liquor. He proposes to test this theory experimentally by making a salt solution for mounting, to imitate, if possible, that within the bomb and thus to exclude osmotic pressure. Presumably, when left in the tissues of the plant the crystals are not discharged; at least, in the preparation which was under observation no free crystals were found until the bomb began to discharge the missiles; as the plant would grow older, however, and the osmotic conditions change, or the cell walls begin to dry, the discharges would begin to take place in the tissues of the plant. These bombs are bundles of crystals and are, of course, exceedingly small, and most of them would doubtless escape rupture dur- ing mastication, but a sufficient amount of them would discharge their arrows to account for the pricking sensations attending the mastication of this material. Mr. Safford, who, while connected with the navy, spent some time among the Polynesians and made a study of the foods in common use, says that this plant is one of the principal food staples of the Polynesians and other Pacific islanders, who eat both the starchy rootstock, either baked or made into paste, and the young leaves which taste not unlike as- paragus. If the plant is not thoroughly cooked its acrid qualities remain in some degree. If thoroughly cooked they are destroyed. It is interesting to note that in cases where the leaves are chewed, either fresh or dried, the stinging sensation is not perceived until a SCIENCE. [N. 8. Von. XVIIT. No. 447. few moments afterward, and in many cases it is not until the taro root has been eaten that the prickling sensation in the lining of the mouth and throat shows that it has not been thoroughly cooked. Alocasia indica, a plant closely allied to the taro plant, is so acrid that the Pacific island- ers resort to it only in cases of great scarcity of food. The disagreeable effects caused by these plants seem to be confined to the tem- porary prickling sensation of the mouth and throat. They are undoubtedly nutritious and are held in high esteem by the natives. The acrid principle in the manioe or cassava is at least partly due to the presence of hydrocyanic acid, and this is removed by cooking. It will be interesting to see if any of this poisonous acid is also found in the taro and Alocasia indica. In the case of an Indian turnip lately ex- amined by Mr. Howard, the capsules were found to be somewhat smaller and the crystals larger and shorter than those described. A drop of the sap of the taro, which was shown under the microscope to contain no erystals, did not produce a burning sensation when placed in the mouth. On the contrary, a drop of the juice of the Indian turnip which earried free crystals was quite active in producing the characteristic symptoms. These facts are additional evidence to support the theory at first mentioned. While not yet fully established, there is pre- sumptive evidence that the pricking and burn- ing sensation experienced in masticating ma- terials of this kind is mostly of mechanical One H. W. Wuey. THE SEMINAR METHOD IN NATURAL SCIENCES, ESPECIALLY IN ZOOLOGY. Any one who has watched, for a number of years, the announcements of the lectures at German universities, will have noticed that the so-called ‘Seminar-Ubungen,’ ‘ Colloquia,’ or ‘ Besprechungen,’ and ‘ Wissenschaftlichen Gesellschaften’ have been extended more and more, and now take often an important place among the courses offered by a department. The desire of reaching the student better SuULY 24, 1903.] or, more properly, of making a more lasting impression on his mind than is_ possible through the mere words of lectures was, of course, felt everywhere. Instead of being merely receptive, taking in lectures, and com- paring them, at best, perhaps with some books, the student was to be put face to face with the problem, to be forced to be reproductive, and thus to be led to become productive. The strong sympathy for the perfect liberty of the university student throughout Germany discriminated against any attempt at intro- ducing school methods into the university. The natural sciences, of course, had developed their demonstration and laboratory methods. The other sciences, which are grouped together as mental sciences (the German ‘ Geisteswis- senschaften’), then tried also to introduce practical studies. Thus the seminar was de- veloped and has gained in favor ever since. To-day we find ‘Seminariibungen’ offered in the different branches of theological studies, jurisprudence, history, philology, philosophy, ete. The word ‘seminar,’ as it is used at the universities to-day, means, in the first place, a room provided with tables for the students and containing the department library, espe- cially the periodicals, models, charts and other study collections. The students become mem- bers of the seminar by paying a small ‘ con- tribution.’ They receive a key to the seminar rooms, a table and the right of access to, and use of, all the books and apparatus of the institution. Each seminar has a janitor to keep things in order, and is open from 8 A.M. to 9 p.m. (for members only, of course). The students spend hours between lectures there, study, write their theses, ete. One of the finest and best equipped seminars of which I ever was.a member is the geographical seminar of Professor Ratzel at Leipzig. It consists of four rooms; one is the study of the professor, one the study of his assistant, one is a large room which contains a very fine department library and the tables for the students, and in the fourth large, hall-like room all the numer- ous charts and maps, models and instruments are kept and may be used on special large SCIENCE. 117 tables. The fact that all but this last room open on an inner court of the university buildings shuts out the noise of the street, and the entire wing, being constructed to accommodate nothing but seminars on all its floors, is out of reach of the buzz of the stu- dents going to and coming from their lectures. Besides the institution itself, the word sem- inar means also the ‘ colloquia’ (or ‘ Besprech- ungen’) and practical courses which are given in the institution and which are also called ‘Seminariibungen’ or simply ‘ Ubungen.’ The term ‘ Gesellschaft,’ as used by certain professors, means similar work, but on the whole it corresponds more to what we call zoological club or journal club in America. The chief advantage of all these courses is that they bring the student in closer contact with the professor. From my own experience I know how much benefit may be derived from this method. While studying over there I was fortunate enough to be admitted, for a number of semesters, to the seminar conducted by the professor of history of art (Professor Schmarsow, of Leipzig). Although these studies were out of my line, I gained so much there, and got such an insight into the meth- ods and ways of thinking of the representa- tives of the mental sciences, that I have always been extremely thankful for this chance. Quite recently seminars and seminariibung- en have ‘also been offered in the natural sciences, more especially in zoology and bot- at some of the German universities. The mental sciences, which have found so many of our methods useful for their pur- poses, render thus, as it were, their thanks and offer us a method which they have devel- oped and which we might accept, perhaps, with some advantage. The ‘ Practica’ and ‘ Praktischen Ubungen’ in natural sciences do not concern us here, they are simply laboratory courses independent of, or, better, separated from, the lectures. In many, perhaps most, cases the laboratory methods for the first years of study are de- cidedly better in this country. There are better instruments and apparatus at hand, any, 118 better laboratory and library facilities, more and better material to work with, and more personal instruction is given here than in Germany. The foreign methods—this may, perhaps, be said in their favor—make stu- dents more independent, because there are no strict directions to be followed, no note-books to be compiled. The professor gives you the animal, tells you the literature, and leaves you. You have to find out all about the ereature yourself, and when he comes back you have to demonstrate to him what you have found. If that is not enough, he simply tells you that you have to keep on and he does not allow you to pass on to anything else until you have found and seen and drawn, yourself, everything that you can be expected to find. This method, of course, would not work with large classes. It can be used over there because the classes in zoology, botany and so on are always small and, besides, the students are more mature when they enter the university. Each professor has his individual laboratory method, which is just as good as anybody else’s and which he does not care to publish. The general courses are always given by the head professor, because he is expected to have done so much special work that he is able to generalize. Thus he develops his methods from his special studies and carries them out, or has them carried out by his as- sistants. ‘The younger ‘ docents,’ on the other hand, give the advanced and special courses. They begin with their own specialties, widen- ing their programs gradually, and thus de- velop special methods in their laboratory courses in their turn. Where the classes are larger, and especially in the beginners’ courses, the methods are often stricter and more school-like. In chem- istry, physics, histology, ete., the methods are similar to those used in this country. Let us see now what we may expect from a seminar in zoology, and in how many different ways it may be conducted. I. There is, first, the simple method of reading a book with the students. This may be used as an introduction for beginners. Let us take, for instance, Darwin’s ‘ Origin of SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 447. Species. The students read a chapter at home; at the seminar, the chapter will be dis- cussed and questions asked. The animals mentioned by Darwin will be exhibited as specimens or, at least, in good pictures. In connection with these animals a great many questions will come up, and the instructor may ask a member to look up some special litera- ture and report the next time. Of course the instructor has his plan, which he follows, and in harmony with which he directs all the discussions. Here and there he will have to interpret and show that certain views can not. be held any longer, or that some authority, perhaps himself, does not agree with Darwin, and why. Thus the students are given sey- eral points of view on the subject and led to independent thinking. In this way, without school-like recitations, the whole book will be gone through. While, in a course of lectures, the students will get the general idea of evolution, the seminar will show them how such an eminent investigator as Darwin worked and reasoned, and will give them a lot of detailed knowledge, and many inspiring thoughts for their own work besides. II. Another seminar would be, for instance, ‘Darwin, His Life and Work.’ The instructor gives an outline of Darwin’s life; each mem- ber takes one book or certain chapters, reads them and prepares a report for the meeting. Discussions, explanations and demonstrations follow. If the class is small, all of the nu- merous books can not be read by the members, and the instructor will have to pick out cer- tain books or chapters which seem most im- portant or interesting, and to give short re- views of the others himself. There are a great many important books and pamphlets about which a student of zool- ogy ought to know something and which he can not possibly read all by himself, especially if they be written in a foreign language. More than one book in German or French ean not be expected from a student per semester or per year, but when each member of the seminar reads one book, something can be accomplished for the mutual benefit. The instructor gives the necessary explanations, Jury 24, 1903.] shows specimens, or at least pictures, charts and diagrams, performs experiments, if neces- sary, and directs the discussion. Ill. The instructor prepares a list of books or papers which all relate to the same subject, and which he wishes to discuss with his stu- dents. He announces, say, a seminar on Dar- winism, and either asks the members to report on some books of Darwin’s, Wallace’s, Hick- el’s, Romanes’s, Weismann’s, etc., or gives them some of the modern pamphlets dealing with evolution, heredity, variation, ete., for instance, Weismann’s ‘Germinal Selection,’ Gitte’s ‘Heredity and Adaptation, Pfeffer’s “Transformation of Species,’ some of Karl Pearson’s papers, Cunningham-Weldon’s con- troversy, some of Davenport’s papers, etc. TV. The instructor announces a seminar, say, on evolution. He makes out a list of topics relating to this special subject in such a way that they all together will more or less exhaust it. Such a list would be, for in- stance: Classification of organisms before and after Darwin. Geological and geographical distribution of plants and animals. Australia. Lamarck, Darwin, Wallace. Fertilization. Heredity. Variation. Species. Anthropoid apes. Pithecanthropus and the Engis, Spy and Neanderthal, Mentone and Cro-magnon skeletons. La Madelaine, Hallstadt, La Téne. Lake-dwellings, ancient and modern. Human races. Each member chooses one topic and makes himself acquainted with the main lit- erature, prepares demonstrations and experi- ‘ments, procures pictures and diagrams and works out a little lecture to be given before the seminar. ' It is also a good idea to have these lectures written in the form of little essays which cir- culate among the members of the seminar after the lectures have been delivered and are, with their remarks on the margin, finally handed in to the instructor. In a later session the latter returns them and gives his criticisms both of the paper and the annotations. V. In the same way, of course, a number of unconnected topics may be chosen. The instructor may want to have certain subjects brought up upon which the general interest SCIENCE. 119 happens to be focused, or he may have dis- covered certain deficiencies in the studies of his students which they would be thus obliged to make up. The same method will enable him also to complement, as it were, his lec- tures and laboratory courses by treating cer- tain topics a little more fully than he can afford in his regular course. VI. So far the teaching or imparting of knowledge has been in the foreground; but still another idea can be accepted as the lead- ing principle: thinking, which leads to re- search. In other words, all the steps may be gone through which have led to some impor- tant discovery, or the history of a problem may be followed up to its latest aspects. Here, of course, the original papers will have to be used to a much larger extent, and especially all the pros and cons will have to be brought out. We may take, for instance, all the dif- ferent steps which finally have led to the dis- covery of the cycles of the parasites of malaria. (Laveran, Golgi, Labbé, MacCallum, Ross, Grassi, Ziemann, Koch, Grassi and others.) Or, taking fertilization, we might have: The old spermatists and ovulists, Sechwann’s work on the cells, Leuckart’s article on reproduc- tion; Darwin, Weismann; Flemming, Van Beneden, Fol. Carnoy; Biitschli, O. Hertwig. Conklin, Mark, Wilson; Riickert, Hicker; Meves; Boveri; Loeb» Morgan, Wilson; Mau- pas and R. Hertwig; Calkins. VII. The method can also be used in labo- ratory studies, each member making a certain prenaration, constructing a certain apparatus, making a diagram or chart, ete. In this way two birds, or three, might be killed with one stone; the member in charge is obliged to study and acquire a certain skill and cer- tain methods to do his part as well as pos- sible; the other members get the benefit of the demonstration, and the laboratory finally acquires for its collection some dissection, microseopie preparation, some piece of ap- paratus, a chart, some lantern-slides, ete. VIII. A plan may be adopted which amounts to cooperation. In this way a résumé of a certain question may be given, for instance, a paper on the present aspect of 120 the problem of gastrulation may be prepared and published. Each member takes one group, such as the different types of fishes, amphibia, reptiles and so on, goes over the literature and works out his account. The whole thing is then put together, added to and got ready for publication by the instructor. IX. For the sake of completeness I wish to mention here the so-called zoological clubs or research clubs, where each member gives a piece of his own research, and the journal clubs. In the latter, each member takes one or a number of journals and gives a report of all the papers which have been published therein, which seem of a more general in- terest, or the papers are assigned to the mem- bers, or each member selects a specialty and reports in his turn on all the new papers in this line. The advantages of the seminar method, it seems to me, are the following : (1) we are more able to give our students an idea of the many-sidedness of a modern science. A young student, after having heard the usual lectures and done his laboratory work, may be ready to believe that there are some more animals which he did not study and that some things and courses may be given which could not be offered, or he could not take; but on the whole he is apt to believe that, having done what was required of him, he knows now about what can be known on the subject in question. A seminar may have the not very pleasant but useful task of showing him how little he knows; that is to say, it can give the students an idea of the different points of view from which. we may look at the very things which they have studied, the different ways in which we may combine them in order to find our way to a deeper knowledge, to. gain a new truth. There is not always time and opportunity to discuss a question or attack a problem from several sides.in a lecture; we can at best allude to that; and in the laboratory the main object ought always to be the most careful and exact observation of a few forms. In fact, perhaps, nothing but established facts or accepted theories and hypotheses ought to be brought up in the lectures, in the laboratory nothing ‘but points which can be demonstrated or SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 447. actually studied; the seminar is the place to give new ideas, to open new ways of looking at things, new connections and associations, to discuss uncertain points with their pros and cons, and to oblige the students to form an opinion of their own. In a seminar on Dar- Winism, for instance, we must offer and dis- cuss, not only the points brought up by Nigeli, Eimer, Wolff, Dreyer, Gétte, Cunningham, ete., but we must also see what Fleischmann has to say, and must let our students find his weak points. (2) It seems to me that we often give, and have to give, certain things in our lectures which ought not to be given there. While I strongly believe that a careful study of anat- omy or morphology is still and, after all, the only basis of all our further studies, be they physiological, psychological, bionomical and ecological or what else, it might, perhaps, be better to give in our lectures, aided by dem- onstrations, charts, models, lantern slides, etc., only the general outlines, the fundamental laws, certain views, certain points of the life history, habits, ete., and to leave details for a seminar. It is wonderful to develop before an audience the primitive forms of the embryo with the aid of models, clay and cloths of dif- ferent colors, but when it comes to the details of the development of the vessels, muscles and the skeleton, the interest decreases equally with the student and with the teacher. In osteology the general features and arrangements of the bones in one animal, in a group or in the en- tire series of vertebrates, may profitably be explained in lectures; but the processes and their muscular attachments, the foramina and their passing nerves and vessels, and the de- tails of the bones themselves, the peculiar twist, for instance, of femur and humerus, or of the ribs, are a rather dry subject for the hearer and unsatisfactory to lecture on for the instructor. What can not be covered by regular laboratory work could be treated in a seminar. Especially helpful does the seminar appear in systematic zoology. Lectures on systematic zoology must always seem more or less unsatis- factory, even when supported by much dem- onstration material, because there are neces- a Juty 24, 1903.] sarily too many names and too many, and often too fine, distinctive characters. In a seminar one group after another can be taken up. Each member studies one group, familiar- izes himself with the characteristics, data, life histories, etc., and gives his demonstration. In a beginners’ seminar the main groups may thus be treated; in an advanced seminar a small group may be studied more completely, and the members will have an opportunity to familiarize themselves with the main literature on the group, etc. (3) A seminar can give the student an op- portunity to see and compare more material than is possible in the laboratory course, and to see it better than is possible in a lecture or in the few minutes just before and after the lecture. The knowledge and faculty of ob- servation gained by previous laboratory work enables the student to get a great deal out of the demonstration of comparatively much ma- terial which passes through his hands in a seminar. A student may have had, say a course in the dissection of an animal, the frog or the cat, for instance, and he may also have taken a course in comparative anatomy, and dissected a number of types such as Amphi- oxus, Petromyzon, a teleost, an amphibian, a reptile, a bird and a mammal. Then in a seminar it may seem desirable to study the different groups of fishes or amphibia more earefully. Each member makes a preparation of one system, or of all the systems of one animal, and gives his talk and demonstration on it. (Some of the better dissections may then be added to the museum.) Some skill- ful member may even be trusted with a dis- section of a cecilian, or the instructor may do that himself. Or the sexual organs, the nervous system, may be taken and studied in the seminar by means of demonstrations, microscopic slides and talks prepared by the individual members. Such a series for the sexual organs would be: Petromyzon, Myxine and Bdellostoma; Amia, Lepidosteus and Acipenser; Teleosts: Perca, Salmo or Esox for the male, Perca, Esox and Salmo for the fe- male, Serranus, Embiotocus; Protopterus and Ceratodus; Scyllium, Mustela levis, Raja, Chimera; Necturus, Cryptobranchus, Diemye- SCIENCE. 121 tilis and Triton, Amblystoma, Plethodon, Rana, Bufo; ececilian; snake, turtle, lizard, crocodile; bird; Echidna and Ornithorhynchus, marsupial, rabbit, cat, bat, monkey, man. (4) Each member may work his studies into a little written composition which afterwards circulates among all the other members, who may add remarks and ask questions, and is finally handed in to the instructor. This work, it seems to me, is much more valuable to the students than keeping note-books. As we all know, note-books are a very doubtful means of education. They do not prove that the student has mastered the subject, for we have often seen students coming together and one of them dictating what the others put down with little individual changes. In other cases, the temptation of copying from books is too great. Under these circumstances, it seems an enormous waste of time for the student to say in his imperfect way what others have said ten times better, more clearly and correctly, and what he ought to read, or to have read, along with his studies, just as well as for the instructor to spend his time in correcting them, which he ought to spend in doing original work. The seminar obliges the student to work a subject up, making himself thoroughly familiar with it, and then present it in a way which, while it is not original research, cer- tainly means an individual representation, and, as such, is an important step towards in- dependent work. K. W. Gentue. Trryity CoLLece, Hartrorp, Conn. BOTANICAL NOTES. STUDIES OF WATER MOLDS. Dr. Braptey M. Davis, of the University of Chicago, has just issued a quarto pamphlet of thirty-two pages, accompanied by two large plates devoted to the oogenesis of certain species of water molds (Saprolegnia). The paper appears as one of the Decennial Publi- cations of the University of Chicago, and is well worthy of appearing in this notable series. The treatment is modern, and Dr. Davis is quite inclined to cut across some of the views which have fastened themselves 122 upon the morphology of the water molds and their relatives. While it is impossible to summarize this paper here, the present re- viewer wishes to express his hearty agree- ment with the conclusions reached by the author. PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN PLANTS. Dr. Atrrep J. Ewart, of the Birmingham Technical Institute, England, has recently published an interesting book on the physics and physiology of protoplasmic streaming in plants which will attract the attention of cytologists and no doubt help to give a better idea of the mechanism: of the streaming cell. The work is the outcome of a series of obser- vations begun nearly ten years ago by the author and continued until quite recently. Tt takes up first the physics and chemistry of the subject, and this is followed by the phys- iology, and then by a theoretical and general discussion. A few results may be summarily indicated as follows: The movement is generated in the proto- plasm itself. The velocity of streaming is largely de- pendent upon the viscosity of the proto- plasm, and hence upon the percentage of water, being more rapid as the water is in- creased. Grayity exercises little or no influence upon streaming in small cells, and only a very slight one in large cells. High temperature affects streaming by de- creasing the viscosity, and for each species of plant or cell there are minimal, optimal and maximal temperatures. No special chemical changes are connected with the streaming of protoplasm. In the strongest magnetic field little or no effect on the streaming is noticed, but elec- trical currents may accelerate or, when strong, stop the movement. Strong light retards streaming, while wealx light may accelerate it under certain circum- stances. The book is one which must commend itself to plant physiologists. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vox. XVIII. No. 447. FORESTRY IN NEBRASKA, ’ SEVERAL years ago the Nebraska Park and Forestry Association was organized for the purpose of encouraging tree planting for economic as well as ornamental purposes. This organization has just issued a ‘ Park and Forestry Manual’ which calls attention to the kind of work which such an organiza- tion may do for a community. This little manual of nearly one hundred pages contains many suggestive articles. There is first a short article giving the origin of arbor day, followed by one on the ‘ Forests and Forest Trees of Nebraska.’ Following this is another on ‘Tree Planting on Nebraska Prairies, and then in succession ‘ Propagation ot Forest Trees,’ ‘Raising Evergreens from Seed” ‘The Nebraska Forest Reserves,’ “Tree Planting in School Yards,’ ‘Trees and Orchards, ‘Success or Failure in Timber Claim Planting and Causes for It,’ ‘Home Adornment and Public Parks,’ ‘The Red Cedar for a Screen or Shelter’ and ‘ An- notated List of Nebraska Trees.’ This manual might well be imitated by similar organizations in other states. C. E. Bessey. UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA. MODERN VIEWS ON MATTER* Tur Romanes lecture was delivered in the Sheldonian Theater, Oxford, on June 12, by Sir Oliver Lodge, F.R.S., principal of the University of Birmingham, the subject being “Modern Views on Matter.’ The lecturer began by saying that he would discriminate between theses which were gen- erally accepted by physicists and speculative opinions or hypotheses which were now being thrown out on the strength of experimental evidence of an at present incompletely con- clusive, but very suggestive, character. The first thesis was that an electric charge pos- sessed the fundamental property of matter, called mass or inertia, and that if a charge were sufficiently concentrated it might repre- sent any amount of matter desired. There were reasons for supposing that electricity * From the London Simes. JuLy 24, 1903.] existed in such concentrated small portions, which were called ‘ electrons,’ and could either be associated with atoms of matter, to form the well-known chemical ions, or could fly separate, as was observed in the cathode rays of vacuum tubes, and in the loss of negative electricity when ultra-violet light fell upon a clean negatively charged surface. The lec- turer went on to say: The hypothesis sug- gested on the strength of these facts is that the atoms of matter are actually composed of these unit electric charges or electrons, an equal number of positive and negative charges going to form a neutral atom, a charged atom having one electron in excess or defect. On this view a stable aggregate of about 700 elec- trons in violent orbital motion among them- selves would constitute a hydrogen atom, 16 times that number would constitute an oxygen atom, and about 150,000 would constitute an atom of radium. The attractiveness of this hypothesis is that it represents a unification of matter and a reduction of all material sub- stance to a purely electric phenomenon. The strongest argument in its favor is that mass or inertia can certainly be accounted for elec- trically, and that there is no other known way of accounting for it. If matter is not elec- trical, then there are two distinct kinds of inertia which exactly simulate each other’s properties. Assuming this electrical theory of matter, that the atoms are aggregates of electric charges in a state of violent motion, two consequences follow. One of these con- sequences depends on the known fact that radiation or light, or an ether wave of some kind, is emitted from any electron subject to acceleration; consequently the revolving con- stituents of an atom must be slowly radiating their energy away, must thus encounter a virtual resistance, and must in that way have their velocity increased. The second conse- quence is that when the speed of an electrified body reaches that of light its mass becomes suddenly infinite; and in that case it appears not improbable that a critical condition would have been reached at which the atom would no longer be stable, but would break up into other substances. And recently during the SCIENCE. 123 present year a break-up of the most massive atoms has been observed by Rutherford, and has been shown to account for the phenom- enon of radio-activity, some few of the atoms of a radio-active substance appearing to reach a critical stage, at which they fling away a small portion of themselves with great vio- lence, the residue having the same property of instability for some time, until ultimately it settles down into presumably a different substance from that at which it started. The matter flung away appears to be a light sub- stance not very different in atomic weight from hydrogen or helium, and it is surmised that possibly certain chemical inert elements may be the by-products of radio-activity; and that this process of dissociation of the atom may constitute the evolution of the chemical elements, such as has, on theoretical grounds, already been speculatively surmised. An analogy, the lecturer said, may be drawn be- tween this supposed gradual collapse of an atom and the contraction of a nebula, which at certain stages becomes unstable and shrinks off a planet, the residue constituting an ex- tremely radio-active mass or sun. But, where- as the astronomical changes observed in cos- mic configurations of matter occur in a time reckoned in millions of years, the changes to be expected in the more stable atoms would seem likely to require a time reckoned in mill- ions of millions of centuries; but, neverthe- less, according to known laws, and on the hypothesis of electric constitution, the change seems bound ultimately to occur; and so a state of flux and decay is hypothetically recog- nized, not only in the stars and planets, but in the foundation-stones of the universe, the elemental atoms themselves. A process of re- generation, however, is also thinkable, and would occur if the separate electrons were ever to aggregate themselves together by their mu- tual attractions into fresh material. And, inasmuch as the life of a highly radio-active substance must be very limited, being, per- haps, not more than a few thousands of years in some extreme cases, it appears necessary to assume that some such regenerative process is constantly at work, and that, just as we have 124 suns of various ages and exhibiting the process of evolution in different stages, so it may be that the progress of research will lead us to recognize the existence of atoms of matter in like case, some recently formed, and some very ancient; and the whole argument seems to lead to an atomic astronomy of surpassing interest. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS. M. Amacat, of the Paris Polytechnic School, has been elected a member of the Paris Acad- emy of Sciences in the section of physics, and Dr. H. A. Lorentz, professor of physics at Leiden, has been elected a correspondent in the same section. _ Lorp Kevin and Lord Lister have been elected honorary menibers of the Royal So- ciety of New South Wales. Lorp Lister, in recognition of his ‘long and valuable services to the country and par- ticularly to surgery by the discovery and application of the antiseptic treatment,’ has been admitted to the honorary freedom of the Merchant Taylors’ Company, London. Dr. W J McGee has been appointed chief of the Department of Anthropology and Eth- nology at the Louisiana Purchase Exposition. Dr. Puitie Henry Pyre-Smirn, F.R.S., has been reelected chancellor of the University of London. Dr. G. von EScHERICH, professor of mathe- matics, has been made rector of the University of Vienna. Tur University of Groningen has conferred an honorary doctorate of mathematics and as- tronomy on Dr. C. Easton, director of the Observatory at Rotterdam. Dr. F. Hormann, professor of experimental hygiene at Leipzig, has celebrated the twenty- fifth anniversary of his professorship. Dr. B. E. Liviveston, instructor in plant physiology in the University sf Chicago, has been granted a research scholarship in the New York Botanical Garden, beginning Sep- tember 1, 1903. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vox. XVIII. No. 447. For the Michigan State Geological Survey Dr. A. W. Grabau will continue his studies of the Dundee and Traverse Limestones of the state, which are proving of great economic value. The survey has just issued a report on Portland cement, clay and coal, and soon expects to issue one on gypsum by Professor G. P. Grimsley. Dr. F. E. Wright, of the Michigan College of Mines and Geological Survey, is conducting some investigations of the copper-bearing rocks of the Porcupine Mountains. Mr. Leon J. Cole has prepared a study of the growth of the St. Clair Delta. Mr. Robert Muldrow is mapping the quad- rangle around Detroit for the U. S. Geological Survey in conjunction with the State Survey. Mr. Lane’s papers on the water supply of Michigan being entirely exhausted, the State and U. S. Geological Surveys are actively en- gaged in preparing for revised and extended editions. Messrs. R. E. Horton, W. M. Gregory and W. F. Cooper are engaged in this work. THE present board of visitors of the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, is composed as fol- lows: Sir W. Huggins, Professor H. H. Turner, Professor W. G. Adams, Professor J. Larmor, Sir J. N. Lockyer, Lord Rayleigh, Lord Rosse, Sir A. Riicker, Sir W. Abney, Sir R. Ball, Professor R. B. Clifton, Dr. J. W. L. Glaisher, Professor G. H. Darwin, Rear- Admiral Sir W. J. L. Wharton, Mr. W. D. Barber. Dr. J. E. Durron and Dr. J. L. Todd, prin- cipals of the Trypanosoma Expedition of the Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine, have returned to England from Senegal, where they have been investigating trypanosomiasis, a human disease similar to the tsetse fly disease which is the chief cause of mortality among the horses. Tue following British civil list pensions have geen granted: £100 to Mrs. Adelaide Fanny Eyre in consideration of the services of her late husband, Mr. Edward John Eyre, the Australian explorer and Governor of Jamaica; £120 to Mrs. Zare Elizabeth Blacker in recognition of the services of her late hus- band, Dr. A. Barry Blacker, who lost his life Juty 24, 1903.] through his devotion to medical research; and £105 to Mr. James Sully in recognition of his services to psychology. Mr. Wittusm E. Donce, chairman of the committee appointed by Mayor Low to raise an endowment fund for Cooper Union as a memorial to Abram S. Hewitt, sent to the mayor a check for $211,310, which has been transferred to the treasurer of Cooper Union. Twenty-one persons contributed to the fund, including Andrew Carnegie, $55,000; John D. Rockefeller, $50,000; J. Pierpont Morgan and William FE. Dodge, $25,000 each; George F. Baker, Jacob H. Schiff and Henry Phipps, $10,000 each. Tue Lord Mayor of Belfast is chairman of a committee that will present to Queen’s Col- lege, Belfast, a portrait of Dr. J. W. Byers, professor of the diseases of women and chil- dren. Tue Misses Gladstone have presented to the Royal Institution the portrait of the late John Hall Gladstone, formerly professor of chem- istry in the Institution. Dr. F. Bauer, docent in the Munich Insti- tute of Technology, has been killed by an Al- pine accident at the age of thirty-three years. Dr. P. H. Ketter, honorary professor of physics at the University of Rome, has died at the age of seventy-seven years. Str Grorce Stokes bequeathed his scien- tific apparatus to the University of Cambridge. It has been distributed among the Chemical, Physical and Mineralogical Departments. Tue library’ of the late Professor Schade, formerly director of the surgical clinie of the University of Bonn, has been presented to the clinic by his widow. Mrs. Mary E. Ryze has given $130,000 toward the construction of a new library building at Paterson, N. J. Tue Royal Academy of Belgium offers next year its Charles Lagrange prize of the value of 1,200 franes for a paper adding to our mathe- matical knowledge of the earth. It also offers the Theophile Gluge prize of the value of 1,000 francs for the best work on physiology. The following year it offers its De Selys Long- SCIENCE. 125 champs prize of the value of 2,500 franes for the best original work on the fauna of Bel- gium. These prizes are open to foreigners. Tue bill which passed the Michigan legisla- ture, and was supported by the Michigan Academy of Science, providing for a biological survey of the state under the supervision of the state geologist, unfortunately failed to receive the approval of the governor. The state geologist was called east just at the close of the legislature by the death of his brother, Mr. L. P. Lane, of the Statistical Department of the Boston Publie Library. Tue Sanitary Institute of Great Britain held its twenty-first congress at Bradford dur- ing the second week of July under the presi- deney of Lord Stamford. Tue Association of German Engineers met at Munich at the end of June. Tue sixth International Congress of Psy- chology, which was to have met in Rome in the autumn of 1904, will be postponed to the spring of 1905 to avoid conflict with the sixth International Congress of Physiology which meets at Brussels in the autumn of 1904. Ar a meeting held recently in Manchester it was unanimously resolved that it is desirable to hold an international exhibition in that city in 1905. A SrockHoLtM correspondent writes, on July 5, to the London Times, that the Nor- wegian steamer Frithiof, chartered by this ex- pedition, will arrive from Tromsé in a few days for outfitting. It is expected that the ship will be ready to start about the middle of August. Lieutenant Blom, of the Swedish navy, who two years ago accompanied the trigonometrical survey expedition to Green- land, has been appointed second in command. The young Swedish zoologist, Baron Klinc- kowstrém, will also accompany the Frithiof. Three expeditions are thus now hurrying to the rescue of de Nordenskiold and his com- panions. The Swedish, on board the Frithiof ; the Argentine, in the Uruguay; and the French, in the Francais. Tue official report of Professor Drygalski on the German Antarctic expedition was 126 published on July 10, in a special supplement of the Imperial Gazette. According to Reuter’s Agency the report begins with the start from Kerguelen on January 31, 1902. The ship reached the Heard Islands on Feb- ruary 3, from which point the regular South Polar voyage began. The Gauss proceeded in a southeasterly direction towards a land the existence of which was reported by the Wilkes expedition, but placed in doubt by the Chal- lenger expedition. After a rough voyage the first drift ice was reached in February 13 at 61° 58’ south latitude, 95° 8’ west longitude. From the 18th to the 22d of February, 1902, an effort was made to make a good push south- ward, but this was stopped, the Gauss being fast caught in the ice and thus compelled to lie up for the winter. Professor Drygalski christened the bay in which the Gauss lay Posadowski Bay, and the ice-free volcanic peak, 1,200 feet high, on the south side of the Gauss was named the Gaussberg. On Feb- ruary 8, 1903, the Gauss was set free by a strong easterly wind, and went along the northern edge of the western ice, which she finally lost sight of on February 19, 1903, in 65° 32’ south latitude and 87° 40’ east longi- tude. She then drew near to the ice again, and was held fast from March 6 to March 14 for a second time. She again managed to reach the open sea, in which she advanced as far as 64°51’ south latitude and 8° 14’ east longitude. Traveling became difficult owing to the ever-growing length of the nights. On April 8, 1908, it was determined to turn back northward at 64° 58’ south latitude and 79° 33’ east longitude. On April 8 Kerguelen was passed, and on June 9 Simons Town was reached, all well. “FurtrHest South with the Discovery,’ Lieu- tenant Shackleton’s narrative, with illustra- tions of the first eighteen months’ work of the National Antarctic Expedition under Cap- tain Scott, has been acquired for publication by the Illustrated London News. The first part of the narrative was promised for June 27, as a supplement to the ordinary number of the Illustrated London News. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 447. Tue London Times states that at the in- vitation of Lord Lister and the governing body of the Jenner Institute about 100 gentle- men traveled down to Elstree on July 3 to inspect the new antitoxin department of the Jenner Institute of Preventive Medicine. With Lord Lister were Lord Iveagh, Sir Michael Foster, Sir Henry Roscoe and Mr. J. Luard Pattisson, members of the governing body, and Dr. Macfadyen, chief bacteriologist. The resident staff, consisting of Dr. George Dean, Dr. Todd and Dr. Petrie, received the party at Elstree and conducted them over the establishment, which is devoted to the prep- aration of antitoxins on a commercial scale, and to the experimental investigation of questions connected with immunity. This department of the institute’s work used to be carried on at Sudbury, but, in consequence of compulsory disturbance to make room for the Great Central Railway, it has been transferred to Queensberry-lodge, near Elstree. The in- stitute is fortunate in having secured so good a site. The place was formerly a breeding stable, and it contains first-rate accommoda- tion for 36 horses. Each animal has a loose- box of the most modern and sanitary type. There was, in addition, a small house, which affords room for two members of the staff and is surrounded by a large garden and some 23 acres of meadowland. The whole stands high in a healthy, isolated and wholly rural situa- tion. A suite of laboratories has now been added. They are most conveniently arranged and constructed according to the latest require- ments, with papyrolith floors having rounded corners, glazed adamant walls, white tiles and large windows. In the garden are isolated houses for the smaller animals. The visitors, who inspected the whole establishment with the interest of experts, were greatly pleased with the construction and arrangement of the premises. They were particularly struck with the healthy and well-kept-up appearance of the horses, and with the cleanliness and order maintained in every part of the establishment. Reuter’s AcENcy reports that the Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine has received a report from the Suez Canal Company on the Jury 24, 1903.) subject of the result of Major Ross’s recom- mendations for the improvement of the sani- tary conditions at Ismailia, with special refer- ence to the campaign against mosquitoes. Major Ross, accompanied by Sir William MacGregor, went out to Ismailia in the au- tumn of last year to study the question of the prevalence there of malaria. Major Ross was sent out by the Liverpool School of Trop- ical Medicine, at the special request of Prince d@ Arenberg. The report begins by referring to a statement made quite recently by the principal medical officer of the Sudan to Major Ross that the sanitary state of Ismailia. is now much improved. The secretary-general proceeds to say that since the visit of the ex- pedition of the school to Ismailia in September last several important drainage works have been undertaken, including the filling up of water puddles, and that a special service had been created for the purpose of supervising this work, specially charged with the duty of pouring oil on the pools and disused wells, doing away with marshes, puddles, etc., exist- ing in and near the residential quarters of Ismailia. On the other hand prophylactic measures, such as gratuitous distribution of quinine, ‘liqueur de Fowler,’ have been con- tinued without interruption since April, 1902. In December the number of cases of fever had decreased in a most marked manner com- pared with preceding months and the cor- responding month in the previous year. The secretary-general states that this diminution in fever has been maintained up to the date of writing—namely, July 2 in the present year. Thanks to systematic oiling of pools and to the unceasing watch kept over all likely places where larve can be hatched, the ordinary mosquitoes of the genus culex and stegomyia have been annihilated almost absolutely, and even in the worst period of the hot season it has been found possible to dispense with the use of mosquito nets. The secretary-general ends with a testimony to the value of the work of the expedition, and says they have every hope that the assistance rendered by Major Ross will result in the complete abolition of malaria from the town of Ismailia. SCIENCE. 127 ai Tue U.S. Geological Survey has just issued a list, complete up to June, 1903, of its serial publications, consisting of Annual Reports, Monographs, Professional Papers, Bulletins, Mineral Resources, Water-Supply and Irriga- tion Papers, Topographic Atlas of the United States, and Geologie Atlas of the United States. Monographs, topographic sheets and geologic folios are sold at cost of publication —topographie sheets (of which indexes, free on application, are published from time to time) are sold at 5 cents each, or $2 per 100 in one order; geologic folios usually at 25 cents each; the other publications are dis- tributed free. The latest professional papers are: No. 15, ‘ Mineral Resources of the Mount Wrangell District, Alaska, by W. C. Menden- hall and F. C. Schrader; No. 16, ‘ Carbonifer- ous Formations and Faunas of Colorado,’ by G. H. Girty; No. 17, ‘Preliminary Report on the Geology and Water Resources of Nebraska West of the One Hundred and Third Merid- ian, by N. H. Darton; No. 18, ‘Chemical Composition of Igneous Rocks expressed by means of Diagrams, with reference to rock classification on a quantitative chemico-miner- alogical basis,’ by J. P. Iddings. The latest bulletins are: No. 213, ‘Contributions to Economie Geology, 1902,’ S. F. Emmons and C. W. Hayes, geologists in charge; No. 214, ‘Geographic Tables and Formulas,’ compiled by S. S. Gannett; No. 215, ‘Catalogue and Index of the Publications of the United States Geological Survey, 1901 to 1903,” by P. C. Warman; No. 216, ‘ Results of Primary Triangulation and Primary Traverse, Fiscal Year 1902-3,’ by S. S. Gannett. The latest water-supply papers are : No. 80, ‘ Relation of Rainfall to Run-off,” by G. W. Rafter; No. 81, ‘California Hydrography,’ by J. B. Lip- pincott; Nos. 82, 83, 84, 85, ‘ Report of Prog- ress of Stream Measurements for the Calendar Year 1902,’ by F. H. Newell; No. 86, ‘ Stor- age Reservoirs of Stony Creek, California,’ by Burt Cole. The latest geologic folios ready for distribution are: No. 90, ‘ Cranberry, Ten- nessee’; No. 91, ‘ Hartville, Wyoming’; No. 92, ‘Gaines, Pennsylvania, New York’; No. 93, ‘Elkland-Tioga, Pennsylvania.’ All the 128 above mentioned geologic folios are sold for 25 cents each. Application for any and all publications should be made to the Director, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. A wore in the British Medical Journal states that the opening up of Central and East- erm Africa has revealed the fact that instead of zebras being nearly extinct, these animals exist in large numbers on the banks of the Tama River and in the province of Ukamba. Unlike horses and cattle, they are proof against horse sickness and the fatal tsetse fly. At the present time, for land transport in war, mules are almost universally employed, and they are used for the carriage of mountain batteries. Professor Cossar Ewart has at Penycuik since 1895 been endeavoring by zebra-horse hybrids to ‘evolve’ an animal that shall be superior to the mule for the pur- poses for which that animal is usually em- ployed. There are three kinds or types of zebras—namely, Grevy’s zebra of Shoa and Somaliland, the mountain zebra (equus zebra), once common in South. Africa, and known as the common zebra, and the widely- distributed Burchell group of zebras. The zebra-horse hybrids were obtained by crossing mares of various sizes with a zebra stallion, a Burchell’s zebra; and the new animals get the name of ‘ zebrules.’ They seem excellently adapted by their build and general make, as well as by the hardness of hoof, for transport purposes and artillery batteries. The zebra striping is often distinct, though in color they more generally resemble their dam. They stand fourteen hands high, with a girth meas- urement of sixty-three inches. Their temper seems to be better than that of the ordinary mule, and they are exceedingly active, alert and intelligent. The Indian government is giving them a trial in Quetta for mountain battery work, and they are being put, also, to a practical test in Germany. UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL NEWS. Tue Royal Geographical Society has ap- propriated £200 a year for five years, and the general board of studies of Cambridge Uni- versity the same sum for a School of Geog- raphy at the university. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vox. XVIII. No. 447. Proressor W. N. Ferrin has been elected president of the Pacific University at Forest Grove, Oregon. Dr. Auten J. SmiruH, present professor of pathology in the University of Texas, has been elected professor of pathology at the University of Pennsylvania, in succession to Dr. Simon Flexner, director of the Rocke- feller Institute, New York. Mr. Encar James Swirt, A.B. (Amherst, 1886), who has held a fellowship at Clark Uni- versity for the past two years and has just taken an examination for the doctor’s degree there, has been appointed professor of psy- chology and pedagogy in the Washington Uni- versity at St. Louis. Mr. M. E. Stickney, of Harvard Univer- sity, has been appointed instructor in botany in Denison University to succeed Mr. W. W. Stockberger, resigned. Tue following appointments have been made at McGill University: Dr. J. G. Me- Carthy, to be assistant professor of anatomy; Dr. J. T. Halsey, to be assistant professor of pharmacology and therapeutics; Dr. R. A. Kerry, to be lecturer in pharmacology and therapeutics; Dr. S. Ridley Mackenzie, to be lecturer in clinical surgery; Dr. John McCrae, to be lecturer in pathology; Dr. D. A. Shirres, to be lecturer in neuro-pathology; Dr. D. D. McTaggart, to be lecturer in medico-legal pathology. At University College, London, Dr. Page May has been appointed lecturer on the physiology of the nervous system, and Mr. J. H. Parsons, lecturer on physiological optics. A CHAIR of agricultural botany has been es- tablished at Rennes, with M. Danniel as pro- fessor. Dr. Emit KRAEpELIN, professor of psychiatry at Heidelberg, has been called to Munich. Dr. W. Lossen, professor of chemistry at KGnigsberg, has retired. Dr. Cart Huco Huppert, professor of med- ical chemistry at the German University of Prague, will retire at the end of the present semester, SCIENCE A WEEKLY JOURNAL DEVOTED TO THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE, PUBLISHING THE OFFICIAL NOTICES AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE, Eprrori1at CoMMITTEE : 8S. NEwcoms, Mathematics; R. S. WoopWwARD, Mechanics; E. C. PICKERING Astronomy; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics ; R. H. THurston, Engineering ; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry ; CHARLES D. Watcort, Geology; W. M. Davis, Physiography ; HENRY F. OsBORN, Paleon- tology ; W. K. Brooks, C. HarT MERRIAM, Zoology ; S. H. ScuppER, Entomology ; C. E. Bessey, N. L. Brirron, Botany ; BowpitTcH, Physiology ; C. S. Minot, Embryology, Histology; H. P. WILLIAM H. WELCH, Pathology ; J. McKEEN CATTELL, Psychology. Fray, Jury 31, 1903. CONTENTS: Specialization in Education: Proressor 8. W. WILLISTON RGM ENTALS OF NCLONCE. 07. oie co «oie se ajeinieee' 138 Scientific Books :— Reports of the Princeton University Ea- peditions to Patagonia: Dr. W. H. Dati... 146 Scientific Journals and Articles............ 148 Societies and Academies :-— Anthropological Society of Washington: SETHE VV PATIPENS MELOUGEL » die -cle cis o'aic'sleisls ae reisia.s 148 Diseusssion and Correspondence :— Indian Pottery: F, S. DELLENBAUGH...... 148 Shorter Articles :— The Relation of Lime and Magnesia to Metabolism: D. W. May. Notes on the Bvidences of Human Remains from Jacobs’ Cavern: CHARLES NEWTON GOULD. New Terms in Chemistry: H. C. Cooper...... 149 Current Notes on Meteorology :— Climate and Crops in the Argentine Re- public; Kite-flying in Scotland and the Cyclone Theory; Carbon Dioxide in London Railway Carriages: Proressor R. DEC. PORTING Selec oral orsis = eialler api ayace.s\sis/eie 6-916. 154 PAREN OMG \OUNCOT. occa ee ycec sie sences 155 The Rhodes Scholarships................++ 156 Setentifie Notes and News.............,.6 157 University and Educational News.........- 160 MSS. intended for publication and books, etc., intended tor review should be sent to the responsible editor, Pro- fessor J. McKeen Cattell, Garrison-on-Hudson, N. Y. SPECIALIZATION IN EDUCATION.* Tue past few years have witnessed pro- found changes in the industrial conditions of our people, changes which, to many, are of deep portent. The concentration of wealth, the centralization of power, the de- velopment of monopolies, all have seemed to menace the equilibrium of our nation, and dire have been the prophecies of evil. But, with all these changes, with oil trusts and steel trusts and other trusts innumer- able, have also come national supremacy in commerce, the creation of vast wealth, and an advancement in well-being. The industrial world, like the rest of the great world of nature, is never at rest. Every new invention of labor-saving machinery, every new discovery of importance, brings unhappiness and misery to some, but in- creased happiness and pleasure to many others. So too, who shall doubt but that the present monopolistic movements, the trusts and the mergers, when we shall have learned to guard that which is good and prevent that which is bad, will result in greater, benefits to mankind and a higher civilization? To check the greed of trusts there are labor unions, to check the law- lessness of labor unions there will be con- sumers’ unions, and over all there will be social laws to harmonize dissonance. Man, *Read before the Society of Sigma Xi, Ohio State University, June 22, 1903. 130 more than any other animal, is social and gregarious, and theevolution of laws for the best interests of the race is as certain as the evolution of the organic world. The concentration of forces in the in- dustrial world, by whatsoever name we call them, is an expression of a definite social law. Many of my hearers will remember when every village had its own shoemaker, its butcher and baker and candlestick maker, all laboriously and with wasted energy doing those things which are now being done by scores of producers. The trusts or combinations may and will do things cheaper and better, because they concentrate in labor and material and time, all of which are possible because of in- creased specialization. But it is a grave problem to all of us how far such specialization and concentra- tion shall be permitted to go, that they may not outrun control, that they may not re- sult in the subjugation of the weaker and their undue dependency upon the greed of the leaders of the industrial forces. When wealth and power have become perpetual, and poverty insurmountable, then would trusts and monopolies be intolerable and dissolution imminent. Of such results, however, there is less probability than ever before in the world’s history. The fountain of civilization is constantly bubbling up afresh to replace that which is foul and effete. Never be- fore has there been less danger of stratifica- tion in our social organism. In the past histery of life upon our earth it has been a law that the highest organisms of one epoch have developed, not from the dom- inant organisms of a preceding epoch, but from the middle classes, if I may apply such a term to them. From the farm and the work shop will come the leaders of the next generation, even as those of the pres- ent generation are, for the most part, of similar origin. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 448. With every succeeding generation of men, as of other animals, the summit of evolution is gradually becoming higher. The way toward success is longer, but our strides are greater. Specialization is an inviolable law of nature, to which man is no exception, physically or psychically. How shall we recognize this in education? How shall we determine that which is real and avoid that which is unreal? It must be apparent to all that our modern industrial activities are having a profound influence-upon our systems of education. Or is it largely because of our improved methods in education that America is attaining its great commercial importance at the present time? A new generation has grown up since technical schools of agriculture have been established throughout our land, and technical and ‘ professional schools of all kinds have im- proved in a most extraordinary way dur- ing the past twenty years. The engineer is no longer a country surveyor; the physi- cian is no longer one who turns from the plow or anvil to pills and powders with a few months’ interim of perfunctory lec- tures; the lawyer is no longer graduated from the: village law office. President Draper has recently deplored the passing of the family doctor and the coming in his stead of the specialist. He regrets that the man, the counselor and friend is merging into the cold, unsympathetic scien- tist. But who is there of us, when danger is imminent, that would not rather choose that same unsympathetic scientist, skilled and skilful in all that goes toward success ? Who would choose the village-edueated lawyer to fight a powerful trust? Special knowledge and special skill the world must have and the world will have wherever possible, and special skill is possible for every one, even though it be in nothing more than the sharpening of a jack-knife. Is there any one who doubts this? Is there Juty 31, 1903.) any one who prefers inferiority in a multi- tude of things rather than eminence in a few things or in one thing? It is not, then, a question of the desirability of special skill, but rather of how that special skill may be best attained. I have no patience with those who think, because a student prefers to spend months or years of study in the bacteri- ological laboratory when he might have been devoting his attention to Greek myth- ology, that he is actuated by a commercial spirit, that, because he is doing something well which he will afterwards find useful, he is mercenary. Thirty years ago, how- ever, the average college professor would have been shocked by the bare suggestion that his pupils desired to make any prac- tical use of the knowledge he imparted, or that the single inelastic college course of those days was not the best preparation for any vocation in life. There is still a prevalent belief, even though much modified from that of former days, that the general training of the intel- leetual powers should continue through at least three, if not four, years of college life —that specialization should not begin early, if one wishes to accomplish the most in life. That late specialization is not the best in all professions the world has long conceded. What eminent musician has there been who did not begin his musical training while yet a child? What great artist has there been who first decided upon his life’s work after graduation from a college course? How many novelists of wide reputation are there who have been college graduates even? How few, indeed, are the great leaders in commerce, science or the arts who did not begin their distine- tive pursuits early in life. Ask an Agassiz, a Darwin or a Huxley, or any one of our able naturalists, when he first began the study of nature, and he will reply that he was always a naturalist. Is it probable SCIENCE. 131 that such men would have been greater men had they devoted four years of their life to the humanities alone? Is the great musician less successful because his train- ing may have been at the expense of Greek, mathematics or chemistry? It is true, in- deed, that such men are often one-sided, cranky, as the world calls them, and that undue specialization has robbed them of much of the sweeter part of life, has put them out of joint with the world, has often left them, as Agassiz has said, with no time to make money, but I believe that it is better to have cranky specialists than not to have them at all. Away with the idea that such men are always born great; if early specialization is good for men with great powers, it is better for those with small powers. Precocity may be a sign of greatness, but I believe more often great- ness is the result of precocity, the result of early concentration before the plasticity of youth is irrevocably gone. We cheer- fully admit that the violinist must begin his special training while yet his muscles are plastic. Is the mind less plastic than the muscles, and is there not as great need that it should be molded early? You can not teach old dogs new tricks, nor is it often possible to teach a man new tricks after he has become matured. Very recently a Chicago author has pub- lished a book in which he endeavors to prove, from the testimony of many promi- nent men of business, that a general col- lege course is detrimental to success in a business career, and it is well known that such successful men as is Carnegie have given assent to such views. Like all such generalizations there may be both truth and falsity in this one. For many men, and by no means the poorer men, I firmly believe that a general college course is det- rimental as preparation for a business career, while to all a special education and a fixed motive in their education are of 132 benefit. We clearly recognize to-day that the object of higher education is less the acquisition of knowledge than the acquisi- tion of power to use knowledge, and any education which neglects those powers most necessary in a given vocation is sure to be of harm, either, negatively or positively. As a rule, I believe that the college edu- cation materially helps towards the largest success in life only when that education is to a greater or less degree a special educa- tion. Some will benefit by a wide cultural training, others will not. A broad man may benefit by a broad training; the nar- row man must be content with a narrower preparation to fit him for a narrower path in life. A four years’ course in Greek or paleontology will not enable the apprentice to wipe a joint nearly as well as would a four weeks’ laboratory course under a master plumber. But a too broad train- ing is, I believe, better than a too narrow one. One so trained is more apt to make a better citizen though he makes fewer dol- lars. A more rational system, and one towards which the educational world seems rapidly tending, is to neglect neither the general nor the special. The one funda- mental principle in the teaching of science at the present day is the laboratory, the cultivation of skill im doing things rather than in knowing about things. Im all the technical professions this is assumed, even though it may be carried to an undue ex- tent. At least we are all agreed that the one chief object of education is to make the student think, and then do. How much does the general college education do this for many pursuits in life? Professor, Thorndike, in a recent num- ber of the Century Magazine, has given an interesting analysis of the careers of the Phi Beta Kappa scholars during the past sixty years. He has shown that during these years the proportion of those who have followed the so-called learned profes- SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 448. sions of law, the ministry, medicine and teaching has remained nearly uniform at about sixty-five per, cent., but that in some of these vocations the proportions have in- ereased at the expense of those in others. The percentage of those scholars following the legal profession has advanced materi- ally, while there has been a marked falling off in the proportion of those who have become clergymen. In the percentage of teachers there has been a striking increase, while that of physicians has increased from five to about seven per cent. Membership in this society in the past has been con- ferred upon those students who have at- tained a high stand in the so-called cul- tural studies especially, professional stu- dents being excluded even yet. What is more reasonable to suppose than that such students would of choice seek those pur- suits for which their trainmg has more especially fitted them, and in which they have attaimed scholarly success? The de- crease in the number of those seeking the ministerial calling has been dependent upon entirely different causes, though I will venture to say that the percentage of Phi Beta scholars following this profession is larger than among other graduates with similar training. While there are so many more such scholars among our teachers than formerly in the profession of medi- cone, I doubt not there are proportionally fewer than there were fifty years ago. The increase of but two or three per cent. for this profession is very suggestive, and even this Imerease is more apparent than real. In recent years the requirements for the Bachelor of Arts degree have every- where been much liberalized, and the Phi Beta Kappa scholar is apt to be far more varied in his training than he was for- merly. In other words Mahomet has not gone far toward the mountains, but the mountains are coming to Mahomet. Pro- fessor Thorndike deplores this lack of high- JuLy 31, 1903.) grade scholars in the medical profession, and hopes for better things in the future. But I have little sympathy with either his hopes or his desires. In his analysis of the careers which these scholars have followed in the past sixty years, Professor Thorndike makes no mention of the profession of engineering. It is to be inferred that there have been no Phi Beta Kappa scholars who have be- come engineers, or at least that the number is so small as to be negligible. The fact is startling, as it also is pregnant with meaning. Has the educational concept of scholarship been such that two of the chief learned professions have been almost ex- eluded therefrom? Or would it be more reasonable to suppose that the Phi Beta Kappa, like the Sigma Xi, is really a broad society of specialists? The reason so few Phi Beta Kappas have chosen the engineer- ing profession is not difficult to under- stand. It has happened that the educa- tion of engineers has for years been more nearly in line with modern educational progress than that of any other of the learned professions. It really has been the one profession in America which has served as a model for all others in educa- tion, a model toward which all others are rapidly approaching. The profession early recognized the fact, possibly because it was not dignified with the appellation of learned, and did not, therefore, see the need of the so-called learned culture, that the most successful results must come, without neglecting other useful and eul- tural studies, from an early, consistent and rational specialization. Can any one be- lieve that the profession would stand where it does to-day, richly meriting the title of learned, that it would have accom- plished the tremendous results it has, had it followed the methods so long in vogue in the medical and legal professions, the adding of a year or two of purely SCIENCE. 133 didactic professional instruction upon any sort of a foundation? Because the engi- neering profession stood so far in advance of all other professions in its systems of education seventeen years ago, and be- cause Phi Beta Kappa would not admit that any other system than its own could produce scholars, we have to-day the So- ciety of the Sigma Xi, now firmly estab- lished in nearly all of our best universities. The medical profession tried too long and tried in vain to polish off the general scholar or the no scholar into the special scholar. But it is recognizing its error, recognizing that the best success means not so much more years of study as an earlier and rational specialization. It is a fact, pretty well recognized by the science teacher, that the average col- lege graduate, who has had no special sci- entific training, has no advantage in the laboratory over the average graduate of the high school. The latter has not so much to forget and he has not forgotten so much, his youthful plasticity is less im- paired, his observational powers less dulled. Indeed, I have no hesitation in saying, and in saying it I draw from many years’ experience, that a four years’ college course in the languages, literature and mathematics is of positive injury to the modern student of medicine. He has lost valuable years, even as the musician has lost them who begins his special studies at twenty-two or twenty-three years of age, lost them irrecoverably. Such a student might make the good family doctor, whose loss Dr. Draper deplores, but the chances for the highest suecess in his profession have been impaired. In some of the better medical colleges the course of the would-be physician is now marked out with more or less pre- cision through six years from the high school to the hospital, and it needs no prophet to say that what these schools are 134 doing will soon be the rule in medical edu- cation. And not only will the course from the high school to the doctor of medi- cine degree be a fixed one, with only such variations as may lead to diverse ends in the profession, but I believe that the course will reach back into the high school, even as the engineering course already does to some extent. Furthermore, not only will such methods be accepted as most fitting in these professions, but similar methods will eventually become the rule for all the more important professions and vocations in life. Is there not, then, a grain of reason in the protest of the busi- ness man that the college education does not prepare for business life? How, too, ean Professor Thorndike expect to see any material inerease in the proportion of Phi Beta Kappa scholars in such professions unless the mountains come quite to Ma- homet by the admission that the profes- sional scholar may be the equal of the cul- tural scholar? I would not for a moment have it in- ferred that I have aught to say in depre- cation of that general cultural education of which Phi Beta Kappa has been for so long the honored exponent, but I do say that such an education is in large part a special education, and not to be desired for all men. fessor Peck may still continue to assert that the graduate of the liberal arts course is a ‘gentleman and scholar,’ while the sci- entific man is only a ‘sublimated tinker,’ the world in general is ceasing to look upon the scientist as beimg only half educated, and the sooner the last vestige of such pedantry has disappeared the better it will be for American higher education. I do insist that for either the literary or the scientific student the education should widen his sympathies and broaden his out- look. A few cranks may be endured, but a world of cranks would be a dreary place SCIENCE. Though such men as Pro- [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 448. to live in. But one may have broad sym- pathies without being a jack of all trades, and the intermingling of many men of many minds does more to teach us toler- ance than all the book education that can be compressed into the cranium of the pedant. The best remedy for intolerance is the habit of thinking accurately. I urge only that every lad or every lass should be early guided into the pathway along which his future lies, that he should have a motive for all he does. A motive, indeed, is more important than much knowledge, for it brings zeal, ambition and earnestness, so often, so deplorably often, lacking in the college undergraduate. In- deed, I care less for the kind of a prepara- tion a student has if he clearly knows what he wants—he will remedy his faults in the course of time. As college men I firmly believe that we are too careful as to the kind and amount of preparation a student has when he enters college and too care- less of the work he does while in college. Some of the best and most successful stu- dents I have ever known have been those whom the college rules would have ex- eluded, while many a one who fulfills all technical requirements is a dismal failure. It was but six years ago that President Dwight of Yale University said: ‘In any future development of the college system, the chief purpose of general culture should not give way or be subordinated to any purpose of special culture, with a view of some special work in future years.’ It has been but a few weeks since the educational world has been startled by the announce- ment that Greek would no longer be re- quired of the Bachelor of Arts graduate of Yale. Nor is this all. Whereas to-day Yale College requires eight or ten years’ study of the ancient languages as a pre- requisite for the B.A. degree, next year it will require not more than four, and none of them in the college. Such con- Jury 31, 1903.] cessions, coming from so conservative an institution as is Yale, are of the deepest significance. They mean that the move- ment toward special education can not be ignored by any institution. The demand for special education is imperative. Like the trusts, it has come to stay. It is reported that this change in the Yale requirements was opposed by the lan- guage teachers of the faculty, who de- plored the debasement of the time-honored degree of Bachelor of Arts. In many of our larger universities, as well as smaller ones, three baccalaureate degrees are given in the school of liberal arts—Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Philosophy and Bache- lor of Science. If one will examine the lists of graduates of such institutions he will be struck with the proportionally greater frequency with which the Bachelor of Science degree is given in recent years. Usually the graduates receiving this de gree outnumber those receiving both of the other degrees. In fact one can only be surprised at the rapid diminution in the number of those striving for the old simon- pure badge of a liberal culture. Indeed, those who seek the indeterminate, betwixt and between, hybrid degree of Bachelor of Philosophy are never very numerous. I dare venture the assertion that any college which persists in the old cultural course of thirty years ago to the exclusion of others, will soon be teaching empty benches for the most part. A few institutions like the University of Michigan, the University of Minnesota and Leland Stanford have abandoned the Bachelor of Philosophy and Bachelor of Science degrees, giving to all alike in the non-professional courses the one degree of Bachelor of Arts. To those who believe with me that an earlier specialization or an earlier motive in education is to be desired, such contin- ued rending of the bonds of liberal culture offers much of encouragement, though only SCIENCE. 135 the outcome of methods long ago intro- duced by Harvard University, the system of electives or optionals. No one can doubt now but that this sys- tem has been of benefit. It permitted for. the first time the student who was not con- tent with an elementary training, to widen to some extent his preparation for special pursuits in life. So grudgingly bestowed at first upon the senior, it has now become the privilege of the freshman. But I can not believe that the optional system has been altogether a blessing. It has done much to encourage the ambitious, but it has also done much to stultify the lazy. We all know how many students there are who seek a degree rather than an educa- tion. And many of us also know that the average non-professional college student can not be favorably compared with the professional student of like age for zeal and ambition. There is too often a tend- ency for a college teacher to be lax in discipline, that he may not diminish the attendance upon his classes. The stu- dent’s choice is far too often decided by trivial cireumstances—the advice of a classmate, the reputation of a teacher, the ease of certain studies, or often indeed by the toss of a penny. It is only the mi- nority who deliberately plan their work, because it is only the minority who know what they desire to do in life, and it is seldom that the student gets advice from those whose duty it should be to advise him. But the optional system is resolving itself as rapidly as cireumstances permit into special courses, either recommended or required, and the student who now goes through the senior year without some no- tion of what he is striving after is becom- ing less and less frequent. It was but a short time ago that Presi- dent Butler of Columbia University shocked the world of higher education by suggesting that the college course should 136 terminate with the sophomore year, that the junior and senior years should be dis- tinctively years of professional education, as in reality they are becoming in most of the better universities of the United States. He would have it that every student should orient himself, should decide what he expects to do in life by the beginning of his junior year. On the other, hand, it seems also appar- ent that the freshman and sophomore years are gradually being eliminated from the college and relegated to the so-called schools of secondary education. There are many high schools which would will- ingly, and could with advantage, take over the work of the first one or two years of the college. The average college instruct- ors of the first and second years do not compare over favorably with those in the upper classes of the high schools, and the cost of instruction is not much greater. By thus distributing the work of these two years in many more institutions a far greater number of young men and women would receive the benefits of higher edu- cation. We all know how much the pro- pinquity of the college has to do in infiu- encing the average high school graduate. Every college town sends a much larger proportion of its youth to college than do towns less favorably situated. I doubt not that if the universities of our country, and especially the state universities, should encourage such an extension of the high- school course we soon would have students entering the junior year from nearly every city of fifteen or twenty thousand inhabitants, and that too in larger num- ber, than now complete the sophomore year in our colleges. And I have no doubt, were President Butler’s suggestion to be- come a reality, that hundreds of our high schools would soon become colleges, col- leges moreover that would do better work SCIENCE. [N.S. Vox. XVIII. No. 448. than does the average college of the pres- ent time. Moreover, I believe that such a plan is the only one which will preserve the bache- lor degree from extinction. When it be- comes the rule that the medical diploma is given only after a six years’ course of work from the present high school graduation, who is there that will care for the bache- lor degree midway? Twenty years hence there will be fewer bachelors of science or arts among medical graduates than there are at the present time, and not more than one in ten of our physicians now possess the degree. When the engineer is required to have the professional degree of C.H. or M.E. there will be very few students who will strive after the bachelor degree. In other words, it seems to me that the tend- eney of American higher education is toward the German system. When our high schools become Gymnasia and Real- schulen our universities will begin where theirs do, at the beginning of the junior year. At a recent meeting of college educators of prominence at Evanston the subject of the abridgment of the college course was discussed, with but little approbation. The literary student, the student of the so- ealled cultural courses, almost unanimously opposes any suggestion of the elimination of the college. Fortunately or unfortu- nately, however, college educators do not control college education, and he is a wise man who keeps closely in pace with the world. If the world demands that special education shall begin with the junior year or earlier, that the college shall end with the sophomore year, aught we may do or say will avail little; the controlling causes are social, not educational. Within the past few years there has been an extraordinary increase, both relatively and absolutely, as regards men, in the at- tendance of women in the college and uni- Juty 31, 1903.] versity, as well as the high school. The cause, apparently unaffected by national conditions of prosperity or distress, has not been satisfactorily explained. Doubt- less a partial explanation is that fewer vocations in life are open to woman and she, therefore, seeks that higher training afforded by the college of arts which will fit her for her more peculiar vocation, that of teaching in the secondary schools. On the other hand, it is equally certain that a larger proportion than ever, before of young men are seeking professional and technical education, notwithstanding the greatly in- creased requirements. By every teacher of wide experience in higher education certain fundamental dif- ferences in the mental characteristics of men and women students are, I think, ac- knowledged. Whether these differences are inherent or whether they are acquired is by no means certain, and does not con- cern us here. But that there are such dif- ferences, I believe every teacher of the natural sciences at least will admit. The woman student is usually more faithful in attention to duty, she is less distracted by outside influences, less fitful and wayward in her work. That woman has greater fortitude than man in suffering and misfortune is universally acknowl- edged; the same trait is displayed in her greater conscientiousness in the perform- ance of the routine duties of life. Her memory is better than, and her power of application as good as, are those faculties in man. As a result she averages better in all those college studies where memory and faithfulness are most conducive to ex- - eellence. In language, literature and reci- tative science work the larger proportion of the better students are women, where the sexes are equally divided in number. In the coeducational colleges, the propor- tion of women who attain the distinction of membership in Phi Beta Kappa is nearly SCIENCE. 137 three fifths of the whole, though those eligible for such distinction are scarcely more than those of the men. Moreover, the age of graduation of women from the college is distinctly less than that of men. Certain causes partly account for the un- doubted superiority of women in the gen- eral college course, though not wholly. There are decidedly more girls than boys who graduate from the high school, and as fewer girls than boys take up college work, there is a larger selection of the more able and serious women. Family ambitions, and the mistaken idea that it is the proper social thing, send many a worthless young man to college, while most women who go do so because of some serious purpose. Furthermore, as every physiologist knows, women reach maturity earlier than do men. A girl of eighteen has the intellectual ma- turity of the boy of twenty. That all women students do not excel, of course goes without saying. Indeed, the frivolous girl, she who goes to college chiefly for the social or sorority advantages she hopes to find there, is usually quite as worthless, from an educational point of view, as the young man whose chief aim is a good time or athletics. I really think that we may truthfully say of the woman student that ‘When she is good, she is very good; but when she is bad, she is horrid.’ On the other hand, the woman student in the science laboratory is a comparative failure. She has less inventiveness and originality, less independence and self-re- liance; she invariably needs more assist- ance and guidance. In the concrete, ob- servational sciences, she is less able to draw conclusions. In other words, she is deficient in research ability, save perhaps in abstract mathematics. On the other hand, opportunities for women in scientific research are probably even greater than they are for young men; the bright scien- tific woman is really more certain of a 138 remunerative pedagogical position in many branches than is her equally apt brother. One result of these sexual characteristics is that women more often cling to the older courses in the humanities, the so-called cul- tural courses. She prefers these studies, not only because there is less opportunity for her in the technical professions, not only because her more usual ambition is to follow that noblest of all vocations, that of the home-maker, but because her tastes and proclivities fit her better for the more esthetic and humanistic studies. In the coeducational colleges the women now generally exceed the men in number. This slow relative increase of the men, or in some instances actual decrease, has often been attributed to coeducation, the dislike of young men to mingle with young women in the class-room, to be brought ito com- - petition with them where they are so often outshone. I doubt this very much. The, | } : ; ‘of months since, Lord Kelvin said that milksop who resents the rivalry of women, who thinks himself so far superior to them that he is unwilling to be shown his mis- take, ought to be tied to an apron string and smothered in his callowness. The real reason is that men are in greater numbers seekine that special training which they do not or can not get in the general college course, while women are seeking that spe- cial trainmg which they do get in the humanities. Nor do I think that either are any more swayed by the commercial spirit which so many superficial observers deplore. There are many advantages in coeducation of the sexes, as well as certain disadvantages. The women need that stimulation in self-dependence and orig- inality which the mingling of young men will surely give them, and the men need the greater esthetic cultivation, the broader humanizing outlook, which women fellow students will surely give them. Coeduca- tional colleges will never become women’s colleges so long as they offer anything SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No.-448. which men want, and those courses of study which women prefer will always offer that which many, though not all, men will want. Whatever may be the tendencies of mod- ern higher education, whatever may be the outcome of the various movements now making, who is there that can repress the feeling of exultation and of congratulation in the great achievements, the lofty aims of our colleges and universities? Whether we are to become a nation of scholars or a nation of specialists, I know not, but that we shall become a greater nation, a wiser nation, a more prosperous nation because of the high school, the college and the uni- versity is certain. S. W. WILLISTON. UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO. THE LIMITS OF SCIENCE. In moving a vote of thanks a couple science positively affirmed creative power and that modern biologists were coming once more to a firm acceptance of a vital principle. These remarks have given rise to an interesting series of letters to the London Times, which we reproduce: When a man of known distinction gives public expression to an opinion it is, of course, received with attention. But its validity will depend, not upon his distine- tion, but upon the authority which he has achieved in the field to which his opinion relates. In the domain of physies, to the explora- tion of which Lord Kelvin has devoted an honored lifetime, he would be a bold man who would cross swords with him. But for dogmatic utterance on biological questions there is no reason to suppose that he is better equipped than any person of average intelligence. In a recent speech Lord Kelvin has Jury 31, 1903.] taken occasion to define with more pre- cision than, perhaps, he has ever done be- fore his view of the possible attitude of scientific inquiry to inorganic nature on the one hand, and to organic on the other. And he has emphasized this in the letter published in your columns to-day. That view is, as I apprehend, this: In the former, he claims for scientific investi- gation the utmost freedom; in the latter, scientific thought is ‘compelled to accept the idea of creative power.’ That transcends the possibilities of scientific investigation. Weismann defines this to be ‘‘the attempt to indicate the mechanism through which the phenomena of the world are brought about. When this mechanism ceases sci- ence is no longer possible.’? Lord Kelvin, in effect, wipes out by a stroke of the pen the whole position won for us by Darwin. And in so doing it can hardly be denied that his present position is inconsistent with the principle laid down in his British Association address at Edinburgh in 1871: *«Science is bound by the everlasting law of honor to face fearlessly every problem which can be fairly presented to it. Ifa probable solution, consistent with the ordi- nary course of nature, can be found, we must not invoke an abnormal act of creative power.’’ Among the biologists of the pres- ent day I apprehend that there are few who are prepared to contend that the Darwinian theory is not so consistent. It is a common dialectic artifice to state an opponent’s position in terms which allow of its being more readily confuted. It is scarcely, however, worthy of Lord Kelvin. What biologist has ever suggested that a fortuitous concourse of atoms ‘could make * * * a sprig of moss’? I confess I think that Lord Kelvin’s first thoughts were best, and that it is equally absurd to suppose that a crystal could be made in the same way. A fortuitous concourse of 3 SCIENCE. 139 atoms might produce an amorphous mass of matter; but to form a crystal the ‘atoms’ must be selected and of the same kind, and their concourse is, therefore, not fortuitous. The fact is that the argument from design applies, for what it is worth, as much to a diamond as to a caterpillar. If it is to be rejected in favor of a mechanical explana- tion in the one ease, it is impossible, logic- ally, to maintain it in the other. Lord Kelvin quotes Liebig as denying that ‘grass and flowers * * * grew by mere chemical forces.’ If not, it may be asked, by what do they grow? If growth is to be accounted for by a ‘vital principle,’ this must be capable of quantitative meas- urement like any other force. If it is physical energy in another form, Liebig’s dictum is futile. If not, organisms are not subject to the principle of conserva- tion of energy. Yet this principle was first indicated by Mayer, a biologist. Physicists, it may be remarked, are not without their own difficulties. But we do not dismiss their conclusions impatiently on that account. Lord Kelvin said that ‘ether was absolutely non-atomic; it was absolutely structureless and homogeneous.’ He speaks of it as if it were a definite conerete thing like the atmosphere. But we can not picture to our minds how such a medium can possess elasticity, or how it can transmit undulations. The fact is that the ether is a mere mathematical figment, convenient because it satisfies various for- mule. As it is only an intellectual concep- tion, we may invest it with any properties we please. The late Professor Clifford once told me that it was harder than steel. I believe it is now thought to be gelatinous. Anyhow, it is nothing more than a working hypothesis, which some day, like phlogis- ton, will only have historic interest. W. T. Tusevron-Dyer. Kew, May 4, 1903. 140 Many men of science will heartily sym- pathize with Sir W. TT. Thiselton-Dyer’s protest against the attack on the Darwinian theory of evolution recently delivered at the University College. But it seems to many of us somewhat astonishing that an institution which professes to stand in the vanguard of scientific work in London, and which possesses its accredited teachers in biology, should open its doors to irrespon- sible lecturers on ‘directivity,’ even if they are supported by the doyens of physical science. To these public lectures con- demning Darwinism men and women stu- dents from all London colleges are invited, and the president of the college congratu- lates the assembly on the proceedings of the day. I have always understood that the college was absolutely non-sectarian in character, and that religious controversy and theological propagandism were not ad- mitted within its walls. To-the founders of the college, Grote, Bentham, Hume, it would have been a painful revelation to find the truth or falsehood of any scien- tifie hypothesis questioned within its walls from the standpoint of theological polem- ics. J think there is small doubt that the wishes of these founders, that science and scholarship should be treated apart from theological opinions, have been rigorously carried out in the teaching of the many distinguished men who have held chairs in the college. This non-theological attitude has attracted to the college many of our fellow subjects of Buddhist, Mahomedan and Jewish faiths. But will they find the college the same free ground if they see its authorities recognizing a public course of lectures on ‘Christian Apologetics’? A faculty of theology making a scholarly study of dogmatics has a totally different footing from an irresponsible association providing a controversial treatment of the basis of modern biological science. The attack is not delivered openly in the organs SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 448. where scientific men criticize the founda- tions of their, knowledge, but covertly, with the tacit assumption that the truth in ques- tion is hostile to the Christian belief. It can not be too often reiterated that the theory of natural selection has nothing whatever to do with Christianity. Many good Christians accept it on the scientific evidence; many agnosties reject Christi- anity without being biased by any theory of evolution. If Lord Kelvin wishes to attack Darwinism, let him leave the field of emotional theological belief and descend into the plane where straightforward bio- logical argument meets like argument. Let him examine the facts of heredity, of varia- tion, and of selection, and offer controvert- ing facts. A dozen biological journals would be open to receive his criticisms and meet them with courteous rejoinder. In this way he would be adding to his already immense services to science; he does not forward knowledge when he adds the weight of his name to an anti-Darwinian erusade which does not proceed from the inspiration of science, but from a mistaken notion that man can a priori assert what method of conducting the universe is or is not consonant with the Divine dignity. Kart PEarson. HAMPSTEAD, May 7, 1903. I feel compelled as a physiologist to ex- press my regret that a most distinguished British botanist has thought it necessary to ‘cross swords’ with the most distin- guished of British physicists with refer- ence to a question on which it is desirable that all men of science should be in accord. I shall not inquire whether the views ex- pressed by the director, of Kew Gardens in his letter which appeared on May 7 are entertained by biologists generally. My object is to disclaim on the part of my own science, that of physiology, any par- ticipation in the opinion that, for the dis- Jury 31, 1903.) cussion of biological questions, Lord Kelvin is ‘no better equipped than any person of average intelligence.’ The question at issue is how far ‘me- chanical explanations’ can be given of the phenomena of life. The view which for the last half century has been taught by physiologists may be stated as follows: All the processes observed in living organisms are of such kind as to admit of being in- vestigated by the same methods as are used in the investigation of the phenomena of non-living nature—i. e., by measurement of their time and place relations under varying conditions—in other words, by the method of experiment. But, beyond the limit thus stated, we have to do with processes which can not be directly meas- ured or observed. These are, first, the mental processes, whether of man or of animals, in respect of which the experi- mental psychologist is unable to go beyond the estimation of conditions and effects; and, secondly, the processes of organic evolution by which the organism grows from small beginnings to such form and structure as best fit it for its place in na- ture. This is the doctrine which was pro- fessed by Helmholtz, the founder of mod- ern physiology, as the result of those early investigations which were embodied in his well-known treatise on the ‘Erhaltung der Kraft,’ in which he demonstrated more clearly than had been done before that the natural laws which had been established in the inorganic world govern no less abso- lutely the processes of animal and plant life, thus giving the death-blow to the pre- viously prevalent vitalistic doctrine that these operations of life are dominated by laws which are special to themselves. He thereby brought into one the before too widely separated sciences of physiology and physics. It was not until Helmholtz had been en- gaged for some eight years in building up 2 SCIENCE. 141 the new science of physical physiology that the German physiologist and the English physicist (W. Thomson) came into per- sonal relation with each other at Kreuz- nach. In one of Helmholtz’s letters to his wife he tells of Thomson’s ‘surpassing acuteness, clearness and versatility,’ quali- ties which impressed him so much that in their intercourse he found himself to be by comparison ‘a dullard.’ He was evi- dently wrong. From the botanical point of view, the future Lord Kelvin was no better than ‘a person of average intelli- gence.’ But, in all seriousness, it is surely a mistake to suppose that biological prob- lems appeal so little to the intellect that, unless he is an expert, a man of transcend- ent ability is incapable of dealing with them. J. BurpoN-SANDERSON. OxrorD, May 9, 1903. I am quite impenitent at the irrelevant rebuke of the Oxford Regius Professor of Medicine. But he might represent what I wrote with more precision. I did not express so absurd an opinion as that Lord Kelvin ‘‘was no better than ‘a person of average intelligence.’’’ Nor do we need in this country a testimonial from Helm- holtz to the contrary. What I wrote was: ‘For dogmatic utterance on biological ques- tions there is no reason to suppose that he is better, equipped than any person of ay- erage intelligence.’ By ‘equipped’ I in- tended that he is not prepared by technical study of the problems on which he pro- nounces judgment. Sir J. Burdon-Sanderson concludes by saying: ‘It is surely a mistake to suppose that biological problems appeal so little to the intellect that, unless he is an expert, a man of transcendent ability is incapable of dealing with them.’ The first clause of this sentence is obviously absurd; the latter is a simple fact. Any one who has taken the trouble to read the admirable volumes 142 of Darwin’s correspondence recently pub- lished will easily inform himself that a trained master mind may devote a lifetime to biological problems and yet feel some hesitation in pronouncing decisive judg- ment upon them. An untrained master mind may hesitate still more. The late Lord John Russell was credited with the capability at a moment’s notice of per- forming the operation for stone or taking command of the Channel fleet. But such versatility is believed to be rare. ‘Trans- cendent ability’ will not enable a man without previous training to either paint an Academy picture or read the Hebrew Bible. In his speech at University College Lord Kelvin is reported to have said: ‘Modern biologists were coming once more to a firm acceptance of something, and that was a vital principle.’ I deny the fact. And Sir J. Burdon-Sanderson credits Helmholtz with having given ‘the death-blow to the previously prevalent vitalistic doctrine that these operations of life are dominated by laws which are special to themselves.’ He explains ‘these operations’ to mean ‘the processes of animal and plant life.’ Per- haps he will tell us how he reconciles this position with that of Lord Kelvin, on the one hand, and that attributed by Lord Kelvin to Liebig, on the other. The new ‘vital principle’ is only a resurrection of the old ‘vitalistie doctrine.’ One word more. Sir J. Burdon-Sander- son cites Helmholtz for the statement that “the processes of organic evolution * * * can not be directly measured or observed.’ If he will consult recent volumes of the Philosophical Transactions or the pages of ‘Biometrika’ I think he will find reason, in the light of recent research, to disagree with him. W. T. THisevton-DyYeEr. Kew, May 11, 1903. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 448. Tastes differ, of course; but if I were in Lord Kelvin’s place I would rather be eriticized by Sir William Thiselton-Dyer than defended by Sir John Burdon-Sand- erson. His letter in your issue of to-day is in three paragraphs. ‘The first is sugar, the second aloes, and the third sugar again. This sort of sandwich is popular in the nursery; I fancy a man would sooner have his dose undiseuised. After vindicating Lord Kelvin’s right to speak with exceptional authority upon a subject widely separated from those to which he has devoted a long and strenuous life, Sir John Burdon-Sanderson goes on to show that he is entirely wrong. Lord Kelvin drew a sharp line across nature, and said that biologists are now engaged in searching for the ‘vital principle’ which alone can explain the facts of living mat- ter. His mentor asserts the continuity of nature; affirms that the processes appli- cable on one side of Lord Kelvin’s line are equally applicable on the other; and de- clares it to be the glory of Helmholtz that he demonstrated more clearly than had ever been done before that ‘‘the natural laws which had been established in* the in- organic world govern no less absolutely the processes of animal and plant life, thus giving the death-blow to the previously prevalent vitalistic doctrine.’’ He does no doubt add that some things, such as mental phenomena in men and animals, are not yet * susceptible of explanation; but the same holds good, as Lord Kelvin would be the first to admit, about some of the most im- portant phenomena of non-living matter. When men of authority thus flatly con- tradict one another on fundamental ques- tions, it is very hard for the humble in- quirer to know what to believe. It be- comes all the harder when neither the physicists nor the physiologists can agree among themselves. Sir John Burdon- Jury 31, 1903.] Sanderson is evidently not at one with Sir William Thiselton-Dyer, though he reluc- tantly supports the main contention of the latter. Lord Kelvin says that the ether is absolutely non-atomie, absolutely structure- less, and homogeneous. Professor Osborne Reynolds announced not long ago, as the result of the latest investigations, that the ether is atomic or molecular in structure, gave the size of the molecules, calculated their mean free path, and told us that the ether is 500 times as dense as gold, that its mean pressure is 750,000 tons to the square inch, and so forth. “Whom shall my soul believe?’ is the question of the poet, which is echoed by Your obedient servant, Que Scats-Ju? Lonpon, May 11, 1903. I suppose I ought to bow my neck to the rod now that it is wielded judicially by the editor of the Times. I feel no in- clination to do so. Nevertheless, I hope I may be permitted to point out that ‘directive power’ is, as a matter of fact, ‘the stroke of the pen’ by which ‘Lord Kelvin, in effect, wipes out * * * the whole position won for us by Darwin.’ It is no use mincing matters. Students of the Darwinian theory must be permitted to know the strength and weakness of their dialectic position. What that theory did was to complete a mechanical theory of the universe by including in it the organic world. The attempt to introduce a directive force into the Darwinian theory is no new thing. It is, of course, only creative power in disguise. The most notable are those of Niigeli in Germany, and Asa Gray and Cope in America. Weismann has gen- eralized them as an attempt to set up a ‘phyletie vital force,’ and he points out that if we accept anything of the kind ‘we should at once cut ourselves off from all SCIENCE. 143 possible mechanical explanation of organic nature.’ I can hardly suppose that Lord Kelvin was not perfectly aware of this. May I further add that the ‘world of spirit to which the world of matter is al- together subordinate,’ to which Dr. Alfred Wallace would introduce us, is not, so far as I know, a subject which biologists find themselves in a position to investigate? The ‘ether’ seems sufficiently perplexing. W. T. THisevton-DYErR. Kew, May 13, 1903. lt seems to me that, were the discussion excited by Lord Kelvin’s statements to the Christian Association at University College allowed to close in its present phase, the public would be misled and injustice done to both Lord Kelvin and ‘his erities. I therefore beg you to allow me to point out what appear to me to be the significant features of the matter under discussion. Lord Kelvin, whose eminence as a physi- cist gives a special interest to his opinion upon any subject, made at University Col- lege, or in his subsequent letter to you, the following statements: 1. That ‘fortuitous concourse of atoms’ is not an inappropriate description of the formation of a crystal. 2. That ‘fortuitous concourse of atoms’ is utterly absurd in respect to the coming into existence, or the growth, or the con- tinuation of the molecular combinations presented in the bodies of living things. 3. That, though inorganic phenomena do not do so, yet the phenomena of such living things as a sprig of moss, a microbe, a living animal—looked at and considered as matters of scientific investigation—com- pel us to conclude that there is scientific reason for believing in the existence of a creative and directive power. 4. That modern biologists are coming onee more to a firm acceptance of some- thing, and that is—a vital principle. 144 In your article on the discussion which has followed these statements you declare that this (the opinions I have quoted above) is ‘a momentous conclusion,’ and that it is a vital point in the relation of science to religion. I do not agree with that view of the matter, although I find Lord Kelvin’s state- ments full of interest. So far as I have been able to ascertain, after, many years in which these matters have engaged my at- tention, there is no relation, im the sense of a connection or influence, between sci- ence and religion. There is, it is true, often an antagonistic relation between exponents of science and exponents of religion when the latter, illegitimately mis- represent or deny the conclusions of scien- tific research or try to prevent its being carried on, or, again, when the former presume, by magnifying the extremely limited conclusions of science, to deal in a destructive spirit with the very existence of those beliefs and hopes which are called ‘religion.’ Setting aside such excusable and purely personal collisions between rival claimants for authority and power, it appears to me that science proceeds on its path without any contact with religion, and that religion has not, in its essential qualities, anything to hope for, or to fear, from science. The whole order of nature, meluding living and lifeless matter—man, animal and gas—is a network of mechanism the main features and many details of which hhave been made more or less obvious to the wondering intelligence of mankind by the labor and ingenuity of scientific investiga- tors. But no sane man has ever pre- tended, since science became a definite body of doctrine, that we know, or ever can hope to know or conceive of the possi- bility of knowing, whence this mechanism thas come, why it is there, whither it is going, and what there may or may not be SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. XVIII. No. 448. beyond and beside it which our senses are incapable of appreciating. These things are not ‘explained’ by science, and never can be. Lord Kelvin speaks of a ‘fortuitous con- course of atoms,’ but I must confess that I am quite unable to apprehend what he means by that phrase in the connection in which he uses it. It seems to me impos- sible that by ‘fortuitous’ he can mean something which is not determined by natural cause and therefore is not part of the order of nature. When an ordinary man speaks of a concourse haying arisen ‘by chance’ or ‘fortuitously,’ he means merely that the determining conditions which have led by natural causation to its occurrence were not known to him before- hand; he does not mean to assert that it has arisen without the operation of such determining conditions; and I am quite unable to understand how it can be main- tained that ‘the concourse of atoms’ form- ing a crystal, or even a lump of mud, is in any philosophic sense more correctly de- seribed as ‘fortuitous’ than is the con- course of atoms which has given rise to a sprig of moss or an animal. It would be a matter of real interest to many of your readers if Lord Kelvin would explain more precisely what he means by the distinction which he has, somewhat dogmatically, laid down between the formation of a crystal as ‘fortuitous’ and the formation of an or- ganism as due to ‘creative and directive purpose.’ I am not misrepresenting what Lord Kelvin has said on this subject when I say that he seems to have formed the con- ception of a creator who first of all, with- out care or foresight, has produced what - we call ‘matter,’ with its necessary proper- ties, and allowed it to aggregate and crys- tallize as a painter might allow his pig- ments to run and intermingle on his pal- ette; and then, as a second effort, has Jury 31, 1903.) brought some of these elements together with ‘creative and directive purpose,’ mix- ing them, as it were, with ‘a vital prin- ciple’ so as to form living things, just as the painter, might pick out certain colors from his confused palette and paint a picture. This conception of the intermittent ac- tion of creative power and purpose does not, I confess, commend itself to me. That, however, is not so surprising as that it should be thought that this curious con- ception of the action of creative power is of value to religion. Whether the inter- mittent theory is a true or an erroneous conception seems to me to have nothing to do with ‘religion’ in the large sense of that word so often misused. It seems to me to be a kind of mythology, and, I should have thought, could be of no special assist- ance to teachers of Christianity. Such theories of divided creative operations are traceable historically to polytheism. Lastly, with reference to Lord Kelvin’s statement that ‘‘modern biologists are coming once more to a firm acceptance of something—and that is ‘a vital prin- ciple.’ ’’ I will not venture to doubt that Lord Kelvin has such persons among his acquaintance. On the other hand, I feel some confidence in stating that a more ex- tensive acquaintance with modern biolo- gists would have led Lord Kelvin to per- ceive that those whom he cites are but a trifling percentage of the whole. I do not myself know of any one of admitted leader- ship among modern biologists who is show- ing signs of ‘coming to a belief in the existence of a vital principle.’ Biologists were, not many years ago, so terribly hampered by these hypothetical entities—‘vitality,’ ‘vital spirits,’ ‘anima animans,’ ‘archetypes,’ ‘vis medicatrix,’ ‘providential artifice,’ and others which I ean not now enumerate—that they are very shy of setting any of them up again. SCIENCE. 145 Physicists, on the other hand, seem to have got on very well with their problematic entities, their ‘atoms’ and ‘ether,’ and ‘the sorting demon of Maxwell.’ Hence, per- haps, Lord Kelvin offers to us, with a light heart, the hypothesis of ‘a vital principle’ to smooth over some of our admitted diffi- culties. On the other hand, we biologists, _ knowing the paralyzing influence of such hypotheses in the past, are as unwilling to have anything to do with ‘a vital prin- ciple,’ even though Lord Kelvin errone- ously thinks we are coming to it, as we are to accept other strange ‘entities’ pressed upon us by other physicists of a modern and singularly adventurous type. Modern biologists (I am glad to be able to affirm) do not accept the hypothesis of ‘telepathy’ advocated by Sir Oliver Lodge, nor, that of the intrusions of disembodied spirits pressed upon them by others of the same school. We biologists take no stock in these mys- terious entities. We think it a more hope- ful method to be patient and to seek by observation of, and experiment with, the phenomena of growth and development to trace the evolution of life and of living things without the facile and sterile hy- pothesis of ‘a vital principle.’ Similarly, we seek by the study of cerebral disease to trace the genesis of the phenomena which are supposed by some physicists who have strayed into biological fields to justify them in announcing the ‘discovery’ of ‘telepathy’ and a belief in ghosts. Yours faithfully, E. Ray LANKESTER. Lonpon, May 15, 1903. I felt sure that I could not keep out of this interesting correspondence much longer, but I will try to be brief; and in congratulating Professor Ray Lankester on his admirable letter I should like to explain that the adjective ‘fortuitous’ as employed 146 by Lord Kelvin was evidently not selected by him as specially appropriate or illum- inating, but merely used as part of a well- known phrase or quotation. It is clear that what our chief meant was that the formation of a crystal, and such like, pro- ceeded in accordance with the unsupple- mented laws of ordinary mechanics; where- as the formation of an animal or plant seemed controlled by something additional —viz., the presence of a guiding principle or life-germ, the nature of which neither I nor any other physicist in the least un- derstands. I shall be surprised if biol- ogists claim that they really understand it either. It is true that Lord Kelvin employed the popular phrase ‘creative power’—a phrase I should not myself use, because I am unable to define it—and in other re- spects his wording was more appropriate to a speech than to a philosophie essay, but nevertheless his speech as reported had all the usual subjective interest attaching to the freely-spoken personal convictions of a ereat man, attaimed as the outcome of a lifelong study of various aspects of nature. As to the little parting shot at me about ‘telepathy,’ it is true that I regard it as a recently discovered fact, opening a new and obseure chapter in science; it is also true that Lord Kelvin, Professor Ray Lan- kester and nearly all biologists disagree contemptuously with this opinion. Well, we shall see. Die Zeit ist wnendlich lang. Yours faithfully, : OuiveR LopGE. THE UNIVERSITY OF BIRMINGHAM, May 19, 1903. SCIENTIFIC BOOKS. Reports of the Princeton University Hapedi- tions to Patagonia, 1896-1899; I—Narra- tive and Geography. By J. B. Hatcuer. Princeton, The University. 1903. Ato. ‘Pp. xvi-+ 314; plates and map. From the rather meager remains of verte- SCIENCE. ([N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 448. brates collected on the renowned voyage of the Beagle and turned over to Richard Owen by Darwin for study, paleontologists were first made aware of what has proved to be prac- tically a new world of animal life which, though for the most part now extinct, was, within times geologically recent, extremely rich. The novelty and wealth of this extinct fauna were fairly indicated by the discoveries of Fitzroy and Darwin, but the interest then aroused went little further until about 1887, when Sefior Carlos Ameghino accompanied an expedition to southern Patagonia and began that series of discoveries which has since made him, and his brother Florentino, famous. The new world brought to light by them was totally unlike anything previously known among vertebrate faunas either living or fossil, and aroused the interest of paleon- tologists, geologists and zoologists everywhere. Incidentally to the work of describing and classifying these remarkable remains certain hypotheses were advanced by the brothers Ameghino which concerned the relations of these fossil animals to those of the northern hemisphere, and the age assigned to the strata in which the fossils were found. These hy- potheses were not generally accepted, and for some time it has been regarded as most de- sirable that an examination of the geology should be made by experts trained in other fields. This it was thought would harmonize the conditions revealed by observation in Patagonia with the results of expert work elsewhere, and clear up the confusion which seemed to have arisen in regard to the age and succession of the Patagonian strata. It was for this purpose that Mr. Hatcher organized and carried out the explorations described in this volume, while he was curator of vertebrate paleontology for the university. Their primary object was to make observa- tions and collections bearing on the geology and paleontology of the region, while such attention as circumstances allowed was from time to time directed to other branches of natural history. The cordial and effective cooperation of Professor W. B. Scott, head of the department of geology and paleontology, JULY 31, 1903.] was accorded to Mr. Hatcher, and substantial financial aid was extended by friends and alumni of the university. The publication of the results in the sumptuous and elegant form in which they appear is made possible through the generosity of Mr. J. Pierpont Morgan; while acknowledgments are also due to South American officials, as well as to Dr. Florentino Ameghino and other naturalists of the region under consideration. From March, 1896, to July, 1897, and from December, 1898, to September, 1899, Mr. Hatcher was in the field assisted by Mr. O. A. Peterson, and during the year following November, 1897, by Mr. A. E. Colburn. Much of the work was done on horseback, with a light wagon for transporting supplies and col- lections. The character of the Patagonian plains is such as rendered this method prac- ticable even if frequently difficult. About half the total area of the region consists of vast terraced plains intersected by river cafions and of a subarid character, which, in the central portion, have been overflowed by lava beds covering hundreds of square miles. To the westward, out of a very mountainous region, rises the Andean range, cut here and there by rivers which rise in lakes on its eastern side. At the base of the Andean mountains the Patagonian plains have an altitude of 3,000 feet, and slope very gently to the eastward. About fifty miles from the Atlantic coast they descend more rapidly by a series of terraces or escarpments which face to the eastward. The lowest of these has an average altitude of 350 feet and terminates in abrupt cliffs which, for a thousand miles, constitute the margin of the land, except for a narrow beach at the base, which, at high water, is covered by the sea or drenched with the spray of a perpetual and tremendous surf. Seanty grasses with stunted shrubbery in occasional patches are characteristic of these vast and silent stretches, redolent of a loneli- ness which grips the imagination. In the narrow cafions, or by the rivers in broad valleys of erosion, the traveler may come upon green spaces where the vegetation SCIENCE. 147 breaks into a joyous luxuriance, where birds abound, and deer and other animals meet man with fearless curiosity. Here the eye may search in vain for a limit to a basaltic desert extending in flat and stern monotony for leagues beyond the visible horizon. There some broad salt pan with deceptive mirage mimics the prehistoric lake of which it forms the dregs. At times wrapped in gloomy fogs or swept by tempests of incredible violence; fronting the towering Atlantic surges with unshaken cliffs and serrate talus, looking out to shifting bars of sand, the terror of the navigator; a vast cemetery for ghostly herds upon the like of which alive no man has ever gazed; it is a strange, silent, bitter, lonely land. How our author went out into it, what he met, and how he fared, are told in modest yet most interesting fashion in this stately quarto. His story is so interesting and the unpreten- tious courage of the narrator so evident, the spirit of the land and its mysterious fascina- tion so fully expressed, that few will close the book without a regret that it can not reach a wider audience. It is really too good to be reserved for the readers of quartos. The volume is so full of scientific meat that it is difficult to make a satisfactory abstract, and impossible to condense it within the limits of such a review as this. There is something for every taste. The life of bird and beast; the phases and contrasts of vegetation; the life of the Tehuelche Indians and the waifs who have cast civilization aside like a gar- ment, at the call of the wild; the topography and geology; and mingled with it all a flavor of real North American character to which something in each reader’s soul will leap with sympathy and admiration. It is pleasant to add that the adventurous undertaking proved a success, and its hardy leader may be congratulated, not only on the accomplishment of his project, the clearing up of geologic doubt and the gathering of long-buried scientific treasure, but also on the way he has told the story and the attractive manner in which it is illustrated and pub- lished. W. H. Dat. 148 SOIENTIFIC JOURNALS AND ARTICLES. Tur June number of the Botanical Gazette contains a monograph of the genus * Crategus in northeastern Illinois,’ by Professor C. 8. Sargent. In it are described nineteen new species of Crategus. The monograph is based chiefly upon the very thorough and extended collections of the Crategi in this region by the Rey. E. J. Hill. Professor F. L. Stevens and Mrs. Stevens discuss the ‘ Mitosis of the pri- mary nucleus of Synchytrium decipiens.’ The process is of peculiar interest because of the exceptionally large size of the nucleus, its peculiarly rapid growth and its subsequent division. Dangeard and Rosén have declared the division of the primary nucleus in another species to be direct. The principal point of the present paper is to show that in the species studied by the authors the division is not direct, but mitotic. The authors hope that a fuller knowledge of the cytological peculiar- ities of the Chytridiales will lead to a more satisfactory knowledge of their nature and relationships. Professor J. Y. Bergen con- eludes his account of ‘The macchie of the Neapolitan coast region,’ in which he dis- cusses particularly the adaptation of the plants constituting these xerophytic forma- tions to their environment. An extended bibliography will be of particular service to ecological students of the Mediterranean re- gion. Mr. Fred K. Butters describes and illustrates a new species of Tuber, T. Lyonv, discovered by Harold L. Lyon near Minne- apolis, Minnesota. The fungi were collected in mature condition in the early spring, shortly after the melting of the snow and thawing of the soil. Mr. F. A. F. C. Went, of the University of Utrecht, announces the opening of a new botanical research laboratory in the tropics at Paramaribo. This labora- tory will contain a room of adequate size where foreign naturalists will have opportu- nity for research work. Four new species of Crategus and one of Amelanchier are de- seribed by Mr. W. W. Ashe, of Raleigh, N. C. Reviews of new books and current literature complete ‘the number. SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. XVIII. No. 448. SOCIETIES AND ACADEMIES. ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF WASHINGTON. THE closing meeting of the season was held May 26. The president spoke of a theory recently advanced that man could draw before he could speak, and characterized the thought . as very naive. The secretary communicated an account of the recent finding of the tomb of Thothmes IV. at Thebes. The paper of the evening by Dr. J. Walter Fewkes on ‘Antiquities of Santo Domingo’ gave an ac- count of a visit to that island for the purpose of securing archeological specimens for the U. S. National Museum. Doctor Fewkes ex- hibited on the screen early and recent maps of the island, views of the city of Santo Domingo, its churches, markets, statues, etc., and gave many bits of interesting history connected with them. A number of views of the remarkable stone implements, pottery and wood carving found on the island were thrown on the sereen. ‘These consist of carved pestles, axes, etc., bowls of pottery with modeled orna- mentation, carved seats, clubs, idols, ete., of wood. ‘The caves of the island were described and Doctor Fewkes closed with a discussion of the state of our present knowledge of the Carib and Arawak invasion of the West In- dies, and expressed a belief that these migrants were from South America, since the fauna and flora of the islands were strictly South American. The discussion of the paper was participated in by Mr. McGuire, Doctor Fewkes, Professor McGee, Doctor Lamb and Doctor Baum. Doctor Fewkes’ results will be published in a forthcoming number of the American An- thropologist. Water Houes, Secretary. DISCUSSION AND CORRESPONDENCE. INDIAN POTTERY. To THe Eprror or Science: Recently when coming down the Sevier River in Utah I found some fragments of coarse pottery about fifteen miles north of Panguitch. As I do not remember to have heard of pottery in that locality before, this find may be worth noting. The fragments were lying in sand \ a Jury 31, 1903.] beside a sagebush near the traveled road. I could not stop for any careful examination at the time. I saw no indication of there ever having been a house, village or camp at the spot. The fragments are about one fourth inch thick and appear to be parts of two ves- sels, though they may belong to one. The ware is the usual coil-made variety without decoration or color. The pressure marks on the outside of the vessel were roughly smoothed over but not obliterated. The natural color is brownish on the outside—gray to blackish within. The firing had been done from the inside. This is shown by the blackened sur- face of the interior and also by the ware hay- ing been more burned inside than out, the heavy burning extending to between one eighth and one sixteenth inch of the outer surface. This characteristic of inside firing I have noted in other ware from the region north of the Colorado River. In this connection I may say that the remains of dwellings and the fragments of pottery are exceedingly nu- merous north of the Colorado River as far as the southern Rim of the Basin, and westerly as far as the Beaver Dam Mountains. LEast- erly they follow up Green River and its trib- utaries at least as far as latitude 40. The northwesterly limit has not been determined or even approximated as yet. I believe some remains have been found near Parowan but I was unable to authenticate information at this locality. On the Escalante Desert I found no indications as we crossed toward the Pine Valley Mountains, nor could any one I saw tell me of any. It is, nevertheless, possible that there are both pottery and habitation re- mains there near springs, and it would be desirable to have the region carefully ex- amined. On Bright Angel Point, south end of the Kaibab Plateau, I found remains of several very small houses near the brink of the canyon. Some fragments of primitive pot- tery were lying around and there were two good specimens of the primitive grinding stone—that is, the kind that are hollowed out. These were of red sandstone. The house walls were very slight, the best preserved being about SCIENCE. 149 8 x 22 feet, with a dividing wall in the middle. This was within twenty feet of the edge of the canyon. The stones were roughly dressed in the usual fashion and were so few appar- ently that the walls must have been very low. I did not have time to dig, but the soil seemed thin. It is possible that there was a trail down to the Colorado from this promontory. Down below there are remains of other houses and grinding stones of a similar type, which I saw many years ago. There appears to have been less decorated pottery north of the Colorado River than south, and this might be taken as an indica- tion of a more primitive condition of the art in that region. The potsherds around most of the village sites are apt to be without decoration entirely, or only slightly -deco- rated. Most of the whole specimens found along the valley of the Virgen are undecorated, and are either corrugated or roughly smoothed without the addition of a slip or of lines in color. The shapes are sometimes good, par- ticularly from the Santa Clara district, where some beautiful examples of red ware have been found. The finding of the ruder forms of pottery in a locality may not imply the occupation of that locality by Amerinds of the stone-house-building type for tent dwellers have made rude pottery and the modeling of occasional pots and firing them from the inside seems to have been understood by many tribes of Amerinds south of the Columbia River. F. S. DELLENBAUGH. Cracsmoor, N. Y., July 6, 1903. SHORTER ARTICLES. THE RELATION OF LIME AND MAGNESIA TO METABOLISM. In a previous communication to this journal (Vol. XIV. (1901), p. 31) the writer discussed some work carried out with Dr. Oscar Loew on the relation of lime and magnesia to plant growth, the results forming the matter of Bul- letin 1, Bureau of Plant Industry, U. S. Dept. of Agriculture. Since coming to this station further studies have been made by the writer 150 in the investigation of the relation of these elements to animal production. Many analyses show that the percentage composition of plants grown on different soils varies quite noticeably. From Wolff’s tables of analyses, for example, the caleium oxide in maize varies from 0.6 to 3.8 per cent., and in meadow hay from 6.0 to 40.1 per cent. of the ash. Wunder found (Landw. Vers. Stat. 4 (1862), p. 264) that turnips grown in a clay soil rich in lime contained 9.28 per cent. of lime in the ash, while those grown in a sandy soil poor in lime contained only 5.47 per cent. Emmerling and Wagner report (Centbl. Agr. Chem., 8 (1875), p. 333) that hay from a peaty meadow contained only 6.50 per cent. of lime in the ash, while that from a good marsh soil contained 9.83 per cent. of lime. It is a well-known fact that the greatest de- velopment in live stock has been attained in limestone regions. Opinions differ as to the reason for this, but it would appear that at least the chemical composition of the soil in- fluences the size and the strength of the bone of animals feeding upon the herbage grown thereon. A number of experiments go to proye that the strength and composition of the bones of our domestic animals may be modified by feeding. Notably, Henry found (Wisconsin Station Bul. 25) that the bones of pigs fed on corn with bone meal or hard- wood ashes in addition were double in strength of those of pigs getting corn alone, while the per cent. of ash in the bones of the former was 50 per cent. greater. The feeding of mineral matters to quick-maturing animals like pigs is now generally practised, and it can probably be wisely followed with animals of large size and of longer maturity in those regions where there is a deficiency of lime in the soil and a relatively small percentage in the plants. In our former work we found that there was a relation between the amounts of avail- able lime and magnesia in the soil for the most favorable growth of plants. Loew states with reference to plants (Bul. 1, Bureau of Plant Industry, p. 16) that lime is necessary for the formation of certain calcium com- SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 448. pounds of nucleo-proteids required in the or- ganized structure of nuclei and chlorophyl bodies, while magnesia serves for the assimila- tion of phosphoric acid, since magnesium phosphate gives up its phosphoric acid more readily than other phosphates of plant juices. In case of an excess of lime the assimilation of phosphoric acid will be retarded, because it will combine with the lime and thereby di- minish the formation of magnesium phos- phate. On the other hand, the presence of an excess of soluble magnesia will tend to the transformation of the calcium nucleo-proteids of the organized structures into magnesium compounds, thereby causing a disturbance that may prove fatal. In the animal structure lime is very neces- sary in the formation of bone, and its presence in the blood and tissues of the body indicates the need of it in other organs. Boehm states (Ber. Akad. d. Wissensch., Wien, 1875): “In order to form the cell wall from starch and sugar lime is just as important as for the formation of the bone. The lime forms the skeleton of the cell wall.” Again, lime salts have great effect upon the action of the heart, as repeated results have demonstrated. Lime also plays an important part in the division of cells. Herbst states (Arch. f. Entwick- lungsmechanik, Vol. V., p. 667) that the most important salt for the development of the sea urchin’s egg is calcium phosphate, and in its absence the completion of segmentation is impossible. In this, the blue grass region of Kentucky, the soil has been formed largely by the dis- integration of a limestone very rich in phos- phates. It is a region long noted for the beauty and quality of its live stock, especially the thoroughbred horse, an animal uniting the greatest speed with endurance. The studies here reported have been undertaken with the view of finding whether in even this favored section the quality of our animals may not be improved by the further addition of certain mineral elements to the food. So far experiments have been carried on with pigs to which varying amounts of lime and magnesia have been given in the feed, noting the rate JuLy 31, 1903.) of gain and the metabolism of the food given. From the results so far attained with thirty-five animals fed in series of five each, it would ap- pear that there is a definite relation between the amount of lime and magnesia that enters into the animal organism. In the case of added lime, especially with the calcium phosphate, there is an increase in the rate of gain with a reduction of the amount of food required per pound of increase. A very small addition of a magnesium salt also appears advantageous when fed with a lime compound, though the point of benefit is easily passed. Where the magnesium is given regularly in any excess the gain in weight is reduced to a minimum. Though the health of the animal may be ap- parently unaffected and the coat noticeably smooth and glossy, there is but little gain in weight from the food consumed. Another in- stance of the action of magnesia may be here noted. In fattening beef cattle for market they are fed large quantities of grain and oc- easionally become surfeited or, as it is termed, get ‘off feed’ for several days. By giving an animal in such cases magnesium sulphate it is quickly brought back to its regular ration. In human medicine calcined magnesia is given when the system has become overcharged with food as in some cases of dyspepsia and gout. As the concentrated feeds such as grains are rich in magnesia as compared with lime, while in the growing plant the opposite is true, it seems reasonable to suppose that magnesia operates favorably in the assimilation of food materials when present in the proper propor- tion, especially in heavy feeding. The results from the presence of lime and magnesia in the animal body in excessive amounts may be somewhat understood from their well-known physiological tendencies, i. e., the lime com- pounds are constipating, while the magnesium salts are laxative in their nature. From the effect of lime compounds in the animal body from both a medical and a die- tetie standpoint this element may be said to be constructive and fixative in its results. On the other hand, magnesia is more movable in its relation, serving to carry assimilable phos- -phoric acid, which it gives up readily and is SCIENCE. 151 thereby enabled to repeat the process many times. Therefore, a too small amount of magnesia is less detrimental than a deficiency of lime. If, however, with magnesia in ex- cess there is a tendency for the lime as the stronger base to unite with the acid of the magnesium salt and the magnesia to form magnesium nucleo-proteids, such a disturb- ance would result in the elimination of products rather than in a further constructive effort. In the physiological effect of an ex- cess of magnesia in the animal organism we find such a result indicated. D. W. May. KENTUCKY EXPERIMENT STATION. NOTES ON THE EVIDENCES OF HUMAN REMAINS FROM JACOBS’ CAVERN. By the courtesy of Dr. Charles Peabody, Director of the department of archeology, Phillips Academy, Andover, Mass., and of Professor Warren K. Moorehead, curator of this department, the writer was permitted during the month of May, 1903, to ex- amine and assist in excavating a cave in southwest Missouri, in which were found nu- merous evidences of human occupancy. The cave is located on the north bluff of Little Sugar Creek two and one half miles soyth- west of Pineville, the county seat of McDonald County, four miles from the Arkansas line and fourteen east of the Indian Territory line. In honor of the discoverer, Mr. E. H. Jacobs, an enthusiastic archeologist of Bentonville, Ark., the cave has been named Jacobs’ cavern. To each of these gentlemen are due my sincere thanks for many kindnesses extended during a week’s visit to their camp. The hills along Sugar Creek are composed of massive ledges of limestone containing a large amount of flint and chert, in the form either of regular layers or of nodular concre- tions. To this formation the name Boone chert has been applied by geologists. It is the rock that outcrops extensively in the southwest part of Missouri, the northeastern part of the Indian Territory and northern Arkansas. In the lower part of the Boone, flint is often absent and the rocks consist of massive gray limestone arranged in definite 152 layers. To this part of the formation the name St. Joe limestone has been applied. The St. Joe is sometimes sixty feet or more thick, and often weathers into characteristic pre- cipitous or overhanging bluffs extending for miles along the streams. Immediately beneath the St. Joe limestone is a mass of shales-sometimes attaining a thickness of fifty feet, known as the Eureka shales. These shales are usually black and papyraceous, weathering into thin flakes or tablets. Throughout the region thousands of springs issue from between the Eureka and the St. Joe. ; Jacobs’ cavern is located in the St. Joe limestone some forty feet above the level of Little Sugar Creek. The cave faces south- west, overlooking the narrow valley. The bluft above the cave continues to the height of one hundred and fifty feet or more, the upper part being composed of Boone chert. The cave is in fact but a rock shelter, irregularly V-shaped in outline, with floor, walls and roof of limestone. The flat top is composed of a single stratum of limestone, and stratification lines are well exhibited on the sides of the cave. Along the front the entire length of the rock shelter is approximately seventy feet; the extreme depth is fifty feet. Before removing any of the contents the height was from four to seven feet. The floor was covered, however, by two deposits, one of clay and one of ashes, aggregating six feet thick, so that the distance from the lime- stone floor to the limestone roof is approx- imately twelve feet. The rock floor was covered to the depth of three feet with clay, usually yellowish-brown in color, containing numerous fragments of limestone. This clay was probably formed by the disintegration of the limestone and so far as noticed has never been disturbed. On the clay was a layer of wood ashes ayerag- ing three feet in thickness. Throughout the greater part of the cave these ashes were so loose and dry that the men engaged in re- moving them were obliged to use sponges in order to avoid breathing the ashes. In fact several of the men were unable to continue SCIENCE. [N. 8. Vox. XVIII. No. 448, the work on this account. Mingled with the ashes and sometimes extending into the sub- jacent clay were slabs and blocks of limestone fallen from the roof. At the back of the cave there is a fissure extending upward to the height of ten feet or more, separating the roof of the cave from the rear wall. This fissure, which is probably a master joint in the limestone, is from eighteen inches to three feet wide and continues for some distance beyond the main part of the cave, where it divides into a lower and an upper part separated by a block of limestone. All along this fissure and also along part of the back of the cave beyond the point where the fissure extends, there are numerous stalactites, stalagmites and pilasters formed by water dripping from the roof. In places the entire fissure above the level of the roof is filled with this material. The continued dripping of water carrying CaCO, on the ashes covering the floor of the cave has formed a sort of stalagmitic ash breccia often enclosing flint flakes, implements.and bones. Im these sta- lagmites charcoal is often present. That this ash breccia was formed gradually and after the deposition of the ashes is proved by the peculiar toadstool-like shape of some of the pillars. It seems from the shape that ashes were first laid down, then the dripping of the water formed the brecciated mass, then other ashes were deposited, other breccia formed, then further deposits of ashes, and so on till the entire pillar was formed.’ The clay be- neath the ashes near the back part of the cave is in many places cemented by the action of lime forming a clay and limestone breccia. Scattered: about in the ashes and enclosed in the stalagmitic breccia at the back of the cave were found a number of objects which point to the fact that the cave has been oc- cupied by man.. These objects may be divided into eleven groups, of which seven may be considered as witnessing to human occupancy, and four may or may not bear such testimony. The objects are as follows: A. Objects witnessing to the human oc- cupanecy of Jacobs’ cavern: (1) Human bones, (2) pottery, (3) flint implements, (4) stone Juxy 31, 1903.) implements, (5) bone implements, (6) clam shells, (7) ashes and charcoal. B. Objects which do not certainly bear testi- mony to human oceupancy: (8) Flint flakes, (9) animal bones, (10) sandstone fragments, (11) polished rocks. Tt will be obviously impossible in a paper of this kind to do more than simply mention these objects. All detailed study must be reserved for those more skilled in the dis- cussion of such data. Human Bones.—Fragments of at least four human skeletons were discovered in the ashes. One of these skeletons, including a skull in a good state of preservation, was nearly com- plete. Pottery.—Fragments of at least six vessels were found, including one handle. Several of the fragments were decorated. Flint Implements.—Chipped flint imple- ments are quite common, more than one hun- dred specimens having been found. These implements include arrow points, drills, spear points, knives, scrapers, ete., as well as cores from which knives were obtained. The flint is in most cases similar to that found on the hills near by, but in some eases it is believed to have been carried for considerable distances. Stone Implements.—One large stone mortar was found, as well as hammer stones, a stone hatchet and stones used for sharpening im- plements. Bone Implements.—Several awls, needles, serapers and other implements fashioned from bone were secured. Clam Shells—A number of shells of Unio were taken from the ashes. At least two genera are represented, both probably being found at the present time in Sugar Creek. Ashes and Charcoal—aAs stated above, the floor of the cave was covered to the depth of some three feet with wood ashes. A conserva- tive estimate would place the amount of ashes at 5,000 cubie feet. Intermingled with the ashes was a large amount of charcoal varying in size from small specks to lumps the size of a walnut. It was in the ashes that the other objects mentioned in this paper were found. a SCIENCE. 153 Flint Flakes—Thousands of flakes of flint were found in the ashes and embedded in the stalagmites. This flint varies in size from small slivers to pieces the size of the hand. Careful search was made along the walls and roof of the cave to detect the presence of flint in the limestone, but without suecess. There is plenty of flint at a horizon fifty fect higher, but so far as known there is none in the strata in which the cave is located. For this reason it is believed that the flint was carried into the cave. Animal Bones.—Great numbers of bones of various animals, including mammals, birds and turtles, were found among the ashes and em- bedded in the stalagmites. These bones have not yet been identified but it is probable that a large part of them are those of living species. Sandstone Fragments.—A number of small pieces of unshaped sandstone were obtained. The nearest point, so far as known, where sandstone outcrops is four miles distant from the cave, in the vicinity of White Rock. It seems probable that the sandstone has been carried into the cave. Polished Limestone.—A number of flat lime- stone slabs that have fallen from above, both just within the cave’s mouth and particularly along the foot of the bluff a few feet distant, have been polished or glazed apparently by the friction or contact of greasy bodies. These polished rocks are invariably in such a posi- tion as most readily to serve as seats or re- clining places for the inhabitants of the cave. There are more than twenty of these slabs that exhibit this peculiar structure. Cuartes Newton Goutp. Tue UNIVERSITY OF OKLAHOMA, May 16, 1903. NEW TERMS IN CHEMISTRY. Ir may not be out of place to call attention to several new terms which have recently been submitted to the English-speaking scientific world and to diseuss their merits. However reluctant we may be, in view of possible mis- understandings, to accept new words and phrases, the need of them is often unquestion- able, and it only remains for us to determine the proper forms which the words shall take. 154 The discoverer of a new idea can with com- parative ease decide how it shall be expressed in his own language, but when the new word or phrase is translated into another language and there is no one to dictate its form, con- fusion is very liable to result. The following terms appear to be slowly ereeping in from the German in one dress or another, and, whatever forms the words may have, already assumed in English, it may safely be said that the writers and translators who have used them are more desirous that there should be correctness and uniformity than that personal preferences should prevail. Mol, or mole Gram-molecule’ has become so common a word that a contraction of it seems desirable. Ostwald (in German) took the familiar abbreviation of Molekiil, or Molekel, viz., Mol., dropped the period and made it an independent word as a substitute for Grammmolekil. The term has already . appeared as ‘mol’ in at least four English texts (three American and one British); Ost- wald’s translator, however, renders it ‘ mole.’ The choice between the two words may be- come easier after a consideration of their merits. ‘Mol’ has (1) the same spelling as the German original; (2) it is a new word and does not already have several meanings, as does ‘mole. On the other hand, it may be said for ‘mole’ that (1) it is pronounced like the German original and (2) is its proper and euphonious English equivalent, especially if it is premised that the word is actually of Latin derivation (from moles) and that there is no necessity of conforming precisely to the German spelling. Further, (8) ‘mol,’ if spelled as pronounced, would be ‘moll.’ More- over, (4) ‘mol’ is easily confused with ‘ mol.,’ the common abbreviation of ‘molecule’ In- asmuch (5) as ‘molecule’ is a diminutive of moles, or ‘mole,’ the latter term might very properly be used for ‘gram-molecule.’ (6) The counter-argument that ‘mole’ is already in the dictionary with four or five meanings may be discounted by those who regard the addition of one to five as of no great conse- quence. In the light of the above arguments ‘mole’ seems to have the advantage, though SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 448. neither word is entirely satisfactory. Per- haps ‘ grammole’ would be better than either; it has almost every qualification except ex- treme brevity. Molar—We undoubtedly need a word to characterize a solution standardized on a molecular basis (instead of on the usual an- alytically equivalent basis) and ‘ gram-molec- ular,’ as well as ‘ molecular-equivalent,’ is too long. ‘Molar’ sounds well. The principal objection to it is that it already has a mean- ing in physical science ‘opposed to molecular’! If ‘molar’ is to become the contraction of “eram-molecular,’ ‘mole’ would be the anal- ogous contraction of ‘ gram-molecule.’ Metal-ammonia compounds. It is rather difficult for the beginner to understand the German terminology of these interesting com- pounds, but the English texts, because of lack of uniformity, make the case almost hopeless. One popular text misleads us at the start by calling them ‘metallammonium compounds.’ English investigators in this field would do well to aid us in securing uniformity. Hydroperoxide.—An abbreviation of ‘hy- drogen peroxide. That Hydroperoryd has much advantage over Wasserstoffsuperoxyd is readily seen, but just why we should drop three letters from ‘ hydrogen peroxide’ is not so clear. It should be borne in mind that the per in ‘hydrogen peroxide’ is derived from an unreliable nomenclature. In view of the possibility of the existence of a still higher oxide of hydrogen, either (HO) or HO,,, ‘hydrogen dioxide’ seems to be the only safe name for the compound H,0O.,. Activate-—There is probably little objection to the revival of this practically obsolete word to express an effect on a substance by which it is rendered more active chemically. H. C. Coopsr. Syracuse UNIVERSITY. CURRENT NOTES ON METEOROLOGY. CLIMATE AND CROPS IN THE ARGENTINE REPUBLIC. ‘Tur Economic Geography of the Argen- tine Republic’ is discussed by J. Russell Smith in the Bulletin of the American Geo- graphical Society for April (pp. 130-148), Jury 31, 1903.] especial emphasis being laid on the relation of the staple products of the soil to climatic conditions. Argentina is not unlike the re- gion between the Missouri and Mississippi river systems and the watershed of the Rocky mountains. The rainfall decreases towards the interior in*both regions, with a correspond- ing change in vegetation. Argentina essen- tially duplicates the United States in having in the northeast a rainy forest belt; then a eorn belt and a wheat belt; then a wide stretch of semi-arid and arid plain, and at the base of the Andes, agricultural settlements depending upon irrigation supplied by water from the Andean snowfields. In the north, with heavy rainfall, dense tropical forests are found. Cattle extend north even into the dis- trict of heavy rainfall in the northeastern territories, while horses do not thrive in a rainfall of more than fifty-five inches in the Argentine, and sheep are found south of the isohyetal line of forty inches. Being able to endure cold and hunger, sheep succeed as far south as the southern shores of Patagonia, and even of Tierra del Fuego. The north, west and south, because of excess or deficiency or unfavorable distribution, of rainfall, are not adapted for wheat, the wheat district be- ing a rough parallelogram in the eastern cen- tral part of the country. Corn, owing to its requirement of summer rains and its ability to withstand higher relative humidity, finds fay- orable conditions in the eastern part of the wheat region, and in the more humid north- east. In the valleys of western Argentina, where water is available for irrigation, crops are grown more independently of rainfall. KITE-FLYING IN SCOTLAND AND THE CYCLONE THEORY. Unoper the auspices of the Royal Meteorolog- ical Society, for seven weeks during the summer of 1902 kites were flown with great regularity from a tug off the west coast of Scotland. The suggestion of flying kites in this way came originally, it will be remem- bered, from Mr. A. Lawrence Rotch, of Blue Hill Observatory. Mr. W. H. Dines, in a brief account of the work (Nature, June 18), states that, although the evidence from the q SCIENCE. 155 summer’s work was not sufficient to be con- clusive, so far as it went it tended to show that as a cyclone approaches the decrease of temperature with altitude becomes less. Every eyclone that passed while the kite-flying was in progress showed this condition. This ‘leads to the conclusion,’ says Mr. Dines, ‘ that the upper air in the neighborhood of a cyclone is relatively warm, and that the cyclones are convectional effects.’ And thus we have an- other contribution to the cyclonic theory dis- cussion, which has of late somewhat flagged. CARBON DIOXIDE IN LONDON RAILWAY CARRIAGES. THE examination of the air in the carriages and stations of the Central London Railway, earried out by Drs. Clowes and Andrewes (Nature, Vol. 68, p. 591) showed in the car- riages a maximum amount of carbon dioxide : of 14.7 volumes, and a minimum amount of 9.6 volumes, in 10,000 volumes of air. In an elevator, on one occasion, 15.2 volumes of CO, were found in 10,000 volumes of air. Dr. Clowes is of opinion that standard air at any point on the railway should not contain more than eight volumes of CO, in 10,000 of air. R. DeC. Warp. RADIUM AND CANCER. WE are permitted to print the following letters: Bappeck, N. §S., July 21, 1903. Dr. Z. T. Sowers, 1707 Massachusetts Avenue, Washington, D. C. Dear Dr. Sowers: I understand from you that the Roentgen X-Rays, and the rays emitted by radium, have been found to have a marked curative effect upon external cancers, but that the effects upon deep seated cancers have not thus far proved satisfac- tory. It has occurred to me that one reason for the unsatisfactory nature of these latter experiments arises from the fact that the rays have been applied externally, thus having to pass through healthy tissues of various depths in order to reach the cancerous matter. The Crookes tube from which the Roentgen rays are emitted is of course too bulky to be admitted into the middle of a mass of cancer, but there is no reason why a tiny fragment of radium 156 sealed up in a fine glass tube should not be in- serted into the very heart of the cancer, thus acting directly upon the diseased material. Would it not be worth while making experiments along this line? Yours sincerely, (Signed) ALEXANDER GRAHAM BELL. Bavpeck, N. S., July 21, 1903. Dr. A: GRAHAM BELL, Baddeck, N. 8S. Dear Dr. Bell: The suggestion which you make in regard to the application of the radium rays to the sub- stance of deep seated cancer I regard as very valu- able. If such experiments should be made, I have no doubt they would prove successful in many cases where we now have failures. Yours sincerely, (Signed) Z. T. Sowers. THE RHODES SCHOLARSHIPS. Tue trustees of the will of the late C. J. Rhodes have prepared a memorandum for the information of college authorities and intend- ing candidates for scholarships in the United States, which states that the first election of scholars in the United States will be made between February and May, 1904. The elected scholars will commence residence in October, 1904. A qualifying examination will be held within this period in each state and territory, or at centers which can be easily reached. This examination is not competi- tive, but is intended to give assurance that all candidates are fully qualified to enter on a course of study at Oxford University. It will, therefore, be based on the requirements for responsions—the first public examination exacted by the university from each candidate for a degree. The Rhodes scholars will be selected from candidates who have successfully passed this examination. One scholar will be chosen for each state and territory to which scholarships are assigned. The committees and the universities making appointments will be furnished with a state- ment of the qualifications which Mr. Rhodes desired in the holders of his scholarships, and they will be asked in exercising their right of selection to comply as nearly as circumstances will permit with the spirit of the testator’s SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. XVIIT. No. 448. wishes. They will also be asked to furnish to the trustees as full a statement as possible of. the school and college career of each elected scholar, with the special grounds of his ap- pointment, together with suggestions, if de- sired, as to the course of study for which he is best fitted. It has been decided that all scholars shall have reached at least the end of their sopho- more, or second year work at some recognized degree-granting university or college of the United States. Scholars must be unmarried, must be citizens of the United States, and must be between nineteen and twenty-five years of age. Where several candidates pre- sent themselves from a single college or uni- versity, the committees of selection will re- quest the faculty of the college to decide between their claims on the basis of Mr. Rhodes’s suggestions, and present to the com- mittee the name of the candidate chosen by that college as its representative in the final election. The president of the state university or college is in each of the following states chair- man of the committee of selection for that state: Alabama, Arizona, Arkansas, California, Colo- rado, Florida, Georgia, Idaho, Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Louisiana, Michigan, Minnesota, Missis- sippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New Mexico, North Carolina, North Dakota, Ohio, Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, South Carolina, South Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Virginia, West Virginia, Wisconsin, Wyoming. The following chairmen have been named for other states: Connecticut, President Arthur T. Hadley, LL.D., Yale University. Tllinois, President W. R. Harper, Ph.D., D.D., University of Chicago. Kentucky, President D. B. Gray, D.D., George- town College. Maryland, President Ira Remsen, LL.D., Johns Hopkins University. Massachusetts, President Charles W. LL.D., Harvard University. New Jersey, President Woodrow Wilson, LL.D., Princeton University. New York State, President Nicholas Murray, Butler, LL.D., Columbia University. Eliot, Jury 31, 1903.) Rhode Island, President W. H. P. Faunce, D.D., Brown University. In the following states appointments will be made by the chartered colleges and universi- ties in rotation: California, University of California, Stanford University, smaller colleges seventh year. Maine (the order of rotation yet to be fixed). Vermont, University of Vermont, Middlebury College. Washington (the order of rotation yet to be fixed). ; SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS. Dr. THEeopaLp SmirH, professor of compara- tive pathology at Harvard University, has gone abroad, with a special view to studying the preparation of vaccine virus, which will here- after be made at the Bussey Institute, of which Dr. Smith is director, under the au- spices of the state of Massachusetts. Proressor Francis H. Herrick, of Western Reserve University, has been granted leave of absence for the ensuing year. From August 1, 1903, he will be engaged in scientific study in Europe, and may be addressed at Elmhurst, Bushey Grove, Watford, Herts, England. Dr. C. W. Prentiss, of Harvard and recently of the University of Strasburg, Germany, and Mr. Carl B. Tames, formerly an assistant in the biological laboratory, have been made in- structors in biology in Western Reserve Uni- versity, and will have charge of Professor Herrick’s work. Leland every Dr. Cartson has been appointed a research assistant by the Carnegie Institution for the coming year and will carry on his work in connection with the Physiological Laboratory of Stanford University and with its Seaside Laboratory on Monterey Bay. The subject of his investigations is ‘The Mechanism of In- hibition of the Heart in Invertebrates.’ Mr. Cuartes J. Branp, who for the past year has been assistant in plant economics at the Field Columbian Museum of Chicago, has been promoted to the position of assistant curator, Department of Botany, in that in- stitution. Mr. Brand is a graduate of the University of Minnesota and secured his SCIENCE. 157 botanical training under Professor Conway Mae Millan. Dr. M. P. Ravenet, of the University of Pennsylvania, has returned from: Europe, where he has been making a special study of tuberculosis. Tue daily papers report that Dr. H. C. Parker, of Columbia University, and Dr. C. E. Fay, of Tufts College, now engaged in explorations in the northern Rocky Moun- tains, have ascended Mt. Hungabee, the height of which was found to be 11,500 feet, and Mt. Goodsir, the height of which was found to be nearly 12,000 feet. Dr. G. C. Martin has sailed from Seattle for the Kayak Island to investigate the oil fields for the Geological Survey. Mr. Cuartes W. Wricut has left Washing- ton to make, for the Geological Survey, an examination of the placer gold region known as the Porcupine district. This district lies close to the international boundary, a little south of west of Skagway and about twenty miles from tide water at Lynn Canal. Mr. G. Marcon is expected to arrive in America about the middle of August. Proressor H. M. Savitte is spending the month of July in Mexico on behalf of the American Museum of Natural History. | 3 a Saree | Bes as | ee ies a BS ss SS (Sex| S8e 8s qq (8,5) 2s BS |226| boc |R |Se—| fa Sie aes ak ie = 2 Pas aera gc Ee aR EI al ears 14-20/ 1,345] 1,340 1,404 | 1,413} ....... eres 20-30 | 1,350) 1,396 1,416 | 1,394] 1,434 | 1,475 30-40) 1,374] 1,365 1,391 | 1,358) 1,412 | 1,467 40-50 1,391] 1,366 1,403 | 1,345} 1,388 | 1,423 50-60) 1,389] 1,375 1,370 | 1,347) 1,392 | 1,445 60-70 | 1,381] 1,323 1,370 | 1,267) 1,349 | 1,419 70-80 | 1,333 (| 1,284 | | 1,367 80 and 1,279 | } 1,324 | + 1,340, | over. | 1,342 U 1,289 1,442 for} a x o In order to better understand the distribu- tion of these brain-weights as compared with those of Kuropeans, the writer has employed Taguchi’s figures in the preparation of the accompanying chart (Fig. 1). The distribu- tion of the (374) male Japanese brain-weights (continuous line) is seen to correspond fairly well with that of (1,012) male German brain- weights (broken line) of the Bischoff-Mar- chand* series. The comparison can be fairly made, since the weighings were made accord- ing to similar methods in both series. Taguchi has no records of the weight of the brain in the new-born, but has 156 brain- weights of children ranging from two months to fourteen years of age. Comparing these with * See the writer’s review of Marchand’s ‘ Ueber das Hirngewicht des Menschen,’ Science, N. S., Vol. XVII., 1903, p. 345. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. XVIII. No. 455. similar records of European children (Pfister, Mies, Marchand), it is evident that the growth of the Japanese brain is slower. The brain of the Japanese boy between nine and four- teen years of age weighs about 1,235 ems., while that of the European of the same age weighs 1,300-1,350 ems. Among adults there is a gradual increase up to the fifth decade. Table I. shows the weight of the brain in the various decades in comparison with those of Germans (Bischoff and Marchand), Swedes (Retzius), Czechs (Matiegka) and Russians (Giltschenko). The maximum is attained in the fifth decade among the Japanese males; in the female series two maxima occur, one in the third, the other in the sixth decade. The necessity of obtaining still more extensive statistics is, therefore, apparent. The relation between brain-weight and stature is as positive as is observed in the European series. The Japanese are a people of small stature, however, and this fact lends interest to the question of relative brain- weight. It is a little dificult to institute very satisfactory comparisons with the Euro- pean records since Taguchi’s methods of tabu- lation are different from those generally em- ployed. The following table may help the reader to interpret the relations of brain- weight and stature among Europeans (Ger- mans, Russians and Czechs) and in the Japanese series. TaBie II. Males. ——_ —— oy = = ay sei = Japanese. | = 5A Pes ______|Stature S&S | SS) | Bo ee Stature. | (226.) | S FS | | 3 ‘tnd =o 1, P | 138-148 |1,324 1145-150)... 1,307 148-158 aye 151-160 1,360 | 1,339 ss omy | aD I a eas feel 158-168 |1,380 | 121% {1,888 {| Paes | | 171-180 ) | 1,389 | /180 and ; 1,404 r |__| over. |} 11,375 1,496 *In the original this figure is given as 1.535 gms. This is manifestly a typographical error; it should be 1.335 or 1.355 imstead. The latter figure is more likely to be correct. SEPTEMBER 18, 1903.] Another mode of interpreting these results is to caleulate the number of grams of brain- weight per centimeter of stature (Table III.). This shows that the relative brain-weight is about the same in the races mentioned and only in the very small Japanese individuals is the ratio high. The small stature of these people is therefore more characteristic of the race than is the absolute brain-weight. TABLE ILI. Males. Grams per Centimeter of Stature. Russians. Czechs. Japanese. Germans. Less __ Bischoff. ea bea reget Matiegka. Taguchi. than = ae ; > —T 150 em. | | 9.3 150 8.7 9.2 155 8.6 9.0 8.7 160 8.3 8.4 165 8.1 8.2 8.4 8.6 8.5 170 7.9 7.9 175 7.6 7.8 fe!) 3.3 180 7.8 185 8.1 190 Tiel 7.8 As regards the relation of brain-weight and body-weight there are bound to be great diver- sities of opinion as to the average ratio. Bis- choff’s ratio is 1:36.6 in males, 1:35.2 in females. Vierordt’s more extensive tables give 1:46.3 in males, 1:44.8 in females. Taguchi finds 1:38.3 and 1:42.9 respectively in his Japanese series. The weight of the body is, however, a very unsatisfactory stand- ard for comparison since the mode of death and other factors exert a great influence upon it. Such objections can not be raised against employing the stature as a basis for estima- ting relative brain-weight. To recapitulate, the brain of the Japanese grows more slowly during infancy and early youth than it does in the European. In the adult the brain-weight compares favorably with that of Europeans of similar stature and it may be shown to be superior in this re- spect to other races of the same general stature. These facts are of not a little sig- nificance in relation to the learning, industry and aptitudes of this progressive race. E. A. SprrzKa. SCIENCE. B13 GONIONEMUS VERSUS ‘GONIONEMA.’ Wiru the growing multiplicity of names in zoological nomenclature and their great sim- ilarity, although referring to widely different forms, it is certainly a questionable practice to change the name of any animal unless there is urgent reason for doing so. It is well known that names of animals are not all good etymology or derivation, but this should not be sufficient ground for changes. A name once given an animal by proper au- thority is its name irrespective of etymology or its significance, and would better not be changed in most cases for any less reason than being preoccupied. As Gonionemus is a jellyfish that will be frequently referred to, on account of its being used both in many experiments and in uni- versities and colleges for class study, it is desirable to have the form of its name estab- lished. Haeckel (‘System der Medusen’) first changed Agassiz’s naming of the genus to “Gonynema, because he supposed the name was intended to mean ‘kneed thread.’ And in the light of Agassiz’s description (‘ North Am. Acalephe,’ 1865), in which he said ‘* * * the moment a blade of kelp touches their dise, they stop, bend their tentacles like knees, and remain attached to the seaweed * * *” it is evident that he meant to use for part of the name the word that refers to knees. If the name were to be changed, therefore, it should be Gonynema, which would also be correct in construction. The form of the name ‘ Gonionema’ was first published by Yerkes (Am. Jour. of Physiol., Vol. VII., No. 2) and since then used by others, but here again only the ending is corrected and it still remains to change the end of the first part, making it Gonianema.* Dr. Perkins (The Proc. of the Acad. of Nat. *Sinee the above was put into type a letter from Professor Agassiz states that, in 1859, in making the name Gonionemus he meant to sug- gest ‘something with knees browsing about in the huge kelp,’ which reminded him of a grove. According to this, then, the part of the name in question is from ‘nemus’ and the original ending is the proper one., 374 Sciences, Phila., March 7, 1903) im his inter- esting paper on ‘The Development of Gonio- nema’ first gives the authority of Agassiz approving the correction, but in the confusion that might arise I propose to retain the name Gonionemus, originally given the genus by Professor Agassiz, and would like to urge that future writers use this form. L. Murpacn. view of Derroit, Micu. BOTANICAL NOTES. MOSSES. Dr. A. J. Grout has just published ‘ Mosses with Hand-Lens and Microscope, Part L.,’ as a quarto pamphlet of 86 pages. This is a “non-technical hand-book, of the more com- mon mosses of northeastern United States,’ and is the outgrowth of ‘ Mosses with a Hand- Lens,’ published by the same author a few years ago. After a brief introduction, chapters are given dealing with classification and nomen- clature, collection and preservation, mounting and methods of manipulation. The life his- tory and structure of the moss plant are then given in some detail. Since the peristome is of considerable importance in indicating the relationships of mosses, the discussion of its structure is given due prominence in this sec- tion. An illustrated glossary of bryological terms constitutes a valuable feature of the work. j After listing the more important works on mosses for American students, the author takes up the systematic study of the more common forms. The key to the families is followed by the treatment of the Sphagnacez, Andreacex, Georgiacee, Polytrichacer, Bux- baumiacer, Fissidentacee and Dicranacer in part, leaving the remainder of the twenty- seven families recognized for treatment in subsequent parts (four to five parts in all will be issued). The classification adopted does not deviate very much from that given in Dixon and Jameson’s ‘ Hand-book of British Mosses.’ In the matter of changes in nomen- elature the author has been quite conservative. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 455. The work is illustrated with a considerable number of figures in the text, besides ten full- page plates. The fact that the latter are reproductions from ‘Recherches sur Les Mousses,’ by Schimper, ‘ Bryologia Europea,’ and Sullivant’s ‘Icones Muscorum’ is sufi- cient guarantee for their excellence. The purpose of the work is best given in the words of the author: ‘To give by drawings and descriptions the information necessary to en- able any one interested to become acquainted with the more common mosses with the least possible outlay of time, patience and money,’ but we doubt if the author’s prediction, ‘that it makes the mosses as easy to study as the flowering plants,’ will ever be realized. The beginning student will find Dr. Grout’s publication a very valuable aid, and by those who do not have the more exhaustive treatises at their command it will be especially prized. MORPHOLOGY OF ANGIOSPERMS. SrupENts of morphology will welcome the appearance of ‘ Morphology of Angiosperms,’ by Dr. J. M. Coulter and Dr. Chas. J. Cham- berlain, from the press of D. Appleton & Co. It is worthy of note that this work is not issued as Part II. of the ‘ Morphology of Spermatophytes,’ as was the intention when its companion volume dealing with the Gym- nosperms was published in 1901. This may be taken as a protest against considering the Spermatophytes as a group coordinate with the Pteridophytes. The present volume, to use the authors’ words, “ Has grown out of a course of lectures accompanied by laboratory work, given for several successive years, to classes of graduate students preparing for research. It seeks to organize the vast amount of scattered ma- terial so that it may be available in compact and related form.” After a brief introduction the following sequence of chapters is taken up: The flower, the microsporangium, the mega- sporangium, the female gametophyte, the male gametophyte, fertilization, the endo- sperm, the embryo. The chapter on the micro- sporangium ends with the formation of the mother-cells, and with their division the his- tory of the male gametophyte is entered. SerreMsBer 18, -1903.] This line of separation is supported by the arguments of Strasburger, but even Stras- burger has been known to change his opinions. To begin the gametophyte with the germina- ting spore certainly gives us a much clearer conception of the alternation of generations. The history of the megasporangium is like- wise terminated by the formation of the mother-cells, for their division is a reduction division, which is used as the basis of separa- tion of sporophyte and gametophyte. In the history of the male gametophyte the view that the tube-cell is the antheridium wall that develops a tubular outgrowth, ‘ while the generative cell and its products is the sperma- togenous part of the antheridium’ is given the preference. A careful reading of the chapter on the female gametophyte shows that the germination of the megaspore and forma- tion of the gametophyte is not such a uni- form process as most of our standard texts describe. In dealing with fertilization, “double fertilization’ is given due prominence, and the authors object to the use of the term as they consider it far from established that a real fertilization takes place; hence they prefer to speak of it as ‘triple fusion.’ The disputed centrosome question is touched upon and the authors’ views may perhaps be gained from the following quotation: ‘To say that all the figures that have been drawn have been mere products of the imagination would be a ‘radical statement and one doubtless very far from the truth.’ In the discussion of the en- dosperm its morphological character is touched upon, and while its exact nature is not con- sidered established, the view that it is ‘ belated vegetative tissue of the female gametophyte, stimulated in a general way to develop by the act of fertilization,’ is held as the most probable, although the possibility that it is a second sporophyte is admitted. Partheno- genesis and polyembryony are treated in the chapter on the embryo, and recent investiga- tions seem to indicate that both are much more common than was formerly supposed. In connection with each chapter there is a bibliography of the most important literature. An idea of the number of original papers consulted may be gained from the literature SCIENCE. 375 cited in the chapter on the female gameto- phyte, which includes 122 separate articles. The masterly way in which the ‘Vast amount handled is a commendable feature of the work, and we are inclined to think that the authors of some of our standard texts might consult it with profit. Several chapters are given on classifica- of chaotie material has been tion, and it is encouraging to note that the authors have not found it necessary to develop a classification of their own but have been contented to adopt the classification of Engler and Prantl as given in ‘Die Naturlichen Pflanzenfamilien,’ as ‘the best expression of our present knowledge, as applied to the whole of the Angiosperms.? The fact that ‘this has not been pressed to the dreary details of minor groups,’ but that general principles have been emphasized, makes these chapters of special value to the morphologist. Separate chapters are given to geographic distribution, fossil Angiosperms and phylogeny of Angiosperms. The work closes with two chapters on the comparative anatomy of Gym- nosperms and Angiosperms contributed by Professor E. C. Jeffrey, of Harvard Univer- sity. Only a brief outline of the subject is attempted and perhaps some students will feel that a more extended treatment would have been advisable. The whole work is illustrated with some- thing over a hundred figures taken in large part from the original articles cited. The book is an admirable presentation of the sub- ject and should be in the hands of every work- ing botanist. F. D. Heatp. UNIVERSITY OF NEBRASKA. INVESTIGATIONS IN PROGRESS AT THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO.* In a former Convoeation Statement I en- deayored to point out in a general way that the officers of the University were engaged very directly and earnestly in the prosecution of special investigations. It was my purpose to show that a great share of the strength of the University was given to research and in- *From the last quarterly statement of Presi- dent Harper. [S%s) vestigation, as distmguished from administra- tion and teaching. I desire at this time to indieate specifically, by way of illustration, the thought which at that time I endeavored to express. My illustrations are taken alto- gether from the Departments of Mathematics and the Natural Sciences. On a future oc- casion I shall use material which has been gathered from the departments ordinarily classed as the humanities. The proposition which I wish to present is this: Nearly every member of every depart- ment in the university is to-day engaged in inyestigative work in which effort is being put forth to make new contributions toward the better understanding of the subject studied. I think it best under all the circumstances not to mention in this statement the specific names of persons thus engaged. In most cases, how- eyer, the mention of the subject itself will carry with it a knowledge of the person en- gaged in the work. THE DEPARTMENT OF ASTRONOMY AND ASTROPHYSICS. Mr. A is engaged in a systematic study of double stars with the forty-inch telescope. His great general catalogue of all known double stars in the northern heavens, which he has been preparing during the past twenty- five years, is about to be published by the Carnegie Institution. Mr: B is engaged in a spectroscopic study of stellar motions with the forty-inch telescope. The results he has already published represent the highest degree of precision hitherto at- tained in this field. Through his initiative several observatories in Europe, Africa and the United States are cooperating in the ob- servation of certain standard stars. The re- sults of his investigations will serve as a basis for general studies of stellar relationships and motions, and also of the motion of the solar system with respect to the stars. Mr. C is at work upon a triangulation of nearly 700 stars in various star clusters. These observations will serve as a basis for future investigations of the internal motions of these clusters. His observations of the 76 SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 455. Fifth Satellite of Jupiter are the only ones that have been obtained during the last five years, on account of the difficulty of observing this exceedingly faint object. In the co- operative plan of observing the minor planet Eros, participated in by many observatories in all parts of the world, he has obtained the most extensive series of observations, com- prising over 1,500 measures on 73 nights. In addition to many other micrometrical obserya- tions with the large telescope, he has under- taken an extensive photographic survey of the Milky Way and other objects with the Bruce photographic telescope. Mr. D is engaged in investigations on the- motions of the minor planets, with particular reference to the characteristic planets of the Hilda type. He is also continuing his re- searches on effective potential forces. Mr. E is engaged in a variety of theoretical investigations, most of which involve the ap- plication of the methods of modern mathe- maties to problems of celestial mechanics. Te is giving special attention to a critical study of the nebular hypothesis on dynamical grounds, and is also at work on the theory of telescope objectives, with special reference to the use of non-spherical surfaces. Mr. F’s work on the design and construction of reflecting telescopes, and his photographs obtained with the two-foot reflector of the Yerkes Observatory have exercised a wide in- fluence among astronomers. His color-sereen method of converting a visual telescope into a photographic one has yielded excellent re- sults with the forty-inch telescope and is beng adopted in other observatories. Mr. G is engaged in spectroscopic studies of various stars with the large telescope. This work relates particularly to certain very close double stars discovered by Mr. B and Mr. G with the Bruce spectrograph. : Mr. H is engaged in determining the bright- ness of a large number of stars, particularly those which vary in their brightness and which at minimum are beyond the reach of ordinary telescopes. Part of this work on very faint stars has been done in cooperation with two or three of the largest observatories in this country. SEPTEMBER 18, 1903.) Mr. J’s investigations relate to the general subject of stellar evolution, and are threefold in character: ‘1. Photographic studies of stellar spectra for the purpose of determining the physical and chemical condition and the order of de- velopment of certain great classes of stars. With the collaboration of two other members of the department, he has just completed an investigation of one of the two classes of red stars, including their chemical composition, physical condition, motion in the direction of the earth, order of evolution and relationship to the sun and other classes of stars. 2. Studies of the sun made for the purpose of elucidating both solar and stellar phe- nomena. 3. Laboratory bearing on problems of solar and stellar chemistry and physics. With the collaboration of another member of the department, an investigation of spark spectra in liquids and compressed gases, and their bearing on the theory of tem- porary stars, has just been completed. investigations THE DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS. Mr. A is engaged in work upon a ruling engine for the production of diffraction gra- tings of a high order of perfection. Serious difficulties have been encountered, but consid- erable progress has been made upon this most important piece of work, and at present the prospect of attaining the end sought is highly encouraging. The efficiency of the gratings which it is hoped this machine will make will be at least twice that of the best gratings which have yet been produced. The difficulty of making a grating with twice the efficiency is as much greater than that of making the gratings which have been produced as the difficulty of making a telescope objective of eighty inches diameter is greater than that of making one of forty inches diameter. Mr. A has also just begun an investigation of the effect of various agencies upon the posi- tion, breadth, distribution of light and _ in- tensity of spectral lines. He further expects to take up soon the problem of the velocity of light. SCIENCE. Messrs. B and C are engaged in the publica- tion of a series of text-books which contain the most important of the undergraduate courses in physics which have been developed here. This work is considered necessary in order that the university may exert an ade- quate influence upon physies-teaching through- out the country. Two of these texts have already appeared and two more are nearing completion. Mr. B is also cooperating with the Depart- ments of Mathematics and Pedagogy in an endeavor to improve the teaching of mathe- maties and physics in the secondary schools, and is about to begin the collection of Mr. A’s scattered works for publication in a sin- gle volume. Mr. C is, in addition, engaged in an inves- tigation of the nature of electric discharge in high vacua. This investigation is de- signed to test an important point in the mod- ern electron theory of matter. Mr. D is in the midst of a research upon the relation of the sparking potential and the spark distance for distances of the order of the mean free path of the molecule. Mr. E is assisting Mr. A in the perfection of the ruling engine, and is also cooperating with Mr. C in the production of a physics text-book for elementary schools. Mr. F is engaged upon two pieces of re- search: (1) an examination of the conditions which govern the coherence between metals; and (2) the influence of hysteresis upon elec- tric resonance. Preliminary results of these investigations were presented by Mr. F to the American Association for the Advance- ment of Science at its recent meeting in Washington. Mr. G is determining the index of refrac- tion of sodium vapor for that portion of the spectrum which contains the sodium lines. THE DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY. Mr. A is at present engaged upon a study of dissociation phenomena in the glycerine- glycol series, as well as in the sugar group. Mr. B is making a study of equilibrium conditions in calomel vapor, and also between amorphous and soluble sulphur. 378 Mr. C is conducting two lines of work: (1) studies on molecular rearrangement, and of saponification and hydrolysis of organic com- pounds by physico-chemical and synthetic-or- ganic methods; and (2) studies on the exist- ence of positive halogen ions. Mr. D is conducting work upon the disso- ciation constants of dibasic acids. Mr. E upon the constitution of salts of or- ganic cyanogen compounds. Mr. F upon dialkyl derivatives of hydrox- ylamine.- THE DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY. Mr. A is engaged in the investigation of the Kinderhook faunas of the Mississippi valley. Mr. B is engaged upon the graphical ex- pression of the chemical composition of ig- neous rocks, with reference to their mineral constitution and their classification. Mr. C has under investigation the glacia- tion of the western mountains and the geology of the coastal plain. Mr. D is working upon a group of ‘prob- lems relating to the origin and early stages of the earth and upon the system of dynamics connected therewith. THE DEPARTMENT OF ZOOLOGY. Mr. A is studying (1) the evolution of spe- cies as indicated in the genetic relations of color-patterns, voices, instincts, and general life-histories; (2) experiments in hybridizing species, to ascertain, if possible, general laws governing the transmission of hereditary characters, and the conditions necessary to creation of new species. Mr. B~ (1) the method of evolution. The quantitative study of the changes that a spe- cies undergoes in different localities and in different geological periods at one locality. Illustrated by studies on the shells of the mollusk known as the ‘ scallop’ (Pecten) from different points on the coast of North America and Europe and from fossil beds in Virginia. Mr. C is working on problems in embry- ology: (1) the réle of cell-division in devel- opment; the relation of the process of cleav- age of the ovum to the formation of an em- SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 455. bryo; (2) the investigation of the problem of correlative differentiation, 7. e., the influences exerted by parts of an embryo upon the de- velopment of other organs; more particularly, at present, the mechanics of development of the amnion in the chick; and allantois; and the influence of the nervous system in the formation of organs. Mr. D is engaged in experimental study of problems connected with regeneration: (1) the factors influencing regeneration and the effect of altered conditions; (2) the differentiation of the’ regenerating structures and the dif- ferences between regenerated and original structures; (3) the physiology of form and form-regulation, 7. e., the return to normal or typical form, after experimental alteration of form and especially the effects of physical factors, e. g., pressure, tension, etc., upon form in the lower invertebrates. Mr. E is making experiments and statistical investigations of the relations existing be- tween some of the factors of the environment, i. é€., temperature, humidity, food, topography, ete., and the production of variations in in- sects, especially in the color-patterns of cole- optera; (2) investigating the evolution of large genera and of groups of small genera, to determine if possible what causes are the dominant ones in the production of new races and species, and the conditions necessary for their preservation; based upon the experi- ments and statistics (1) and the ontogeny and phylogeny of color-patterns, color variations, and geographical distribution. THE DEPARTMENT OF ANATOMY. Mr. A is conducting research in problems of anatomy and pathology of the nervous system and in infectious diseases. Mr. B has completed, since coming to the university, two papers: one on the structure of the cardiac glands of mammals; the other, the structure of Brunner’s glands in mam- mals. He has under way three other re- searches: (1) on the structure of Paneth cells; (2) on the histology of the gastric (3) on the struc- It is to be glands of vertebrates; tures of the human stomach. SEPTEMBER 18, 1903.] noted that these researches deal with the finest structures of the digestive tract. Mr. C has made extensive researches in general anatomy, especially in vertebrate em- bryology. His experiments on the formation of the embryo in fish and amphibia are well known. More recently he has taken up the study of histogenesis, especially of fibrillated muscle cells and their nuclei. At present he is engaged upon a study of spermolysins and ovolysins. Mr. D has been making contributions to our knowledge of the anatomy of the spleen, especially its framework, but is better known through the work of the last year and a half, conducted chiefly with Professor Ehrlich in Frankfurt, upon the nature of poisons which act upon the blood, especially snake poison. His studies have attracted international at- tention and have a wide bearing upon blood poisons in general. Mr. E has made a special study of the anatomy of the ducts and blood-vessels of the pancreas of the hog and their origin in the embryo and has published part of the re- sults. He is now engaged upon the study of the framework and wandering cells of the mucous membrane of the human stomach. Mr. F is engaged upon the study of the arrangement of the connective tissues in the mammalian larynx and the study of the his- togenesis of the laryngeal glands in the pig. Mr. G is engaged upon the study of the morphology of the head in vertebrates, and on the study of the changes in the structure of the mucous membrane of the stomach fol- lowing the operation of gastroenterostomy. Mr. H is making important observations in methods of staining nerves with methylene blue and with Bethe’s neuro-fibril method. These studies have been concerned chiefly with the degeneration of axones and nerve endings after nerve section or local pressure; and further with the effect of electrical stimu- lation on the structure and vital staining properties of nerve endings. Mr. J has worked out the distribution of the blood-vessels in the labyrinth of the ear of Sus scrofa domesticus, the results appearing in the Decennial Publications of the University. SCIENCE. 379 He is now engaged upon the study of the strue- ture and function of the stria vascularis. He spent a great deal of time and care in the preparation of casts and injections to form material for his special course. THE DEPARTMENT OF NEUROLOGY. Mr. A is at work on the change in the per- centage of water in the nervous system of the white rat during the period between birth and full maturity. Mr. B is making a study of the relative activity of the white rat at different ages and at different hours of the day. Mr. C is working on the effects of lecithin on the growth of the central nervous system. Mr. D: on the law for the distribution of the nerve fibers which innervate the leg of the frog. Mr. E: on an enumeration of the medullated nerve fibers in the dorsal and ventral roots of the spinal nerves of man. Mr. F: on the psychical development of the young white rat correlated with the growth of its nervous system. Miss G: on the mode in which the white substance of the spinal cord of the rat in- creases in area. Mr. H: on the healing of wounds of the brain at different ages between birth and ma- turity. Mr. J: on the axone reaction as observed in the nucleus of the third cranial nerve of the white rat. THE DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY. Mr. A is engaged in studying problems connected with the origin and evolution of seed plants. A book, just going through the press, for the first time organizes the subject for the benefit of advanced and research students. Mr. B is at present investigating the prob- lems of fertilization among the lower plants. The results are distinctly pushing out the boundaries of our knowledge of one of the most fundamental life-processes. Mr. C is investigating cytological problems among plants, and is completing an important contribution to our knowledge of the methods of nuclear division. Mr. D is a large contributor to plant ecol- ogy, and is now engaged in organizing the 380 subject for its first publication as a university text. Mr. F has been investigating certain impor- tant problems presented by the elub-mosses, among which the origin of the seed-habit is prominent. Mr. G is engaged in investigating the causes of the forms assumed by plant bodies, as shown chiefly by lower plants. He has shown experimentally that form is in the main a phenomenon of chemistry and physics, and not to be explained by any mystical vital- istic theory. Mr. H is investigating the ecological prob- lems that underlie scientific forestry, his field of operations haying been chiefly in the Rocky Mountains of Montana. He has just made an important report to the government on that region. Mr. J has in preparation a book for students of plant physiology in which for the first time the subject will be considered from the stand- point of modern chemistry and physics. THE DEPARTMENT OF BACTERIOLOGY. Mr. A is engaged upon a study of some of the poisonous substances produced by bacteria, especially those that affect the red blood- corpuscles. He is also preparing evidence to be used in the suit between the states of Mis- souri and Illinois concerning the Chicago Drainage Canal. Mr. B. has nearly completed a piece of work upon some disease-producing organisms found in human blood and closely related to the typhoid bacillus. THE DEPARTMENT OF PALEONTOLOGY. The work upon which Mr. A is at present engaged, and which will occupy the large part of the next two years, is a monographie study of the extinct orders of Mesozoic reptiles known as the Pterodactyls and Plesiosaurs. This investigation is aided by a grant from the Carnegie Museum. Under the combined direction of Mr. A and Mr. B, and with Mr. C’s cooperation, Mr. D, a fellow, is engaged upon a study of the fossil diptera of America, based chiefly upon SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. XVIIL. No. 455. a collection loaned to the Department by the U. §. National Museum. THE SCHOOL OF GEOGRAPHY IN THE SUMMER SESSION OF CORNELL UNIVERSITY. INTEREST in geography as a school subject has grown rapidly within the past ten years. Courses have multiplied in the summer ses- sions of the universities, and an increasing number of teachers in secondary and grade schools have awakened to their need of better training both in subject matter and in methods of treatment. More than a dozen of the larger universities now accept the subject for admission, and examinations are regularly of- fered by the College Entrance Examination Board. These facts give special meaning to the organization of the Cornell School of Geog- raphy under the direction of Professor R. S. Tarr. Although following upon the dis- couraging typhoid epidemic of last winter, the health of the school was excellent, and the at- tendance much larger than was expected, im- cluding grade, normal and high school teachers and superintendents from seventeen states. The courses and instructors were as follows: Physiography and geography of Europe, Pro- fessor R. S. Tarr; dynamic geology and geog- raphy of the United States, Professor Albert P. Brigham, of Colgate University; home geography and type studies in geography for erammar grades, Dr. Chas. A. MeMurry, of Northern Illinois Normal School; commer- cial geography, Principal Philip Emerson, of Lynn; class-room problems and _ laboratory methods for the grades, Supervisor R. H. Whitebeck, of Trenton State Normal and Model Schools; laboratory in geography, As- sistant Principal Frank Carney, of Ithaca; laboratory in geology, Mr. Geo. C. Matson, of Cornell University. A large number of field excursions were — made, in the vicinity of Ithaca, and to more remote ‘points such as Watkins Glen, Lake Ontario and the coal region about Wilkesbarre. On one evening of each week a round table conference gaye opportunity for informal dis- SEPTEMBER 18, 1903.] cussion of school problems in geography and comparison from a wide range of experience. It is expected that the school will be con- tinued in 1904 with the same faculty. All the courses given this year, and some addi- tional work, will be offered. Ae sPEAB: THE MALARIA EXPEDITION TO THE GAMBIA. Aw abstract in Nature states that the Liver- pool School of Tropical Medicine has issued a report on the prevention of malaria in the tropies with reference to the Gambia. Dr. Dutton, who conducted the expedition shows how a great deal of disease is due to the want of knowledge of the nature of malaria, and that during the dry season the residents are largely to blame for the appearance of the disease. The object of the expedition was to investigate the conditions under which mosquitoes were propagated in the town of Bathurst and at the principal stations of the colony, and to suggest methods of destroying these insects. Malaria was found to be pre- valent in the colony; 80 per cent. of the native children examined harbored malaria parasites in their blood. The liability to in- fection of the Europeans commences soon after the rains are established, lasting up to the end of November. The various breeding places of mosquitoes are described in detail in chap- ter IV. of the report, particular mention being made of the wells, canoes, boats, lighters, cut- ters on the foreshore, and of the grass-clogged trenches in many of the streets, which together supply Bathurst with the majority of its mosquitoes during the wet season and for part of the dry season. The number of mosquito breeding places present in com- pounds was found to vary with the social position of the occupier. They increased in extent and number in proportion to the wealth and position of the occupier. In one factory yard were found six barrels, and in the garden there were seventeen tubs and eight small wells, all breeding quantities of Culex, Stegomyia, and Anopheles mos- quitoes. Besides these dry season breeding places, discarded domestic utensils were scat- tered about the yard and garden which, in the SCIENCE. 581 wet season, would have acted as_ breeding It is pointed out that during the dry season, from November to May, natural breed- places. ing places for mosquitoes in Bathurst cease to exist, and from this period the people breed mosquitoes solely in their own compounds. In chapter V., which deals with the preven- tion of in Bathurst, a campaign against the mosquito is advocated; the town is judged especially suitable for its success. Thus Bathurst is situated on a_ practically isolated piece of land surrounded on nearly all sides by a broad expanse of sea water. The amount of land to be dealt with is compara- tively small, viz., about a square mile. The surface is fairly level, sandy, absorbing water readily. In this area the breeding places of mosquitoes are a known quantity, the arti- ficial, or those made by man, being in excess of the natural. The rainfall is very small, and rain occurs only during four out of the twelve months of the year. The probability of the introduction into Bathurst of yellow fever from Senegal is pointed out as another reason for attacking the mosquito. The expedition was informed by His Excellency, the acting Governor, H. M. Brandford Griffith, of the intention on the part of the Colonial Government to enter upon a crusade against the mosquito. and on November 18 the preliminary removal of rub- bish from houses and compounds began; a sanitary inspector was appointed, and received special instruction in the work. Under him worked a gang of laborers, and at the time of the departure of the expedition (January 10) 363 houses and compounds had been in- spected. From these 131 cartloads of old tin pots and other rubbish were removed. On the return of His Excellency the Governor, Sir George C. Denton, the inspector and a sufficient staff of laborers were appointed per- manently, and a grant of £200 per annum was given for the special anti-mosquito work. Anti-mosquito regulations have been drawn up by the Colonial Government. An appendix, by Mr. F. V. Theobald, is attached to the report; in it are described the various species of mosquitoes collected by the expedition, many of which were new to science. malaria 382 SCIENTIFIC AND NEWS. Dr. E. B. CoreLann, instructor in bionomics, at Stanford University, has been appointed chief botanist of the United States Philippine Commission. A. D. E. Elmer, assistant in systematic botany, has been appointed assist- ant field collector on the same commission. NOTES Tun British Rainfall Organization founded in 1860 by the late G. J. Symons, will hence- forth .be carried on under the sole charge of Dr. H. R. Mill, as Mr. Sowerby Wallis has been compelled by ill health to retire after more than thirty years connection with the association. Jamatca has abandoned its weather service and Mr. Maxwell Hall, government meteor- ologist, has resigned the position which he has held since 1880. The compilation of the weather reports will hereafter be undertaken by the Chemists’ Department. THE Hanbury Gold Medal of the Pharma- ceutical Society of London has this year been awarded to M. Eugéne Collin. Grorcr Benzamin Waite (Ph.D. Yale) has been appointed assistant in the Department of Bacteriology, of the Hoagland Laboratory in Brooklyn. Dr. Frank Russeti has resigned the in- structorship of anthropology at Harvard Uni- versity, which the has held since 1897. Owing to his health, he will live on a ranch in Arizona. Proressor S. J. Barnett, of the Department of Physics of Stanford University, has re- turned from Alaska, where he had charge of a party, sent out by the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Governor La Fouierre, of Wisconsin, has appointed a commission, consisting of Dr. Gustav Schmitt, Milwaukee, Professor H. L. Russell, bacteriologist at the State University, Madison, and Dr. M. R. Merrill, whose duty it is to determine the advisability of the es- tablishment of a state hospital for the treat- ment of tuberculosis. Srcretary Wison, of the Department of Agriculture, gave this week an address before SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 455. the Irrigation Congress, meeting at Ogden, Utah. Presipent A. T. Hantry, of Yale Univer- sity, was a passenger on the steamer Prinzess Trene which arrived at New York last week from Mediterranean ports. Anton J. Cartson, Ph.D., of Stanford Uni- versity, who was appointed research assistant by the Carnegie Institution last year, is now at San Diego doing research work in the temporary laboratory of the University of California. The subject of his investigations is ‘the mechanism of the inhibition of the heart in invertebrates.’ Durine the past year Mr. T. W. Vaughan, of the United States Geological Survey, has devoted most of his time to a study of the later Tertiary corals of the United States and the West Indies. The manuscript of his monograph is far advanced and illustrations for sixty or seventy plates have been pre- pared. Captain Lerant, of the French army, is about to explore the Niger Basin, under the auspices of the Paris Geographical Society and the French Colonial Office. A spust in honor of the late Mr. W. Martin- dale will be unveiled at the London School of Pharmacy on October 1, when Dr. J. W. Swan, F.R.S., will make an address in con- nection with the opening of a new section of the school. TuereE has been unveiled at Langres, France, a monument in honor of the chemist, Laurent. Tue deaths are announced of Dr. Eugen Askenasy, honorary professor of botany in the University of Heidelberg, at the age of fifty-eight years, of Dr. J. Lange, the mathe- matician, director of a Berlin Realgymna- sium, at the age of fifty-seven years, and ‘of Ernst Krause, who wrote on popular nat- ural history under the name Carus Sterne, at the age of sixty-four years. Mr. W. W. Astor has contributed $100,000 to the British Cancer Research Fund. At the instance of Dr. N. L. Britton, di- rector of the New York Botanical Garden, SEPTEMBER 18, 1903.) the buildings at Cinchona relinquished by the government of Jamaica have been rented for a tropical botanical laboratory. Tue daily papers state that large crowds are visiting the American Museum of Natural History, New York, to see the specimen of radium there on exhibition, which was pre- sented by Mr. Edward D. Adams. Tue Chemical Laboratory of the University Modena, including a scientific library con- taining 15,000 works, has been destroyed by fire. Tur Farmers’ National Congress will hold its twenty-third annual session at Niagara Falls, beginning on September 22. Among the general addresses of scientific interest on the program are: ‘Infectious and Contagious Diseases of Farm Animals and their effect on American Agriculture, Dr. D. E. Salmon, Washington, D. C.; ‘Insect Pests of Plants and their effect on American Agriculture,’ Professor F. M. Webster, Urbana, Tl. Tue British Journal of Education states that the council of the Royal Geographical Society has at the request of the London School Board and the Oxford and Cambridge School Examinations Board drawn up syl- labuses as guides to instruction in geography in elementary and in secondary schools. The elementary suggestions were drafted by the late Mr. T. G. Rooper, H.M.LS., and, after his death, they were revised by Mr. G. G. Chis- holm, M.A., B.Sc. The secondary were drafted by Mr. H. J. Mackinder. Tue British Government has appointed a commission to inquire into the alleged phys- ical deterioration of the lower classes, with Mr. Almeric W. Fitzroy, clerk of the privy council, as chairman. Tue daily papers state that the legacy of M. de Pierrecourt, who left his money to the city of Rouen for the purpose of founding a family of giants, with a view to the physical regeneration of the human race, has been before the Council of State in Paris. An arrangement has been arrived at by which the city of Rouen undertakes to apply a sum of 800,000f. out of the testator’s estate to the SCIENCE. 383 foundation of a useful institution, and to pay over the rest of the estate to M. de Pierre- court’s heirs. Cases of illness including four deaths have occurred at Marseilles which are attributed to the plague, while in northern Mexico there is an outbreak of yellow fever, which is now being investigated by the Health Department of Texas, Tue U. S. Geological Survey has estab- lished seven new river stations and renewed four of the five old stations in North Dakota, so that eleven stations are now in operation in this state. The stations in the eastern part of the state have been established to de- termine the amount of water power available and for other general purposes. In the west- ern part of the state, which is semi-arid, the stations have been established to determine the amount of water available for irrigation. This region has no large rivers except the Mis- souri, which has only a small fall, not so great as most irrigation canals. It is not probable, therefore, that this stream can be used for irrigation purposes until a later time, when the land shall have become more valuable. A thorough examination is being made of all the streams and the lands in North Dakota west of the Missouri River with a view to irrigation projects. If any project appears to be favorable, detailed surveys and estimates may be made, and, if the project is then found feasible, it will be recommended for construction. An examination is also being made of the cheap and abundant lignite resources of the state in the hope that lignite can be utilized for fuel in pumping water for irrigation in certain localities, where long canals would be impracticable. Tue London correspondent of the Journal of the American Medical Association calls attention to the statistics of the birth rate in Australia, recently collected by Mr. Coglan. The fall in the birth rate in Australia and New Zealand taken together is such that there are annually fewer births by nearly 20,000 than would have oceurred if the rates prevail- ing as late as ten years ago had been main- tained. New South Wales furnishes a stri- O54 king example. In 1887 there were in this state 112,247 married women under the age of 45: in 1901 there were 149,247, yet the num- ber of children born was about the same in each year. The legitimate birth rate per 10,000 married women under the age of 45 is 239; in 1891 it was 276. A curious fact is that the decline occurs in every class, among people of every shade of opinion, except among women of Irish birth, who exhibit no decline. But as the proportion of women of Irish birth is fast decreasing that element in mainte- nance of the birth rate will soon disappear. Large as is the area of the Australian conti- nent Mr. Coghlan thinks it is impossible that its people will become truly great under the conditions affecting the imerease of popula- tion which now exist. Immigration has prac- tically ceased to be an important factor, the maintenance and increase of the population depending on the birth rate alone—a rate seriously diminished and still diminishing. UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL NEWS. Prorressor F. D. Tucker, principal of the school of agriculture of the University of Minnesota, has been elected and has entered upon his duties as president of Memorial Uni- versity, Mason City, Ia. founded about two years ago as a memorial to the Grand Army of the Republic. One building, the College of Arts, costing $100,000, has already been erected and will be occupied during the coming year. This institution was University Coniecr, Reading, has received towards the cost of the new buildings £10,000 from Lady Wantage, widow of Lord Wan- tage, who was president of the college from 1896 to 1901; £10,000 from Mr. W. G. Palmer, M.P.; and a third £10,000 from three other contributors. Tue Leeds Corporation technical instruc- tion sub-committee, with the approval of the finance committee, has decided in the event of a charter being granted to the York shire College, to give £4,000 a year towards the University funds, in addition to the SCIENCE. [N.S8. Vor. XVIII. No. 455. £1,550 eranted trom the residue of the local taxation. Dr. Burvon D. Myers, assistant in anatomy at the Johns Hopkins University, has an ap- pointment as instructor in anatomy in the Indiana State University. : Dr. C. H. Gorpon, until recently superin- tendent of schools at Lincoln, Nebr., and instructor in geology and geography in the University of Nebraska, has been appointed acting-professor of geology in the University of Washington to take charge of the work of Professor Henry Landes, who has been granted a year’s leave of absence for study in the University of Chicago. Tue following is a list of appointments in the scientific departments of the University of Maine for the coming year: H. S. Boardman. B.C.E. and C.E., University of Maine, pro- fessor of civil engineering; W. N. Spring, B.A. and M.F., Yale, professor of forestry: W. D. Hurd, B.S., Michigan Agricultural Col- lege, professor of agriculture; A. W. Cole, B.S., Worcester Polytechnic Institute, instruc- tor in shop-work; H. P. Hamlin, B.C.E., Uni- versity of Maine, instructor in civil engineer- ing; G. T. Davis, B.A., and J. B. Reed, B.A.. of the University of Michigan, instructors in chemistry; E. H. Bowen, A.B., Colgate, tutor in physics; P. D. Simpson, B.S., University of Maine, tutor in civil engineering; R. M. Connor, B.S., University of Maine, tutor in mathematies; Edith M. Patch, A.B., Univer- sity of Minnesota, entomologist in the experi- ment station; S. C. Dinsmore, B.S., Univer- sity of Maine, assistant chemist in the experi- ment station. Proressor AUTHENRIETH, of Freiburg, has been called to a professorship of chemistry in the University of Greifswald; Dr. Kvrigar- Menzel, docent in physics in the University of Berlin, has been appointed acting professor in the Technical Institute at Charlottenberg; Dr. Armin Tschermak, docent in physiology and assistant in the Physiological Institute of the University of Halle, has been promoted to a professorship, and Dr. Wilhelm Kiister has been appointed professor of chemistry in the Veterinary School at Stuttgart. SCIENCE A WEEKLY JOURNAL DEVOTED TO THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE, PUBLISHING THE OFFICIAL NOTICES AND PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE. EDITORIAL COMMITTEE : 8. NEwcoMB, Mathematics; R. S. WOODWARD, Mechanics; E. C. PICKERING Astronomy ; T. C. MENDENHALL, Physics ; R. H. THURSTON, Engineering ; IRA REMSEN, Chemistry ; CHARLES D. Watcort, Geology ; W. M. DAvis, Physiography ; HENRY F. OsBORN, Paleon- tology ; W. K. Brooxs, C. HART MERRIAM, Zoology ; S. H. ScUDDER, Entomology ; C. E. BressEY, N. L. BRITTON, Botany ; BowpitcH, Physiology ; C. S. Minot, Embryology, Histology; H. P. WiLtiAM H. WEtcH, Pathology ; J. McKEEN CATTELL, Psychology. FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 25, 1903. CONTENTS: The Address of the President of the British Association for the Advancement of Science: SIRO MORSCAN, TiOCKVEE ss eco, o.0 che x araceh es de 885 Mendel’s Law of Heredity: Proressor W, E. CASTLE Wilbur Clinton Knight: AveN NELSON...... 406 Scientific Books :— Schneider's ‘ Lehrbuch der vergleichenden Histology der Tiere: Dr. Burton D, Myers 409 Societies and Academies :— The American Mathematical Society: Pro- SOR IN. CORBIS... 2.-< «van ucteuttael ts tie 410 Discussion and Correspondence :— Towic Effects of Acids on Seedlings: F. K. MPR AARURO NTN ee aa Srl tin sie satn (tye 0 eis) =<,» ia wy 1s 0% 411 Shorter Articles :— Primitive Flageolets: E. H. HAWLEY...... 412 Scientific and Technical Examinations...... 413 Scientific Notes and News..........0..000% 413 University and Educational News.......... 415 MSS. intended for publication and books, etc., intended for review should be sent to the responsible editor, Pro- fessor J. McKeen Cattell, Garrison-on-Hudson, N. Y. ADDRESS OF THE PRESIDENT OF THE BRITISH ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE. THE INFLUENCE OF BRAIN-POWER ON TORY. My first duty to-night is a sad one. [| have to refer to a great loss which this Na- tion and this Association have sustained. By the death of the great Englishman and great statesman who has just passed away, we members of the British Association are deprived of one of the most illustrious of our confréres. We have to mourn the loss of an enthusiastic student of science who conferred honor on our body by becoming its President. We recognize that as Prime Minister he was mindful of the interests of science, and that to him we owe a more gen- eral recognition on the part of the State of the value to the nation of the work of sci- entific men. On all these grounds you will join in the expression of respectful sym- pathy with Lord Salisbury’s family in their great personal loss which your council has embodied this morning in a resolution of condolence. Last year, when this friend of science ceased to be Prime Minister, he was suc- ceeded by another statesman who also has given many proofs of his devotion to philo- sophical studies, and has shown in many utterances that he has a clear understand- ing of the real place of science in modern civilization. We then have good grounds HIS- 386 for hoping that the improvement in the position of science in this country which we owe to the one will also be the care of his successor, who has honored the Asso- ciation by accepting the unanimous nomi- nation of your council to be your President next year, an acceptance which adds a new lustre to this chair. On this we may congratulate ourselves all the more because I think, although it is not generally recognized, that the century into which we have now well entered may be more momentous than any which has preceded it, and that the present history of the world is being so largely moulded by the influence of brain- power, which in these modern days has to do with natural as well as human forces and laws, that statesmen and politi- cians will have in the future to pay more regard to education and science, as empire- builders and empire-guarders, than they have paid in the past. The nineteenth century will ever be known as the one in which the influences of science were first fully realized in civilized communities; the scientific progress was so gigantic that it seems rash to predict that any of its successors can be more important in the life of any nation. Disraeli, in 1873, referring to the prog- ress up to that year, spoke as follows: ‘‘How much has happened in these fifty years—a period more remarkable than any, I will venture to say, in the annals of man- kind. I am not thinking of the rise and fall of Empires, the change of dynasties, the establishment of Governments. I am thinking of those revolutions of science which have had much more effect than any political causes, which have changed the position and prospects of mankind more than all the conquests and all the codes and all the legislators that ever lived.’’* * Nature, November 27, 1873, Vol. IX., p. 71. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 456. The progress of science, indeed, brings in many considerations which are momentous in relation to the life of any limited com- munity—any one nation. One of these considerations to which attention is now being greatly drawn is that a relative de- eline in national wealth derived from in- dustries must follow relative neglect of scientific education. It was the late Prince Consort who first emphasized this when he came here fresh from the University of Bonn. Hence the ‘Prince Consort’s Committee,’ which led to the foundation of the College of Chemis- try and afterwards of the Science and Art Department. From that time to this the warnings of our men of science have become louder and more urgent in each succeeding year. But this is not all; the commercial output of one country in one century as compared with another is not alone in ques- tion; the acquirement of the scientific spirit and a Imowledge and utilization of the forces of Nature are very much further reaching in their effects on the progress and decline of nations than is generally imag- _Ined. Britain in the middle of the last cen- tury was certainly the country which gained most by the advent of science, for she was then in full possession of those ma- terial gifts of Nature, coal and iron, the combined winning and utilization of which, in the production of machinery and im other ways, soon made her. the richest country in the world, the seat and throne of inven- tion and manufacture, as Mr. Carnegie has called her. Being the great producers and exporters of all kinds of manufactured goods, we became eventually, with our iron ships, the great carriers, and hence the su- premacy of our mercantile marine and our present command of the sea. The most fundamental change wrought by the early applications of science was in iu | SEPTEMBER 25, 1903.] relation to producing and carrying power. With the winning of mineral wealth and the production of machinery in other coun- tries, and cheap and rapid transit between nations, our superiority as depending upon first use of vast material resources was re- duced. Science, which is above all things cosmopolitan—planetary, not national—in- ternationalizes such resources at once. In every market of the world “things of beauty, things of use, Which one fair planet can produce, Brought from under every star,” were soon to be found. Hence the first great effect of the gen- eral progress of science was relatively to diminish the initial supremacy of Britain due to the first use of material resources, which indeed was the real source of our na- tional wealth and place among the nations. The unfortunate thing was that, while the foundations of our superiority depend- ing upon our material resources were be- ing thus sapped by a cause which was be- yond our control, our statesmen and our universities were blind leaders of the blind, and our other asset, our mental resources, which was within our control, was culpably neglected. So little did the bulk of our statesmen know of the part science was playing in the modern world and of the real basis of the nation’s activities, that they imagined polit- ical and fiscal problems to be the only mat- ters of importance. Nor, indeed, are we very much better off to-day. In the im- portant discussions recently raised by Mr. Chamberlain, next to nothing has been said of the effect of the progress of science on prices. The whole course of the modern world is attributed to the presence or ab- sence of taxes on certain commodities in certain countries. The fact that the great fall in the price of food-stuffs in England did not come till some thirty or forty years after the removal of the corn duty between SCIENCE. 387 1847 and 1849 gives them no pause; for them new inventions, railways and steam- ships are negligible quantities; the vast in- crease in the world’s wealth in free trade and protected countries alike comes merely according to them in response to some polit- ical shibboleth. We now know, from what has occurred in other States, that if our Ministers had been more wise and our universities more numer- ous and efficient, our mental resources would have been developed by improve- ments in educational method, by the intro- duction of science into schools, and, more important than all the rest, by the teaching of science by experiment, observation and research, and not from books. It is because this was not done that we have fallen be- hind other nations in properly applying selence to industry, so that our applica- tions of science to industry are relatively less important than they were. But this is by no means all; we have lacked the strengthening of the national life produced by fostering the scientific spirit among all classes, and along all lines of the nation’s activity ;many of the responsible authorities know little and care less about science; we have not learned that it is the duty of a State to organize its forces as carefully for peace as for war; that universities and other teaching centres are as important as battleships or big battalions; are, in fact, essential parts of a modern State’s machin- ery, and as such to be equally aided and as efficiently organized to secure its future well being. Now the objects of the British Associa- tion as laid down by its founders seventy- two years ago are ‘‘To give a stronger im- pulse and a more systematic direction to scientific inquiry—to promote the inter- course of those who cultivate science in dif- ferent parts of the British Empire with one another and with foreign philosophers—to obtain a more general attention to the ob- 388 jects of science and a removal of any disad- vantages of a public kind which impede its progress. ’”’ In the main, my predecessors in this chair, to which you have done me the honor to call me, have dealt, and with great bene- fit to science, with the objects first named. But at a critical time like the present I find it imperative to depart from the course so generally followed by my pre- decessors and to deal with the last object named, for unless by some means or other we ‘obtain a more general attention to the objects of science and a removal of any dis- advantages of a public kind which impede its progress,’ we shall suffer in competition with other communities in which science is more generally utilized for the purposes of the national life. THE STRUGGLE FOR EXISTENCE IN MODERN COMMUNITIES. Some years ago, in discussing the rela- tions of scientific instruction to our indus- tries, Huxley pointed out that we were in presence of a new ‘struggle for exist- ence,’ a struggle which, once commenced must go on until only the fittest survives. It is a struggle between organized species —nations—not between individuals or. any elass of individuals. It is, moreover, a struggle in which science and brains take the place of swords and sinews, on which depended the result of those conflicts which, up to the present, have determined the his- tory and fate of nations. The school, the university, the laboratory and the work- shop are the battlefields of this new war- fare. But it is evident that if this, or any- thing like it, be true, our industries can not be involved alone; the scientific spirit, brain-power, must not be limited to the workshop if other nations utilize it in all branches of their administration and exec- utive. SCIENCE. (N.S. Vou. XVIII. No. 456. It is a question of an important change of front. It is a question of finding a new basis of stability for the Empire in face of new conditions. I am certain that those familiar with the present states of things will acknowledge that the Prince of Wales’s call, ‘Wake up,’ applies quite as much to the members of the Government as it does to the leaders of industry. What is wanted is a complete organiza- tion of the resources of the nation, so as’to enable it best to face all the new problems which the progress of science, combined with the ebb and flow of population and other factors in international competition, are ever bringing before us. Every Min- ister, every public department, is involved, and this being so, it is the duty of the whole nation— King, Lords, and Commons—to do what is necessary to place our scientific in- stitutions on a proper footing in order to enable us to ‘face the music’ whatever the future may bring. The idea that science is useful only to our industries comes from want of thought. If anyone is under the impression that Britain is only suffering at present from the want of the scientific spirit among our industrial classes, and that those employed in the State service possess adequate brain-power and grip of the con- ditions of the modern world into which sci- ence so largely enters, let him read the re- port of the Royal Commission on the War in South Africa. There he will see how the whole ‘system’ employed was, in Sir Henry Brackenbury’s words applied to a part of it, ‘wnsurted to the requirements of an Army which is maintained to enable us to make war.’ let him read also, in the address of the president of the Society of Chemical Industry what drastic steps had to be taken by Chambers of Commerce and “a quarter of a million of working men’ to get the Patent Law Amendment Act into proper shape, in spite of all the advisers and officials of the Board of Trade. Very SEPTEMBER 25, 1903.] few people realize the immense number of scientific problems the solution of which is required for the State service. The na- tion itself is a gigantic workshop, and the more our rulers and legislators, administra- tors and executive officers possess the sci- entific spirit, the more the rule of thumb is replaced in the State service by scientific methods, the more able shall we be, thus armed at all points, to compete successfully with other countries along all lines of na- tional as well as of commercial activity. It is obvious that the power of a nation for war, in men and arms and ships, is one thing; its power in the peace struggles to which I have referred is another; in the lat- ter, the source and standard of national effi- cieney are entirely changed. To meet war conditions, there must be equality or su- periority in battleships and army corps. To meet the new peace conditions there. must be equality or superiority in univer- sities, scientific organization and every- thing which conduces to greater brain power. OUR INDUSTRIES ARE SUFFERING IN THE PRESENT INTERNATIONAL COMPETITION. The present condition of the nation, so far as its industries are concerned, is as well known, not only to the Prime Minis- ter, but to other political leaders in and out of the Cabinet, as it is to you and to me. Let me refer to two speeches deliv- ered by Lord Rosebery-and Mr. Chamber- lain on two successive days in January, 1901: } Lord Rosebery spoke as follows: “<* * * Thewar I regard with apprehen- sion is the war of trade which is unmista- kably upon us. * * * When I look round me I cannot blind my eyes to the fact that so far we can predict anything of the twentieth century on which we have now entered, it is that it will be one of acut- est international conflict in point of trade. SCIENCE. 389 We were the first nation of the modern world to discover that trade was an absolute necessity. For that we were nicknamed a nation of shopkeepers ; but now every nation wishes to be a nation of shopkeepers, too, and I am bound to say that when we look at the character of some of these nations, and when we look at the intelligence of their preparations, we may well feel that it behooves us not to fear, but to gird up our loins in preparation for what is before Lusi Mr. Chamberlain’s views were stated in the following words: **T do not think it is necessary for me to say anything as to the urgency and ne- cessity of scientific training. * * * It is not too much to say that the existence of this country, as the great commercial nation, depends upon it. * * * It depends very much upon what we are doing now, at the beginning of the twentieth century, whether at its end we shall continue to maintain our supremacy or. even equality with our great commercial and manufac- turing rivals.’’ All this refers to our industries. We are not suffering because trade no longer follows the fiag as in the old days, but be- cause trade follows the brains, and our manufacturers are too apt to be careless in securing them. In one chemical estab- lishment in Germany, 400 doctors of science, the best the universities there can turn out, have been employed at different times in late years. In the United States the most successful students in the higher teaching centers are snapped up the mo- ment they have finished their course of training, and put into charge of large con- cerns, so that the idea has got abroad that youth is the password of success in Amer- ican industry. It has been forgotten that the latest produet of the highest scientific education must necessarily be young, and that it is the training and not the age 390 which determines his employment. In Britain, on the other hand, apprentices who can pay high premiums are too often pre- ferred to those who are well educated, and the old rule-of-thumb processes are pre- ferred to new developments—a conserva- tism too often depending upon the master’s own want of knowledge. I should not be doing my duty if I did not point out that the defeat of our indus- tries one after another, concerning which both Lord Rosebery and Mr. Chamberlain express their anxiety, is by no means the only thing we have to consider. The mat- ter is not one which concerns our industrial classes only, for knowledge must be pur- sued for its own sake, and since the full life of a nation with a constantly imereas- ing complexity, not only of industrial, but of high national aims, depends upon the universal presence of the scientific spirit— in other words, brain power—our whole na- tional life is involved. THE NECESSITY FOR A BODY DEALING WITH THE ORGANIZATION OF SCIENCE. The present awakening in relation to the nation’s real needs is largely due to the warnings of men of science. But Mr. Balfour’s terrible Manchester picture of our present educational condition * shows that the warning which has been going on now for more than fifty years has not been forcible enough; but if my contention that other reorganizations besides that of our education are needed is well founded, and if men of science are to act the part of good citizens in taking their share in en- deavoring to bring about a better state of things, the question arises, has the neglect *“The existing educational system of this country is chaotic, is ineffectual, is utterly be- hind the age, makes us the laughing-stock of every advanced nation in Europe and America, puts us behind, not only our American cousins, but the German and the Frenchman and the Italian.”—Times, October 15, 1902. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 456. of their warnings so far been due to the way 10 which these have been given? Lord Rosebery, in the address to a Chamber of Commerce from which I have already quoted, expressed his opinion that such bodies do not exercise so much in- fluence as might be expected of them. But if commercial men do not use all the power their organization provides, do they not by having built up such an organization put us students of science to shame, who are still the most disorganized members of the community ? Here, in my opinion, we have the real reason why the scientifie needs of the na- tion fail to command the attention either of the public or of successive governments. At present, appeals on this or on that be- half are the appeals of individuals; science has no collective voice on the larger na- tional questions; there is no organized body which formulates her demands. During many years it has been part of my duty to consider such matters, and I have been driven to the conclusion that our ereat crying need is to bring about an or- ganization of men of science and all inter- ested in science, similar to those which prove so effective in other branches of hu- man activity. For the last few years I have dreamt of a Chamber, Guild, League, eall it what you will, with a wide and large membership, which should give us what, in my opinion, is so urgently needed. Quite recently I sketched out such an organiza- tion, but what was my astonishment to find that I had been forestalled, and by the founders of the British Association ! THE BRITISH ASSOCIATION SUCH A BODY. At the commencement of this address I pointed out that one of the objects of the Association, as stated by its founders, was ‘to obtain a more general attention to the objects of science and a removal of any SEPTEMBER 25, 1903.] disadvantages of a public kind which im- pede its progress.’ Everyone connected with the British As- sociation from its beginning may be con- gratulated upon the magnificent way in which the other objects of the Association have been carried out, but as one familiar with the Association for the last forty years, I cannot but think that the object to which I have specially referred has been too much overshadowed by the work done in connection with the others. A eareful study of the early history of the Association leads me to the belief that the function I am now dwelling on was strongly in the minds of the founders; but be this as it may, let me point out how ad- mirably the organization is framed to en- able men of science to influence publie opin- ion and so to bring pressure to bear upon Governments which follow public opinion. (1) Unlike all the other chief metropolitan societies, its outlook is not limited to any branch or branches of science. (2) We have a wide and numerous fellowship, in- cluding both the leaders and the lovers of science, in which all branches of science are and always have been included with the ut- most catholicity—a condition which ren- ders strong committees possible on any subject. (3) An annual meeting at a time when people can pay attention to the de- liberations, and when the newspapers can print reports. (4) The possibility of beat- ing up recruits and establishing local com- mittees in different localities, even in the King’s dominions beyond the seas, since the place of meeting changes from year to year, and is not limited to these islands. We not only, then, have a scientifie par- liament competent to deal with all matters, including those of national importance, re- lating to science, but machinery for in- fluencing all new councils and committees dealing with local matters, the functions of which are daily becoming more important. SCIENCE. 391 The machinery might consist of our cor- responding societies. We already have affiliated to us seventy societies with a mem- bership of 25,000; were this number in- creased so as to include every scientific so- ciety in the Empire, metropolitan and pro- vineial, we might eventually hope for a membership of half a million. I am glad to know that the Council is fully alive to the importance of giving im- petus to the work of the corresponding so- cieties. During this year a committee was appointed to deal with the question; and later still, after this committee had re- ported, a conference was held between this committee and the corresponding societies committee to consider the suggestions made, some of which will be gathered from the following extract: ‘“*Tn view of the increasing importance of science to the nation at large, your commit- tee desire to call the attention of the coun- cil to the fact that in the corresponding societies the British Association has gath- ered in the various centres represented by these societies practically all the scientific activity of the provinces. The number of members and associates at present on the list of the corresponding societies ap- proaches 25,000, and no organization is in existence anywhere in the country better adapted than the British Association for stimulating, encouraging and coordinating all the work being carried on by the seventy societies at present enrolled. Your committee are of opinion that further en- couragement should be given to these so- cieties and their individual working mem- bers by every means within the power of the association ; and with the object of keep- ing the corresponding societies in more per- manent touch with the Association they suggest that an official invitation on behalf of the Council be addressed to the societies through the corresponding societies com- mittee asking them to appoint standing 392 British Association sub-committees, to be elected by themselves with the object of dealing with all those subjects of investi- gation common to their societies and to the British Association committees, and to look after the general interests of science and scientific education throughout the prov- inces and provincial centers. * * * ““Your committee desire to lay special emphasis on the necessity for the extension of the scientific activity of the correspond- ing societies and the expert knowledge of many of their members in the direction of scientific education. They are of opin- ion that immense benefit would accrue to the country if the corresponding societies would keep this requirement especially in view with the object of securing adequate representation for scientific education on the Education Committees now being ap- pointed under the new Act. The educa- tional section of the Association having been but recently added, the corresponding societies have as yet not had much oppor- tunity for taking part in this branch of the Association’s work; and in view of the re- organization in education now going on all over the country your committee are of opinion that no more opportune time is likely to occur for the influence of scientific organizations to make itself felt as a real factor in national education. * * *”’ I believe that if these suggestions or any- thing like them—for some better way may be found on inquiry—are accepted, great good of science throughout the Empire will come. Rest assured that sooner or later such a guild will be formed because it is needed. It is for you to say whether it shall be, or form part of, the British Asso- ciation. We in this Empire certainly need to organize science as much as in Germany they find the need to organize a navy. The German Navy League, which has branches even in our Colonies, already has a member- SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 456. ship of 630,000, and its income is nearly 20,0001. a year. A British Science League of 500,000 with a sixpenny subscription would give us 12,0001. a year, quite enough to begin with. I for one believe that the British Asso- ciation would be a vast gainer by such an expansion of one of its existing functions. Increased authority and prestige would fol- low its increased utility. The meetings would possess a new interest; there would be new subjects for reports; missionary work less needed than formerly would be replaced by efforts much more suited to the real wants of the time. This magnificent, strong and complicated organization would become a living force, working throughout the year, instead of practically lying idle, useless and rusting for 51 weeks*out of the 52 so far as its close association with its members is concerned. If this suggestion in any way commends itself to you, then when you begin your work in your sections or general committee see to it that a body is appointed to inquire how the thing can be done. Remember that the British Association will be as much weakened by the creation of a new body to do the work I have shown to have been in the minds of its founders as I believe it will be strengthened by becomong com- pletely effective in every one of the direc- tions they indicated, and for which effec- tiveness we their successors are indeed re- sponsible. The time is appropriate for such a reinforcement of one of the wings of our organization, for we have recently included Education among our sections. There is another matter I should like to see referred to the committee I have spoken of, if it please you to appoint it. The British Association, which as I have al- ready pointed out is now the chief body in the Empire which deals with the totality of science, is, I believe, the only organiza- SEPTEMBER 25, 1903.] tion of any consequence which is without a charter, and which has not His Majesty the King as patron. THE FIRST WORK OF SUCH AN ORGANIZATION. I suppose it is my duty after I have sug- gested the need of organization to tell you my personal opinion as to the matters where we suffer most in consequence of our lack of organization at the present time. Our position as a nation, our success as merchants, are in peril chiefly—dealing with preventable causes—because of our lack of completely efficient universities, and our neglect of research. This research has a double end. A professor who is not learning can not teach properly or arouse enthusiasm in his students; while a student of any thing who is unfamiliar with re- search methods, and without that training which research brings, will not be in the best position to apply his knowledge in after life. From neglect of research comes imperfect education and a small output of new applications and new knowledge to re- invigorate our industries. From imperfect education comes the unconcern touching scientific matters, and the too frequent absence of the scientific spirit, in the nation generally from the court to the parish council. I propose to deal as briefly as I can with each of these points. UNIVERSITIES. I have shown that so far as our industries are concerned, the cause of our failure has been run to earth; it is fully recognized that it arises from the insufficiency of our universities both in numbers and efficiency, so that not only our captains of industry, but those employed on the nation’s work generally, do not secure a training similar to that afforded by other nations. No addi- tional endowment of primary, secondary SCIENCE. 393 or technical instruction will mend matters. This is not merely the opinion of men of science ; our great towns know it, our Min- isters know it. It is sufficient for me to quote Mr. Chamberlain :— “Tt is not everyone who can, by any possibility, go forward into the higher spheres of education; but it is from those who do that we have to look for the men who, in the future, will carry high the flag of this country in commercial, scientific and economic competition with other na- tions. At the present moment, I believe there is nothing more important than to supply the deficiences which separate us from those with whom we are in the closest competition. In Germany, in America, in our own colony of Canada and in Australia, the higher education of the people has more support from the Government, is carried further, than it is here in the old country; and the result is that in every profession, in every industry, you find the places taken by men and by women who have had a university education. And I would like to see the time in this country when no man should have a chance for any occupation of the better kind, either in our factories, our workshops or our counting-houses, who could not show proof that, in the course of his university career, he had deserved the position that was offered to him. What is it that makes a country? Of course you may say, and you would be quite right, “The general qualities of the people, their resolution, their intelligence, their pertinacity, and many other good qualities.’ Yes; but that is not all, and it is not the main creative feature of a great nation. The greatness of a nation is made by its greatest men. It is those we want to edu- cate. It is to those who are able to go, it may be, from the very lowest steps in the ladder, to men who are able to devote their 394 time to higher education, that we have to look to continue the position which we now occupy as, at all events, one of the greatest nations on the face of the earth. And, feeling as I do on these subjects, you will not be surprised if I say that I think the time is coming when Governments will give more attention to this matter, and perhaps find a little more money to forward its interests’? (Times, November 6, 1902). Our conception of a university has changed. University education is no longer regarded as the luxury of the rich which concerns only those who ean afford to pay heavily for it. The Prime Minister in a recent speech, while properly pointing out that the collective effect of our public and secondary schools upon British char- acter can not be overrated, frankly ac- knowledged that the boys of seventeen or eighteen who have to be educated in them ‘do not care a farthing about the world they live in except in so far as it concerns the ericket-field or the football-field or the river.’ On this ground they are not to be taught science, and hence, when they pro- ceed to the university, their curriculum is limited to subjects which were better taught before the modern world existed, or even Galileo was born. But the science which these young gentlemen neglect, with the full approval of their teachers, on their way through the school and the uni- versity to polities, the Civil Service, or the management of commercial concerns, is now one of the great necessities of a nation, and our universities must become as much the insurers of the future progress as battle- ships are the insurers of the present power of States. In other words, university competition between States is now as potent: as competition in building battleships, and it is on this ground that our university con- ditions become of the highest national con- cern and, therefore, have to be referred to SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 456. here, and all the more because our indus- tries are not alone in question. WHY WE HAVE NOT MORE UNIVERSITIES. Chief among the causes which have brought us to the terrible condition of in- feriority as compared with other nations in which we find ourselves are our careless- ness in the matter of education and our false notions of the limitations of State functions in relation to the conditions of modern civilization. Time was when the Navy was largely a matter of private and local effort. Wil- liam the Conqueror gave privileges to the Cinque Ports on the condition that they furnished fifty-two ships when wanted. In the time of Edward III., of 730 sail en- gaged in the siege of Calais, 705 were ‘peo- ple’s ships.’’ All this has passed away; for our first line of defence we no longer depend on private and local effort. Time was when not a penny was spent by the State on elementary education. Again, we no longer depend upon private and local effort. The navy and primary education are now recognized as properly calling upon the public for the necessary financial sup- port. But when we pass from primary to ~ university education, instead of State en- dowment we find State neglect; we are in a region where it is nobody’s busimess to see that anything is done. We in Great Britain have thirteen uni- versities competing with 134 State and pri- vately endowed in the United States and twenty-two State endowed in Germany. I leave other countries out of consideration for lack of time, and I omit all reference to higher institutions for technical train- ing, of which Germany alone possesses nine of university rank, because they are less im- portant; they instruct rather than educate, and our want is education. The German State gives to one university more than the British Government allows to all the SEPTEMBER 25, 1903.] universities and university colleges in Eng- land, Ireland, Scotland, and Wales put to- gether. These are the conditions which regulate the production of brain-power in the United States, Germany, and Britain respectively, and the excuse of the Gov- ernment is that this is a matter for private efforf. Do not our Ministers of State know that other civilized countries grant efficient State aid, and further, that private effort has provided in Great Britain less than 10 per cent. of the sum thus furnished in the United States in addition to State aid? Are they content that we should go under in the great struggle of the modern world because the Ministers of other States are wiser, and because the individual citizens of another country are more generous, than our own? If we grant that there was some excuse for the State’s neglect so long as the higher teaching dealt only with words, and books alone had to be provided (for the streets of London and Paris have been used as class rooms at a pinch), it must not be for- gotten that during the last hundred years not only has knowledge been enormously increased, but things have replaced words, and fully equipped laboratories must take the place of books and class rooms if uni- versity training worthy of the name is to be provided. There is much more differ- ence in size and kind between an old and new university than there is between the old caravel and a modern battleship, and the endowments must follow suit. What are the facts relating to private en- dowment in this country? In spite of the munificence displayed by a small number of individuals in some localities, the truth must be spoken. In depending in our country upon this form of endowment, we are trusting to a broken reed. If we take the twelve English university colleges, the forerunners of universities unless we are to perish from lack of knowledge, we find that private effort during sixty years has found SCIENCE. 395 less than 4,000,0001., that is, 2,000,000I. for buildings and 40,0001. a year income. This gives us an average of 166,000l. for buildings and 3,3001. for yearly income. What is the scale of private effort we have to compete with in regard to the American universities ? In the United States, during the last few years, universities and colleges have re- ceived more than 40,000,0001. from this source alone; private effort supplied nearly 7,000,0001. in the years 1898-1900. Next consider the amount of State aid to universities afforded in Germany. The buildings of the new University of Strass- burg have already cost nearly a million; that is, about as much as has yet been found by private effort for buildings in Manches- ter, Liverpool, Birmingham, Bristol, New- castle and Sheffield. The Government an- nual endowment of the same German uni- versity is more than 49,0001. This is what private endowment does for us in England, against State endowment in Germany. But the State does really concede the principle; its present contribution to our universities and colleges amounts to 155,- 6001. a year; no capital sum, however, is taken for buildings. The State endow- ment of the University of Berlin in 1891-2 amounted to 168,777. When, then, we consider the large endow- ments of university education both in the United States and Germany, it is obvious that State aid only can make any valid competition possible with either. The more we study the facts, the more statistics are gone into, the more do we find that we, to a large extent, lack both of the sources of endowment upon one or other or both of which other nations depend. We are be- tween two stools, and the prospect is hope- less without some drastic changes. And first among these, if we intend to get out of the present slough of despond, must be 396 the giving up of the idea of relying upon private effort. That we lose most where the State does least is known to Mr. Chamberlain, for in his speech, to which I have referred, on the University of Birmingham, he said: “‘As the importance of the aim we are pursuing becomes more and more impressed upon the minds of the people, we may find that we shall be more generously treated by the State.’’ Later still, on the occasion of a visit to University College School, Mr. Chamber- lain spoke as follows: : “When we are spending, as we are, many - millions—I think it is 13,000,0001.—a year qn primary education, it certaily seems as if we might add a little more, even a few tens of thousands, to what we give to Uni- versity and secondary education’’ (Times, November 6, 1902). To compete on equal grounds with other nations we must have more universities. But this is not all—we want a far better endowment of all the existing ones, not for- getting better opportunities for research on the part of both professors and students. Another crying need is that of more pro- fessors and better pay. Another is the re- duction of fees; they should be reduced to the level in those countries which are com- peting with us, to say, one-fifth of their present rates, so as to enable more students in the secondary and technical schools to complete their education. In all these ways, facilities would be af- forded for providing the highest imstruc- tion to a much greater number of students. At present there are almost as many pro- fessors and instructors in the universities and colleges of the United States as there are day students in the universities and col- leges of the United Kingdom. Men of science, our leaders of industry, and the chiefs of our political parties all agree that our present want of higher edu- SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. XVIII. No. 456. cation—in other words, properly equipped universities—is heavily handicapping us in the present race for commercial supremacy, because it provides a relatively inferior brain-power which is leading to a relatively reduced national mcome. The facts show that in this country we can not depend upon private effort to put matters right. How about local effort? Anyone who studies the statistics of mod- ern municipalities will see that it is im- possible for them to raise rates for the building and upkeep of universities. The buildings of the most modern uni- versity in Germany have cost a million. For upkeep the yearly sums found, chiefly by the State, for German universities of different grades, taking the imcomes of seven out of the twenty-two universities aS examples, are: UstaClassraswcvr ewe Berlin....... 3 Rh an Qnd Class........... GHtneeh |. 56,000 SrdyClassr wii teee: cous \ 48,000 4th: Class. ... 14.24. wee }. 37,000 Thus if Leeds, which is to have a uni- versity, is contene with the 4th class Ger- man standard, a rate must be levied of 7d. in the pound for yearly expenses, independ- ent of all buildings. But the facts are that our towns are already at the breaking strain. During the last fifty years, in spite of enormous increases in rateable values, the rates have gone up from about 2s. to about 7s. in the pound for real local pur- poses. But no university can be a merely loeal institution. NorMAn Lockyer. (To be concluded.) MENDEL’S LAW OF HEREDITY.* Wuar will doubtless rank as one of the great discoveries in biology, and in the * This paper was originally published in part in the Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Vol. 38, No. 18, pp. 535-548, Janu- ary, 1903. SEPTEMBER 25, 1903.] study of heredity perhaps the greatest, was made by Gregor Mendel,an Austrian monk, in the garden of his cloister, some forty years ago. The discovery was announced in the proceedings of a fairly well-known scientific society, but seems to have at- tracted little attention and to have been soon forgotten. The Darwinian theory then occupied the center of the scientific stage and Mendel’s brilliant discovery was all but unnoticed for a third of a cen- tury. Meanwhile the discussion aroused by Weismann’s germ-plasm theory, in partic- ular. the idea of the non-inheritance of ac- quired characters, had put the scientific public into a more receptive frame of mind. Mendel’s law was rediscovered in- dependently by three different botanists engaged in the study of plant-hybrids—de Vries, Correns and Tschermak—in the year 1900. It remained, however, for a zoologist, Bateson, two years later, to point out the full importance and the wide appli- eability of the law. Since then the Men- delian discoveries have attracted the atten- tion of biologists generally. Accordingly a brief statement of their underlying princi- ples may not be without interest to others also. 1. The Law of Dominance.—When mating occurs between two animals or plants differing in some character, the off- spring frequently all exhibit the character of one parent only, in which ease that character is said to be ‘dominant.’ Thus, when white mice are crossed with gray mice, all the offspring are gray, that color character being dominant. The character. which is not seen in the immediate off- spring is called ‘recessive,’ for though un- seen it is still present in the young, as we shall see. White, in the instance given, is the recessive character. The principle of heredity just stated may be ealled the law of dominance. The first instance of it dis- covered by Mendel related to the cotyle- SCIENCE. 397 don-color, in peas obtained by crossing dif- ferent garden varieties. Yellow color of cotyledons was found to be dominant over green; likewise, round smooth form of seed was found to.be dominant over angular, wrinkled form; and violet color of blos- soms, over white color. Other illustrations might be mentioned both among animals and among plants, but these will suffice. 2. Peculiar Hybrid Forms.—The law of dominance is not of universal applieabil- ity; Mendel does not so declare, though some of his critics have thus interpreted him. In many eases the ecross-bred off- spring possess a character intermediate between those of the parents. This Mendel found to be true when varieties of peas differmg in height were crossed. Again, the ecross-breds may possess what appears to be an intensification of the char- acter of.one parent, as when in crossing dwarf with tall peas the hybrid plant is taller than either parent, or as when, in crossing a brown-seeded with a white- seeded variety of bean, the offspring bear beans of a darker brown than those of the brown-seeded parent. Thirdly, the cross-bred may have a char- acter entirely different from that of either parent. Thus a cross between spotted, black-and-white mice, and albino mice, produces commonly mice entirely gray in color, like the house-mouse. Again, in crossing beans, a variety having yellowish- brown seeds crossed with a white-seeded variety yields sometimes black-mottled seed, a character possessed by neither parent. These three conditions may be grouped together by saying—the hybrid often pos- sesses a character of its own, instead of the pure character of one parent, as is true in cases of complete dominance. The hybrid character may approximate that of one parent or the other, or it may be different from both. There is no way of predicting 398 what the hybrid character in a given cross will be. It can be determined only by ex- periment, but it is always the same for the same cross, provided the parents are pure. Often the hybrid form resembles a sup- posed ancestral condition, in which case it is commonly designated a reversion. II- lustrations are the gray hybrid mice, which are indistinguishable in appearance from the house-mouse, and slate-colored pigeons resulting from crossing white with buff pigeons. 3. Purity of the Germ-cells.—The great discovery of Mendel is this: The hybrid, whatever its own character, produces ripe germ-cells which bear only the pure char- acter of one parent or the other. Thus, when one parent has the character A, and the other the character. B, the hybrid will have the character AB, or in cases of simple dominance, A(B)* or B(A). But what- ever the character of the hybrid may be, its germ-cells, when mature, will bear either the character A or the character B, but not both; and As and Bs will be pro- duced in equal numbers. This perfectly simple principle is known as the law of ‘segregation,’ or the law of the ‘purity of the germ-cells.” It bids fair to prove as fundamental to a right understanding of the facts of heredity as is the law of defi- nite proportions in chemistry. From it follow many important consequences. A first consequence of the law of purity of the germ-cells is polymorphism of the second and later hybrid generations. The individuals of the first hybrid generation are all of one type, provided the parent individuals were pure. Hach has a char- acter resulting from the combination of an A with a B, let us say AB. [In eases of dominance it would more properly be ex- pressed by A (B) or B (A).] But in the next generation three sorts of combinations *The parenthesis is used to indicate a reces- sive character not visible in the individual. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVILL No. 456. are possible, since each parent will furnish As and Bs in equal numbers. The possible combinations are AA, AB and BB. The first sort will consist of pure As and will breed true to that character ever after- ward, unless erossed with individuals having a different character. Similarly, the third sort will consist of pure Bs and will breed true to that character. But the second sort, AB, will consist of hybrid in- dividuals, like those of which the first hy- brid generation was exclusively composed. If, as supposed, germ-cells, A and B, are produced in equal numbers by hybrids of both sexes, and unite at random in fertili- zation, combinations AA, AB and BB should oceur in the frequencies, 1: 2:1. For in unions between two sets of gametes, each A+B, there is one chance each for the combinations AA and BB, but two chances for the combination AB. If the three forms AA (or simply A), AB and B are all different in appearance, it will be a very simple matter in an ex- periment to count those of each class and determine whether they occur in the theo- retical proportions, 1:2:1. One such case has been observed by Bateson ( :02, p. 183) among Chinese primroses (Primula simen- sis). An unfixable hybrid variety known as ‘giant lavender,’ bearing flowers of a lavender color, was produced by crossing TABLE I. Characters, =~ i AB. B. Plants bearing Flowers in Color} Magents | eaves White. 1901, 19 27 14 1901, 9 20 9 1902, 12 | 23 11 1902, 14 | 26 11 Mobals\ saga. we ae | 54 | 96 45 _ Per cent. of whole.....| 29 | 49+ 22 a magenta red with a white flowering variety tinged faintly with pink. By seed the hybrid constantly produces plants ‘SEPTEMBER 25, 1903.] bearing magenta red and white flowers respectively as well as other plants bear- ing lavender flowers. The numerical pro- portions observed in two successive seasons are shown in Table I. The observed num- bers, it will be seen, are quite close to the theoretical 1:2:1. In eases wherein the hybrid is indis- tinguishable from one of the parent forms, a. e., in eases of complete dominance of TABLE II. HEREDITY OF COTYLEDON-COLOR AMONG CROSS-BRED PEAS. Parents int ee ogee Gen. 11. | Gen. 111. | Gen. Iv. G AGi.<.s.és0 Gen. I. | | | | ana | ¥(G) sat | one parental character, only two eate- gories of offspring will be recognizable and these will be numerically as 3:1. But further breeding will allow the separation of the larger group into two subordinate classes—first, individuals bearing only the dominant character; secondly, hybrids; that is, into groups A and A(B), which will be numerically as 1:2 Observed results are in this ease also very close to theory. Mendel, by cross- ing yellow with green peas, obtained, as we have seen, only yellow (hybrid) seed. Plants raised from this seed bore in the same pods both yellow seed and green seed in the ratio 3:1. (See Table II.) Under self-fertilization, the green seed produced in later generations green seed only. It bore only the recessive character. Of the yellow seeds, one in three produced only yellow offspring, 7. e., contained only the dominant character; but two out of three proved to be hybrid, producing both green and yellow seed, as did the hybrids of the SCIENCE. 399 preceding generation. These are precisely the theoretical proportions, A +- 2 A(B) +B. In the case of mice, it has been shown independently by Cuenot (:02) and by the writer’s pupil, Mr. G. M. Allen, that the second hybrid generation, obtained by crossing gray with white mice, consists of gray mice and white mice approximately in the ratio 3:1. (See Table III.) The white are pure recessives, producing only white offspring, when bred inter se. What portion of the grays are pure dominants has not yet been determined with precision, but we may confidently expect that it will prove to be not far from 1 in 3. TABLE III. HEREDITY OF COAT-COLOR AMONG CROSS-BRED MICE OBTAINED BY Mating WHITE Mice (W) witH GRAy Mice (G). Parents : ____ Offspring. eB Ceres ten & Gen. II. Gen. IIT. Wiis RW coer | ...W | 1W G(W){ | (2G(W) | 2 fecras | | |3 1G G A LEA NOG cohen cesl ie A further test of the correctness of Mendel’s hypothesis of the purity of the germ-cells and of their production in equal numbers, is afforded by back-crossing of a hybrid with one of the parental forms. For example, take a case of simple domi- nance, as of cotyledon-color in peas or coat-color in mice. We have here char- acters D (dominant) and R (recessive). The first generation hybrids will all be D(R). Any one of them _ back-crossed with the recessive parent will produce fifty per cent. of pure recessive offspring and fifty per cent. of hybrids. For the hybrid produces germ-cells D+R The recessive parent produces germ- COL ae atte sprain ara siete niet tense" R+R The possible combinations are.... 2D(R) +2R 400 This case has been tested for peas and for mice and found to be substantially as stated. We have thus far considered only cases of ecross-breeding between parents differ- ing in a single character. We have seen that in such cases, no new forms, except the unstable hybrid form, are produced. But when the parent forms crossed differ in two or more characters, there will be produced in the second and later hybrid generations individuals possessing new combinations of the characters found in the parents; indeed, all possible combina- tions of those characters will be formed, and in the proportions demanded by chance. Thus when parents are crossed which differ in two respects, A and B, let us designate the dominant phase of these characters by A, B, the recessive phase by a, b. The immediate offspring resulting from the cross will all be alike, AB(ab),* but the second and later genera- tions of hybrids will contain the stable, 2. e., pure classes, AB, Ab, aB, ab, in addi- tion to other (unstable or still hybrid) forms, namely, AB(ab), AB(b), A(a)B, A(a)b and aB(b). Im every sixteen second-generation offspring there will be, on the average, one representing each of the stable combinations. Two of the stable combinations will be identical with the parent forms, the other two will be new. The remaining twelve individuals will be hybrid in one or both characters. An illustration may help to make this ease clear. Among domesticated guinea- pigs, as among mice and rabbits, albinism is recessive with respect to pigmented coat. Further, there occur among guinea-pigs in- dividuals known as ‘Abyssinians,’ whose *This is Mendel’s use of lower-case letters to designate recessive characters, with which I have combined the use of a parenthesis when a charac- ter by nature recessive is not visible in the indi- vidual. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. XVIII. No. 456. coat presents a curious rough appearance, for the reason that the hair stands out stiffly from the body in a number of ‘cow- licks’ or rosettes. In crosses the Abyssinian or rough coat regularly dominates over the normal or smooth coat.. Now let us consider what happens when a cross is made involving both these pairs of Men- delian characters, albinism vs. pigmented coat, and smooth vs. rough coat. If a white Abyssinian is bred to a pigmented smooth guinea-pig, the young are without exception pigmented and rough, these being the dominant members of the two pairs of characters. But the young of course contain in a latent condition the two recessive characters, white coat and smooth coat, which fact may be indicated by designating them as already suggested, AB(ab) [A, a referring to the rough or smooth character of the coat and B, b to its color]. These primary hybrids, if bred inter se, will produce young of four different sorts, viz., rough pigmented, rough white, smooth pigmented and smooth white. A certain number of the animals of each sort will breed true, 2. e., will produce only their own sort when mated to animals like themselves. Theoretically there should be one pure individual of each of the four sorts in a total of sixteen young. The four pure individuals answer to the classes AB, Ab, aB, ab already mentioned. But, besides these pure individuals, there will occur in three of the four classes impure or hybrid individuals, which will transmit to some of their young the domi- nant character or characters which they themselves possess, but to others of their young the corresponding recessive char- acter or characters. Only the class of smooth white animals (of which there should be one in sixteen young) contains none but pure individuals, for they bear SEPTEMBER 25, 1903.] the two recessive characters (ab), and so conceal no hidden recessives. They may at once be set aside as pure. But in the other three classes nothing but actual breeding tests will serve to show which individuals - are pure and which impure or hybrid. To each pure individual possessing one domi- nant and one recessive character there will be two others, exactly like it in ap- pearance, but hybrid in one pair of char- acters. This statement applies to the two classes, _ rough-white and smooth-pig- mented, in which the impure individuals would be designated A(a)b and aB(b) respectively. Such impure animals bred inter se would produce, in the ease of rough-white parents, both rough-white and smooth-white offspring, and in the case of smooth-pigmented parents, both smooth- pigmented and smooth-white offspring. In the class of rough-pigmented second- generation offspring, which combines the two dominant characters, there will be to each pure individual (AB) eight which are impure in one or both characters. Two of the eight will be hybrid in one character only, as in the rough vs. smooth charac- ter they form the class A(a)B; two other individuals will be hybrid in the other character, albino vs. pigmented, forming the class AB(b); while the re- maining four will be hybrid in both char- acters, exactly like the entire first genera- tion of offspring, AB(ab). The task of the practical breeder who seeks to ‘establish’ or ‘fix’ a new variety, produced by cross-breeding, in a ease involv- ing two variable characters, is simply the isolation and propagation of that one in each sixteen of the second-generation off- spring which will be pure as regards the desired combination of characters. Men- del’s discovery by putting the breeder in possession of this information enables him to attack his problem systematically, with SCIENCE. 401 confidence in the outcome, whereas hitherto his work, important and fascinating as it is, has consisted largely of groping for a treasure in the dark. The greater the number of separately variable characters involved in a cross, the greater will be the number of new combina- tions obtainable; the greater, too, will be the number of individuals which it will be necessary to raise in order to secure all the possible combinations; and the greater, again, will be the difficulty of isolating the pure, 7. e., stable forms from such as are similar to them in appearance but still hybrid in one or more characters. Mendel has generalized these statements substan- tially as follows: In cases of complete dominance, when the number of differences between the parents is n, the number of different classes into which the second gen- eration of offspring fall will be 3", of which 2" will be pure (stable); the re- mainder will be hybrid, though indis- tinguishable from pure individuals. The smallest number of individuals which in the second hybrid generation will allow of one pure individual to each visibly differ- ent class will be 4". (See Table IV.) TABLE IV. iy iii o.| = its —a =i ——————————— Gets! aaa cpa | Mea ee woa| sewer | Sy | ow ogo) Aghd| Og |Seara Bed | peSS 38 30598 He | ssee2| se |asees Ben he ae a: fe: sige ar) ade 4" Sia Sal Lee A ile o 3 4 Tested by Mendel a 4 9 16 for peas and found a 4 8 27 64 correct. 4 16 81 256 5 32 243 =1024 Calculated. 6 64 729 | 4096 The law of Mendel reduces to an exact science the art of breeding in the case most carefully studied by him, that of entire 402 dominance. It gives to the breeder a new eoneeption of ‘purity.’ No animal or plant is ‘pure’ simply because it is de- scended from a long line of ancestors pos- sessing a desired combination of charac- ters; but any animal or plant is pure if it produces gametes of only one sort, even though its grandparents may among them- selves have possessed opposite characters. The existence of purity can be established with certainty only by suitable breeding tests (especially by crossing with reces- sives), but it may be safely assumed for any animal or plant descended from pa- rents which were like each other and had ‘been shown by breeding tests to be pure. Special Cases under the Law of Mendel. —It remains to speak of some special cases under the law of Mendel, which apparently are exceptions to one or another of the principles already stated, and which prob- ably result from exceptional conditions known to us imperfectly. These special cases have come to light in part through Mendel’s own work, in part through that of others. 1. Mosaic Inheritance.—It occasionally happens that in crosses which bring to- gether a pair of characters commonly re- lated as dominant and recessive, the two characters appear in the offspring in patches side by side, as in piebald animals and parti-colored flowers and fruits. The normal dominance apparently gives place in such eases to a balanced relationship between the alternative characters. What conditions give rise to such relationships is unknown, but when they are once secured they often prove to possess great stability, breeding true inter se. This, for example, is the case in spotted mice, which usually produce a large majority of spotted off- spring. The balanced relationship of char- acters possessed by the parents is trans- mitted to the germ-cells, which are, not as SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 456. in ordinary hybrid individuals D or R, but DR. This has been shown to be the case in spotted mice by Mr. Allen and my- self, in a paper published elsewhere. (Castle and Allen, :03.) 2. Stable Hybrid Forms.—This is a ease, in some respects similar to the last, which was familiar to Mendel (:70) himself. It sometimes happens, as we have seen, that the hybrid has a form of its own different from that of either parent. To such cases the law of dominance evidently does not apply. In a few cases—Hieracium hy- brids (Mendel), Salix hybrids (Wichura) —it has been found that the hybrid form does not break up in the second generation and produce individuals like the grand- parents, but breeds true to its own hybrid character. This can be explained only on one of two assumptions. Hither the germ- cells bear the two characters in the bal- -anced relationship, AB, as do those of spotted mice, or, of the two gametes which unite in fertilization, one invariably bears the character A, the other the character B. Of the two explanations, the former seems at present much the more probable. 3. Coupled Characters.— This is the phe- nomenon of correlation of characters in heredity. It is sometimes found that, in eross-breeding, two characters can not be separated. When one is inherited, the other is inherited also. Thus, in cross- ing different sorts of Datura (the James- town weed) it has been found that purple color of stem invariably goes with blue color of flowers, whereas green stems are constantly associated with white flowers. Again .in mice, rabbits and most other mammals, white hair and pink eyes com- monly occur together and may not be separated in heredity. Very rarely, how- ever, as I have observed, an otherwise per- fectly white guinea-pig has dark eyes; further the ordinary albino guinea-pig SepreMBER 25, 1903.] with pink eyes has usually smutty (brown- pigmented) ears, nose and feet; and a race of mice with pink eyes, though partially pigmented coat, has formed the basis of some recent important experiments in he- redity conducted by Darbishire (:02,: 03) at Oxford, England. These exceptional conditions probably represent stable coup- lings of a part only of the dominant char- acter (pigmented coat) with the recessive character (white coat), and are similar in kind to the DR character of spotted mice. Further, coupling may oceur between a number of characters greater than two, so that they form, to all intents and pur- poses, in heredity, one indissoluble com- pound character. Thus, Correns (:00 ) observed that in crosses between two species of stocks (Mathiola incana DC. and M. glabra DC.) the second generation hybrids showed reversion to one or the other of the parental forms in all three of the principal differential characters studied, viz., hairy or glabrous stems, violet or yellow-white flowers, and blue or yellow seed. A blue seed always produced a hoary plant bear- ing violet flowers; a yellow seed always produced a glabrous plant bearing yellow or white flowers. +. Disintegration of Characters.—This is the converse of the foregoing process. Not only may characters apparently simple be coupled together in heredity to form com- posite units of a higher order, but charac- ters which ordinarily behave as units may as a result of crossing undergo disintegra- tion into elements separately transmissible. Thus the gray coat-color of the house- mouse is always transmitted as a domin- ant unit in primary crosses with its white variéty; but in the second cross-bred gen- eration a certain number of black mice ap- pear, some or all of which are probably hybrids. For similar black mice obtained by crossing black-white with white mice SCIENCE. 403 have been shown, by breeding tests, to be hybrids, since on crossing with white mice they produce white mice, black mice, and, in one or two eases, gray mice also. niet josh oe a we iP oe 4 = ee Pes pea oy Tee Sgt ime bre Vo $ {jw Pelae | hie Ge cniigtet Dene is ea 7 p Le “arn wists ‘ li ae snechagh Ramdas i eye laatt ‘yiitian : ; Pde tas Trl, ama Ete ted arisrrae Lp dtpck ep act a pede tee) Fe ye irae eh ee * & ,! v ue a } Te gll bie ool st + ha x ‘ 4 . * ope ¢ Saye Ser Saber) ty $4 ¢19, Hy Spry & ‘ " ’ ts 4 ; pene ote att isiay pes v4 . r evi « cach aay aC) — re eee od Pre t ins, 3 eae ey cyte, Te O40 ix : “oe > Bes iy + ae pre ee A BeAr Tie es HN Aithd “sy ia ‘i hg ean MITCHEIM |. Jo. 22. gests = kim 559 Discussion and Correspondence :— The International Congress of Arts and Sci- ences: PROFESSOR HUGO MUNSTERBERG..... 559 Shorter Articles :— A Plea for Better English in Science: P. C. WARMAN. Contribution to the Craniology of the People of Scotland: A. Hrpricka. Vertebrate Paleontology at the Carnegie Museum: J. B. HATcHER.:...........2%. 568 Ethnological and Archeological Survey of Cam CORI REPO ARtn rs Mates fase Sioces ete oueve he 3 2 570 Scientific Notes and News................ 571 University and Educational News.......... 576 MSS. intended for publication and books, etc., intended for review should be sent to the responsible editor, Pro- fessor J. McKeen Cattell, Garrison-on-Hudson, N. Y. ADDRESS OF THE PRESIDENT OF THE SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY OF THE BRITISH ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE.* Ir is now nearly twenty years since anthropology attained to the dignity of be- ing awarded a special and independent section in this association, and I believe it is generally admitted that during this period the valuable nature of many of the contributions, the vigor of the discussions and the large attendance of members have amply justified the establishment and con- tinued existence of this section. While the multifarious and diverse na- ture of the subjects which are grouped under the term anthropology gives a variety and a breadth to our proceedings, which are very refreshing in this age of minute specialism, I feel that it adds very considerably to the difficulty of selecting a subject for a presidential address which will prove of general interest. A survey of the recent advances in our knowledge of the many important ques- tions which come within the scope of this section would cover too wide a field for the time at my disposal, while a critical ex- amination of the various problems that still await solution might expose me to the temptation of pronouncing opinions on sub- jects regarding which I could not speak with any real knowledge or experience. To * Southport meeting, 1903. 546 avoid such a risk I have decided to limit my remarks to a subject which comes within the range of my own special studies, and to invite your attention to a considera- tion of some problems arising from the variations in the development of the skull and the brain. Since the institution of this section the development, growth and racial peculiar- ities of both skull and brain, and the rela- tion of these two organs to each other, have attracted an ever-increasing amount, of attention. The introduction of new and improved methods for the study of the structure of the brain and the activity of an able band of experimenters have revolu- tionized our knowledge of the anatomy and physiology of the higher nerve centers. The value of the results thus obtained is greatly enhanced by the consciousness that they bear the promise of still greater ad- vances in the near future. If the results obtained by the craniologists have been less marked, this arises mainly from the nature of the subject, and is certainly not due to any lack of energy on their part. Our eraniological collections are continually in- creasing, and the various prehistoric skull- eaps from the Neanderthal to the Trinil still form the basis of interesting and valu- able memoirs. While the additions to our general knowl- edge of cerebral anatomy and physiology have been so striking, those aspects of these subjects which are of special anthropolog- ical interest have made comparatively slight progress, and can not compare in extent and importance with the advantages based upon a study of fossil and recent erania. These facts admit of a ready ex- planation. Brains of anthropological in- terest are usually difficult to procure and to keep, and require the use of special and complicated methods for their satisfactory examination, while skulls of the leading SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. XVIII. No. 461. races of mankind are readily collected, pre- served and studied. Hence it follows that the erania in our anthropological collec- tions are as numerous, well preserved and varied as the brains are few in number and defective, in their state of both preserva- tion and representative character. It may reasonably be anticipated that improved methods of preservation and the growing recognition on the part of anthropologists, museum curators and collectors of the im- portance of a study of the brain itself will to some extent at least remedy these de- fects; but so far as prehistoric man is con- cerned, wé can never hope to have any direct evidence of the condition of his higher nerve centers, and must depend for an estimate of his cerebral development upon those more or less perfect skulls which fortunately have resisted for so many ages the corroding hand of time. I presume we will all admit that the main value of a good collection of human skulls depends upon the light which they can be made to throw upon the relative development of the brains of different races. Such collections possess few, if any, brains taken from thése or corresponding skulls, and we are thus dependent upon the study of the skulls alone for an estimate of brain development. Vigorous attacks have not unfrequently been made upon the craniometrie systems at present in general use, and the elaborate tables, compiled with so much trouble, giv- ing the cireumference, diameters and corre- sponding indices of various parts of the skull, are held to afford but little informa- tion as to the real nature of skull varia- tions, however useful they may be for pur- poses of classification. While by no means prepared to express entire agreement with these critics, I must admit that ecraniol- ogists as a whole have concentrated their attention mainly on the external contour Octroser 30, 1903.] of the skull, and have paid comparatively little attention to the form of the cranial cavity. The outer surface of the cranium presents features which are due to other factors than brain development, and ex- amination of the cranial cavity not only gives us important information as to brain form, but by affording a comparison be- tween the external and internal surfaces of the cranial wall it gives a valuable clue to the real significance of the external config- uration. Beyond determining its capacity we can do but little towards an exact in- vestigation of the cranial cavity without making a section of the skull. Forty years ago Professor Huxley, in his work ‘On the Evidence of Man’s Place in Nature,’ showed the importance of a comparison of the basal with the vaulted portion of the skull, and maintained that until it should become ‘an opprobrium to an ethnological collection to possess a single skull which is not bisected longitudinally’ there would be ‘no safe basis for that ethnological eraniology which aspires to give the an- atomical characters of the crania of the different races of mankind.’ Professor Cleland and Sir William Turner have also insisted upon this method of examination, and only two years ago Professor D. J. Cunningham, in his presidential address to this section, quoted, with approval, the forcible language of Huxley. The curators of eraniological collections appear, how- ever, to possess an invincible objection to any such treatment of the specimens under their care. Even in the Hunterian Mu- seum in London, where Huxley himself worked at this subject, among several thou- sands of skulls, searcely any have been bi- sected longitudinally, or had the cranial cavity exposed by a section in any other direction. The method advocated so strongly by Huxley is not only essential to a thorough study of the relations of basi- SCIENCE. 547 cranial axis to the vault of the cranium and to the facial portion of the skull, but also permits of casts being taken of the cranial cavity; a procedure which, I would venture to suggest, has been too much neglected by craniologists. Every student of anatomy is familiar with the finger-like depressions on the inner surface of the cranial wall, which are described as the impress of the cerebral convolutions; but their exact distribution and the degree to which they are developed according to age, sex, race, ete., still remain to be definitely determined. Indeed, there appears to be a considerable difference of opinion as to the degree of approximation of the outer surface of the brain to the inner surface of the cranial wall. Thus the brain is frequently described as lying upon a water-bed, or as swimming in the cerebro-spinal fluid, while Hyrtle speaks of this fluid as a ‘ligamentum suspenso- rium’ for the brain. Such descriptions are misleading when applied to the relation of the cerebral convolutions to the skull. There are, it is true, certain parts of the brain which are surrounded and separated from the skull by a considerable amount of fluid. These, however, are mainly the lower portions, such as the medulla ob- longata and pons Varolii, which may be regarded as prolongations of the spinal cord into the cranial cavity. As they con- tain the centers controlling the action of the circulatory and respiratory organs, they are the most vital parts of the central nery- ous system, and hence need special protec- tion. They are not, however, concerned with the regulation of complicated volun- tary movements, the reception and storage of sensory impressions from lower centers, and the activity of the various mental proc- esses. These functions we must associate with the higher parts of the brain, and 548 especially with the convolutions of the cerebral hemispheres. If a cast be taken of the cranial cavity and compared with the brain which had previously been carefully hardened a sitw before removal, it will be found that the east not only corresponds in its general form to that of the brain, but shows a con- siderable number of the cerebral fissures and convolutions. This molding of the inner surface of the skull to the adjacent portions of the cerebral hemispheres is usually much more marked at the base and sides than over the vault. Since the specific gravity of the brain tissue 1S higher than that of the cerebro-spinal fluid, the cerebrum tends to sink towards the base and the fluid to accumulate over the vault; hence probably these differences admit of a simple mechanical explanation. Except under abnormal conditions, the amount of cerebro-spinal fluid between the skull and the cerebral convolutions is so small that from a east of the cranial cavity we can obtain not only a good picture of the general shape and size of the higher parts of the brain, but also various details as to the convolutionary pattern. This method has been applied with marked suc- cess to the determination of the characters of the brain in various fossil lemurs by Dr. Forsyth Major and Professor R. Burck- hardt, and Professor Gustay Schwalbe has made a large series of such casts from his eraniological collection in Strassburg. The interesting observations by Schwalbe* on the arrangement of the ‘impressiones digitate’ and ‘juga cerebralia,’ and their relation to the cerebral conyolutions in man, the apes and various other mammals, have directed special attention to a very interesting field of inquiry. As is well **Ueber die Beziehungen zwischen Innenform und Aussenform des Schiidels,’ Dewtsches Archiv fiir klinische Medicin, 1902. SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. XVIII. No. 461. known, the marked prominence at the base of the human skull, separating the anterior from the middle fossa, fits into the deep cleft between the frontal and temporal lobes of the brain, and Schwalbe has shown that this ridge is continued—of course in a much less marked form—along the inner surface of the lateral wall of the skull, so that a cast of the cranial cavity presents a shallow but easily recognized groove corresponding to the portion of the Sylvian fissure of the brain separating the frontal and parietal lobes from the tem- poral lobe. Further, there is a distinet de- pression for the lodgment of the inferior frontal convolution, and a cast of the middle cranial fossa shows the three ex- ternal temporal conyolutions. We must now turn to the consideration of the relations of the outer surface of the eranium to its inner surface and to the brain. This question has engaged the at- tention of experts as well as the ‘man in the street’ since the time of Gall and Spurzheim, and one might naturally sup- pose that the last word had been said on the subject. This, however, is far from be- ing the case. All anatomists are agreed that the essential function of the cranium is to form a box for the support and pro- tection of the brain, and it is generally con- ceded that during the processes of develop- ment and growth the form of the cranium is modified in response to the stimulus transmitted to it by the brain. In fact, it is brain growth that determines the form of the ¢ranium, and not the skull that molds the brain into shape. This belief, however, need not be accepted without some reservations. Even the brain may be con- ceived as being influenced by its immediate environment. There are probably periods of development when the form of the brain is modified by the resistance offered by its coverings, and there are certainly stages se Ocroser 30, 1903.] when the brain does not fully occupy the eranial cavity. At an early period in the phylogeny of the vertebrate skull the structure of the greater part of the cranial wall changes from membranous tissue into cartilage, the portion persisting as membrane being situ- ated near the median dorsal line. In the higher vertebrates the rapid and early ex- pansion of the dorsal part of the fore-brain is so marked that the cartilaginous growth fails to keep pace with it, and more and more of the dorsal wall of the cranium re- mains membranous, and subsequently ossi- fies to form membrane bones. Cartilage, though constituting a firmer support to the brain than membrane, does not possess the same capacity of rapid growth and ex- pansion. The head of a young child is relatively large, and its skull is distin- guished from that of an adult by the small size of the cartilaginous base of the cranium as compared with the membranous vault. The appearance of top-heaviness in the young skull is gradually obliterated as age advances, by the cartilage continuing slowly to grow after the vault has practically ceased to enlarge. These changes in the shape of the cranium are associated with corresponding alterations in that of the brain, and it appears to me that we have here an illustration of how the conditions of skull growth may modify the general form of the brain. Whatever may be the precise influences that determine skull and brain growth, there can be no doubt but that within cer- tain limits the external form of the era- nium serves as a trustworthy guide to the shape of the brain. Statements such as those by Dr. J. Deniker (‘The Races of Man,’ p. 53), ‘that the inequalities of the external table of the cranial walls have no relation whatever to the irregularities of the inner table, and still less have anything SCIENCE. 549 in common with the configuration of the various parts of the brain,’ are of too gen- eral and sweeping a character. Indeed, various observers have drawn attention to the fact that in certain regions the outer surface of the skull possesses elevations and depressions which closely correspond to de- finite fissures and convolutions of the brain. Many years ago Sir William Turner, who was a pioneer in eranio-cerebral topog- raphy, found that the prominence on the outer surface of the parietal bone, known to anatomists as the parietal eminence, was situated directly superficial to a convolu- tion of the parietal lobe of the brain, which he consequently very appropriately named ‘the convolution of the parietal eminence.’ Quite recently Professor G. Schwalbe has shown that the position of the third or inferior frontal convolution is indicated by a prominence on the surface of the cra- nium in the anterior part of the temple. This area of the brain is of special interest to all students of cerebral anatomy and physiology, since it was the discovery by the illustrious French anthropologist and physician, M. Broea, that the left inferior frontal convolution was the center for speech, that laid the scientific foundation of our present knowledge of localization of function in the cerebral cortex. This con- yolution is well known to be much more highly developed in man than in the an- thropoid apes, and the presence of a human cranial speech-bump is usually easily dem- onstrated. The faculty of speech, however, is such a complicated cerebral function that I would warn the ‘new’ phrenologist to be cautious in estimating the loquacity of his friends by the degree of prominence of this part of the skull, more particularly as there are other and more trustworthy methods of observation by which he can estimate this capacity. In addition to the prominences on’ the 550 outer surface of the cranium, correspond- ing to the convolutions of the parietal eminence and the left inferior frontal con- volution, the majority of skulls possess a shallow groove marking the position of the Sylvian point and the course of the hori- zontal limb of the Sylvian fissure. Below these, two other shallow oblique grooves in- dicate the line of the cerebral fissures which divide the outer surface of the temporal lobe into its three convolutions, termed superior, middle and inferior. Most of these cranial surface markings are partially obscured in the living body by the temporal muscle, but they are of interest as showing that in certain places there is a close corre- spondence in form between the external surface of the brain and that of the skull. There are, however, distinct limitations in the degree to which the various cerebral fissures and convolutions impress the inner surface of the cranial wall, or are repre- sented by imequalities on its outer aspect. Thus over the vault of the cranium the position of the fissure of Rolando and the shape of the cerebral convolutions in the so-called motor area, which lie in relation to this fissure, can not usually be detected from a cast of the cranial cavity, and are not indicated by depressions or elevations on the surface of the skull, so that the surgeons in planning the seats of opera- tions necessary to expose the various motor centers have to rely mainly upon certain linear and angular measurements made from points frequently remote from these centers. The cranium is not merely a box de- veloped for the support and protection of the brain, and more or less accurately molded in conformity with the growth of this organ. Its antero-lateral portions afford attachments to the muscles of masti- cation and support the jaws and teeth, while its posterior part is liable to vary SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 461. according to the degree of development of the muscles of the nape of the neck. Next to the brain the most important factor in determining cranial form is the condition of the organs of mastication—muscles, jaws and teeth. There is strong evidence in favor of the view that the evolution of man from microcephaly to macrocephaly has been associated with the passages from macrodontic to a microdontic condition. The modifications in the form of the era- nium due to the influence of the organs of mastication have been exerted almost en- tirely upon its external table; hence ex- ternal measurements of the cranium, as guides to the shape of the cranial cavity and indications of brain development, while fairly trustworthy in the higher races, become less and less so as we examine the skulls of the lower races, of prehistorie man and of the anthropoid apes. One of the most important measurements of the cranium is that which determines the relation between its length and breadth and thus divides skulls into long or short, together with an intermediate group neither distinctly dolichocephalic nor brachycephalic. These measurements are expressed by an index in which the length is taken as 100. If the proportion of breadth to length is eighty or upwards, the skull is brachycephalic ; if between seventy- five and eighty, mesaticephalic; and below seventy-five, dolichocephalic. Such a measurement is not so simple a matter as it might appear at first sight, and eraniol- ogists may themselves be classified into groups according as they have selected the nasion, or depression at the root of the nose, the glabella, or prominence above this depression, and the ophryon, a spot just above this prominence, as the anterior point from which to measure the length. In a young child this measurement would practically be the same, whichever of these OcToBER 30, 1903.] three points was chosen, and each point would be about the same distance from the brain. With the appearance of the teeth of the second dentition and the enlarge- ment of the jaws the frontal bone in the region of the eyebrows and just above the root of the nose thickens, and its outer table bulges forward so that it is now no longer parallel with the inner table. Be- tween these tables air cavities gradually ex- tend from the nose, forming the frontal sinuses. Although the existence and sig- nificance of these spaces and their influence on the prominence of the eyebrows were the subject of a fierce controversy more than half a century ago between the phrenologists and their opponents, it is only recently that their variations have been carefully investigated. The frontal sinuses are usually supposed to vary according to the degree of prom- inence of the glabella and the supra-orbital arches. This, however, is not the ease. Thus Schwalbe* ‘has figured a skull in which the sinuses do not project as high as the top of the glabella and supra-orbital prominences, and another in which they extend considerably above these projec- tions. Further, Dr. Logan Turner (‘The Accessory Sinuses of the Nose,’ 1901), who has made an extensive investigation into these cavities, has shown that in the aborig- inal Australian, in whom this region of the skull is unusually prominent, the frontal sinuses are frequently either absent or rudimentary. The ophryon has_ been selected by some eraniologists as the an- terior point from which to measure the length of the skull, under the impression that the frontal sinuses do not usually reach above the glabella. Dr. Logan Turner, however, found that out of 174 skulls in which the frontal sinuses were present, in ** Studien iiber Pithecanthropus erectus, Zeit- schrift fiir Morphologie und Anthropologie, Bd. I., 1899. SCIENCE. 551 130 the sinuses extended above the ophryon. In 71'skulls the depth of the sinus at the level of the ophryon varied from 2 mm. to 16 mm., the average being 5.2 mm., while in the same series of skulls the depth at the glabella varied from 3 mm. to 18 mm., with an average depth of 8.5 mm. It thus appears that the selection of the ophryon in preference to the glabella, as giving a more aecurate clue to the length of the brain, is based upon erroneous assumptions, and that neither point can be relied upon in the determination of the anterior limit of the cranial cavity. The difficulties of estimating the extent of the cranial cavity by external measure- ments and the fallacies that may result from a reliance upon this method are es- pecially marked in the case of the study of the prehistoric human ealvaria, such as the Neanderthal and the Trinil, and the skulls of the anthropoid apes. Statistics are popularly supposed to be capable of proving almost anything, and certainly if you allow eraniologists to select their own points from which to measure the length and breadth of the cranium, they will furnish you with tables of meas- urements showing that one and the same skull is dolichocephalic, mesaticephalie and brachyeephalic. Let us take as an illustra- tion an extreme case, such as the skull of an adult male gorilla. Its glabella and supra-orbital arches will be found to pro- ject forward, its zygomatic arches out- wards, and its transverse occipital crests backwards, far beyond the anterior, lateral and posterior limits of the cranial cavity. These outgrowths are obviously correlated with the enormous development of the mus- cles of mastication and those of the back of the neck. In a specimen in my posses- sion the greatest length of the cranium, i. €., from glabella to external occipital protuberance, is 195 mm., and the greatest 552 breadth, taken between the outer surfaces of the zygomatic processes of the temporal bone, is 172 mm., giving the marked brachycephalic index of 88.21. The zygo- matie processes, however, may reasonably be objected to as indicating the true breadth, and the side wall of the cranium just above the line where the root of’ this process springs from the squamous portion of the temporal bone will certamly be much nearer the cranial cavity. Measured in this situation, the breadth of the cranim is 118 mm., which gives a length-breadth mdex 60.51, and thus represents the skull as decidedly dolichocephalic. The transverse occipital crests and the point where these meet in the middle line to form the ex- ternal occipital protuberance are much more prominent in the male than in the - female gorilla, and the estimate of the length of the cranium in this male gorilla may be reduced to 160 mm. by selecting the base of the protuberance in place of its posterior extremity as the posterior end measurement. This raises the index to 73.75, and places the skull near the mesa- ticephalic group. At the anterior part of the skull the prominent glabella is sepa- rated from the inner table of the skull by large air sinuses, so that on a median sec- tion of the skull the distance from the gla- bella to the nearest part of the cranial cavity is 36 mm. We have here, therefore, another outgrowth of the cranial wall which im an examination of the external surface of the skull obseures the extent of the eranial cavity. Accordingly the glabella can not be selected as the anterior point from which to measure the length of the cranium, and must, like the zygomatic arches and occipital protuberance, be ex- eluded from our calculations if we desire to determine a true length-breadth index. The difficulty, however, is to select a def- inite point on the surface of the cranium SCIENCE. [N.S. Vox. XVIII. No. 461. to represent its anterior end, which will be free from the objections justly urged against the glabella. Schwalbe suggests the hinder end of the supra-glabellar fossa, which he states often corresponds to the beginning of a more or less distinctly marked frontal crest. I have found this point either difficult to determine or too far back. Thus in my male gorilla the poste- rior end of this fossa formed by the meeting of the two temporal ridges was 56 mm. be- hind the glabella, and only 24 mm. from the bregma, while in the female gorilla the temporal ridges do not meet, but there is a low median frontal ridge, which may be considered as bounding posteriorly the supra-glabellar fossa. This point is 22 mm. from the glabella, and between 50 mm. and 60 mm. in front of the bregma. I would suggest a spot in the median line of the supra-glabellar fossa which is erossed by a transverse line uniting the posterior borders of the external angular processes of the frontal bone. I admit this plan is not free from objections, but it possesses the advantages of being available for both male and female skulls. In my male skull the selection of this point diminishes the length of the cranium by 25 mm., thus reducing it to 137 mm. The breadth being calculated at 114 mm., the index is 83.21, and hence distinetly brachy- cephalic. The length of the cranial cavity is 118 mm. and the breadth 96 mm., and the length-breadth index is thus the brachy- cephalic one of 81.36. I have given these somewhat detailed references to the measurements of this gorilla’s skull because they show in a very clear and obvious manner that from an ex- ternal examination of the skull one might easily be misled as to the size and form of the cranial cavity, and that, in order to determine from external measurements the proportions of the cranial cavity, skul! OcroBeR 30, 1903.] outgrowths due to other factors than brain growth must be rigorously excluded. Fur- ther, these details will serve to emphasize the interesting fact that the gorilla’s skull is decidedly brachyeephalic. This charac- ter is by no means restricted to the gorilla, for it has been clearly proved by Virchow, Schwalbe and others that all the anthro- poid apes are markedly round-headed. Ever since the introduction by the illus- trious Swedish anthropologist Anders Ret- zius of a classification of skulls according to the proportions between their length and breadth, great attention has been paid to this peculiarity in different races of man- kind. It has been generally held that brachycephaly indicates a higher type of skull than dolichocephaly, and that the in- crease in the size of the brain in the higher > races has tended to produce a_brachy- cephalic skull. When the cranial walls are subject to excessive internal pressure, as in hydrocephalus, the skull tends to become distinctly brachycephalic, as a given ex- tent of wall gives a greater internal cavity in a spherical than in an oval form. In esti- mating the value of this theory as to the evolutionary line upon which the skull has traveled, it is obvious that the brachy- cephalic character of the skulls of all the anthropoid apes is a fact which requires consideration. Although an adult male gorilla such as I have selected presents in an extreme de- gree outgrowths from the cranial wall masking the true form of the eranial eav- ity, the same condition, though to a less marked extent, is met with in the human subject. Further, it is interesting to note that the length of the skull is more liable to be inereased by such growths than the breadth, since they occur especially over the lower part of the forehead and to a less degree at the back of the skull, while the side walls of the cranium in the region SCIENCE. 553 of its greatest breadth generally remain thin. Few, if any, fossils have attracted an equal amount of attention or given rise to such keen controversies as the Neander- thal and the Trinil skull-eaps. Accord- ing to some authorities, both these skull- caps are undoubtedly human, while others hold that the Neanderthal belongs to an extinct species of the genus Homo, and the Trinil is the remains of an extinct genus—Prthecanthropus erectus of Dubois —intermediate between man and the an- thropoids. One of the most obvious and easily recognized peculiarities of these skull-eaps is the very marked prominence of the supra-orbital arches. The glabella- occipital length of the Neanderthal is 204 mm., and the greatest transverse diameter, which is over the parietal region, is 152 mm.—an index of 74.51—while the much smaller Trinil ealvaria, with a length of 181 mm. and a breadth of 130 mm., has an index of 71.8. Both these skulls are there- fore slightly dolichocephalic. Schwalbe has corrected these figures by making re- ductions in their lengths on account of the frontal ‘outworks,’ so that he estimates the true length-breadth index of the Neander- thal as 80 and that of the Trinil as 75.5. These indices, thus raised about 5 per cent., are considered to represent approximately the length-breadth index of the cranial cavity. A comparison of the external and internal measurements of many recent skulls with prominent glabelle would, I suspect, show a greater difference than that ealeulated by Schwalbe for the Neanderthal and Trinil specimens. In a male skull, probably an aboriginal Australian, with a cranial capacity of 1227 e.em. I found that the glabella-occipital length was 189 mm., and the transverse diameter at the parieto- squamous suture 127 mm., which gives an index of 67.20 and makes the skull de- 504 cidedly dolichocephalic. The length of the eranial cavity, however, was 157 mm. and the breadth 121 mm. (an index of 77.07 and a difference of nearly 10 per cent.), so that while from external measure- ments the skull is distinetly dolichocephal- ic, the proportions of its cavity are such that it is mesaticephalic. It is probable that many skulls owe their dolichocephalic reputation simply to the prominence of the glabella and supra-orbital ridges. An excessive development of these structures is also liable to give the erroneous impres- sion of a retreating forehead. In the Aus- tralian skull just mentioned the thickness of the cranial wall at the glabella was 22 mm.; from this level upwards it grad- ually thinned until 45 mm. above the gla- bella it was only 6 mm. thick. When the bisected skull was placed in the horizontal position the anterior surface of the frontal bone sloped from the glabella upwards and distinetly backwards, while the posterior or cerebral surface was inclined upwards and forwards. In fact, the cranial cavity in this region was separated from the lower part of the forehead by a wedge-shaped area having its apex upwards and its base below at the glabella. The cranial wall opposite the glabella is not appreciably thicker in the Neanderthal calvaria than in the Australian skull to which I have already referred, and the form of the cranial cavity is not more masked by this prominence in the Neander- thal than in many of the existing races. Although the Neanderthal skull is by no means complete, the base of the cranium and the face bones being absent, still those parts of the cranial wall are preserved that are specially related to the portion of the brain which subserves all the higher mental processes. It includes the frontal, parietal and upper part of the occipital bones, with parts of the roof of the orbits in front, and SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 461. of the squamous division of the temporal bones at the sides. On its inner or cranial aspect there are markings by which the boundaries between the cerebrum and the cerebellum can be determined. In a profile view of such a specimen an inio-glabellar line can be drawn which will correspond very closely to the lower boundary of the cerebrum, and indicate a horizontal plane above which the vaulted portion of the skull must have contained nearly the whole of the cerebrum. Schwalbe* has devised a series of meas- urements to illustrate what he regards as essential differences between the Neander- thal skull-eap and the corresponding por- tion of the human skull. From the inio- elabellar line another is drawn at right angles to the highest part of the vault, and by comparing the length of these two lines we can determine the length-height index. According to Schwalbe, this is 40.4 in the Neanderthal, while the minimum in the human skull is 52. He further shows that the frontal portion of the vault, as repre- sented by a glabellar-bregmatic line, forms a smaller angle with the base or inio-gla- bellar line, and that a vertical line from the posterior end of the frontal bone (breg- ma) cuts the inio-glabellar further back than in the human subject. Professor King, of Galway, attached special impor- tance to the shape and proportions of the parietal bones, and more particularly to the fact that their mesial borders are shorter than the lower or temporal, whereas the re- verse is the case in recent man. This fea- ture is obviously related to the defective expansion of the Neanderthal vault, and Professor Schwalbe also attributes con- siderable significance to this peculiarity. Another distinctive feature of the Ne- ** Ueber die specifischen Merkmale des Neander- thalschiidels, Verhandl. der anatomischen Gesell- schaft im Bonn, 1901. OcToBeR 30, 1903.] anderthal skull is the relation of the orbits to the cranial wall. Schwalbe shows that its brain-case takes a much smaller share in the formation of the roof of the orbit than it does in recent man, and King pointed out that a line from the anterior inferior angle of the external orbital process of the frontal bone, drawn at right angles to the inio-glabellar line, passed in the Neander- thal in front of the cranial cavity, whereas in man such a line would have a consider- able portion of the frontal part of the brain-case anterior to it. From the combined results of these and other measurements Schwalbe arrives at the very important and interesting con- clusion that the Neanderthal skull pos- sesses a number of important peculiarities which differentiate it from the skulls of existing man, and show an approximation towards those of the anthropoid apes. He maintains that in recognizing with King* and Copet the Neanderthal skull as be- longing to a distinct species, Homo nean- derthalensis, he is only following the usual practice of zoologists and paleontologists, by whom specific characters are frequently founded upon much less marked differ- ences. He maintains that as the Neander- thal skull stands in many of its characters nearer to the higher anthropoids than to recent man, if the Neanderthal type is to be included under the term Homo sapiens, then this species ought to be still more ex- tended, so as to embrace the anthropoids. It is interesting to turn from a perusal of these opinions recently advanced by Schwalbe to consider the grounds on which Huxley and Turner, about forty years ago, opposed the view, which was then being advocated, that the characters of the Ne- anderthal skull were so distinct from those **The Reputed Fossil Man of the Neanderthal,’ Journal of Science, 1864. +‘ The Genealogy of Man,’ The American Nat- uralist, Vol. XXVII., 1893. SCIENCE. 555 of any of the existing races as to justify the recognition of a new species of the genus Homo. Huxley, while admitting that it was ‘the most pitheedid of human skulls,’ yet holds that it ‘is by no means so iso- lated as it appears to be at first, but forms in reality the extreme term of a series lead- ing gradually from it to the highest and best developed human erania.’ He states that ‘it is closely approached by certain Australian skulls and even more nearly by the skulls of certain ancient people who inhabited Denmark during the stone period.’ Turner’s* observations led him to adopt a similar view to that advanced by Huxley. He compared the Neander- thal calvaria with savage and British crania in the Anatomical Museum of the University of Edinburgh, and found amongst them specimens closely correspond- ing to the Neanderthal type. While yielding to no one in my admira- tion for the thoroughness and ability with which Schwalbe has conducted his elabo- rate and extensive investigations on this question, I must confess that in my opinion he has not sufficiently recognized the sig- nificance of the large cranial capacity of the Neanderthal skull in determining the zoological position of its owner, or made sufficient allowance for the great varia- tions in form which skulls undoubtedly human may present. The length and breadth of the Neander- thal calvaria are distinctly greater than in many living races, and compensate for its defect in height, so that it was capable of lodging a brain fully equal in volume to that of any existing savage races and at least double that of any anthropoid ape. A number of the characters upon which Schwalbe relies in differentiating the Ne- anderthal skull-cap are due to an appreci- **The Fossil Skull Controversy,’ Journal of Science, 1864. 506 able extent to the great development of the glabella and supra-orbital arches. Now these processes are well known to pre- sent very striking variations in existing human races. They are usually supposed to be developed as buttresses for the pur- pose of affording support to the large upper. jaw and enable it to resist the pressure of the lower jaw due to the contraction of the powerful muscles of mastication. These processes, however, are usually feebly marked in the microcephalic, prognathous and macrodont negro skull, and may be well developed in the macrocephalic and orthognathous skulls of some of the higher races. Indeed, their variations are too great and their significance too obscure for them to form a basis for the creation of a new species of man. Both Huxley and Turner have shown that the low vault of the Ne- anderthal calvaria can be closely paral- leled by specimens of existing races. If the characters of the Neanderthai ealvaria are so distinctive as to justify the recognition of a new species, a new genus ought to be made for the Trinil skull-cap. In nearly every respect it is distinctly lower in type than the Neanderthal, and yet many of the anatomists who have expressed their. opinion on the subject maintain that the Trinil specimen is distinctly human. Important and interesting as are the facts which may be ascertamed from a study of a series of skulls regarding the size and form of the brain, it is evident that there are distinct limits to the knowl- edge to be obtained from this source. Much additional information as to racial characters would undoubtedly be gained had we collections of brains at all corre- sponding in number and variety with the skulls in our museums. We know that as a rule the brains of the less civilized races are smaller, and the conyolutions and fis- sures simpler, than those of the more cul- SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. XVIII. No. 461. tured nations; beyond this but httle more is definitely determined. As the results of investigations in hu- man and comparative anatomy, physiology and pathology, we know that definite areas of the cerebral cortex are connected with the action of definite groups of muscles, and that the nervous impulses starting from the organs of smell, sight, hearmg and common sensibility reach defined cortical fields. All these, however, do not cover more than a third of the convoluted surface of the brain, and the remaining two thirds are still to a large extent a terra incognita so far as their precise function is con- cerned. Is there a definite localization of special mental qualities or moral tenden- cies, and if so, where are they situated? These are problems of extreme difficulty, but their interest and importance are diffi- eult to exaggerate. In the solution of this problem anthropologists are bound to take an active and important part. When they have collected information as to the rela- tive development of the various parts of the higher brain in all classes of mankind with the same thoroughness with which they have investigated the racial peculiarities of the skull, the question will be within a measurable distance of solution. JOHNSON SYMINGTON. SCIENTIFIC BOOKS. The Alchemist. By Bren Jonson, edited with introduction, notes and glossary by CHARLES Monrcomery Harnaway, Jr. New York, Henry Holt & Co. 1908. Pp. vi-+ 3738. 8yo. This comedy was first produced in 1610, and proved a most severe satire on alchemy and an effective exposure of many of the swindles associated with it; in this satisfac- tory edition Dr. Hathaway has given his readers a text based on the folio of 1616, to- gether with variants of several other early and rare editions. Prefixed to the text are sections on the his- tory and on the theory of alchemy; these \ OcroserR 30, 1903.] include its status in England at the period of the production of the play and narratives showing its adaptability to swindling credu- lous persons at all periods. The editor then points out the originality of Jonson and his slight indebtedness to previous writers; he also draws a picture of Simon Forman, a notorious London quack flourishing in Jon- son’s day, who probably furnished the author one of the characters of the play (Subtle). The editor gives many instances of the swindling operations in recent times by pre- tended alchemists, especially dwelling on the tricks of Morrell and Harris in New York, of Pinter in London, and of the Rey. Mr. Jer- negan, of Connecticut (in connection with the fraudulent extraction of gold from sea water), and he gives references to the daily press for particulars. Elsewhere he names the three principal branches of astrology and refers to some of the modern aspects of this pseudo science. In a note on Jonson ‘taking in of shaddows with a glass’ he writes of catop- tiomaney, and refers to the notorious Kelley who acted as ‘skryer’ for Dr. Dee, in Queen Elizabeth’s day. Following the text are one hundred pages of notes, partly taken from preceding editions, notably Gifford and Whalley; a bibliography of works consulted, in which one misses the names of Hermann Kopp (‘Geschichte der Chemie,’ 4 vols., 1843, ‘Die Alchemie in ailterer und neuerer Zeit,’ 2 vols., 1886), of William Johnson (‘ Lexicon chymicum,’ Lon- don, 1652), and the ‘Chymieall Dictionary,’ bound with Michael Sandivogius’ ‘ New Light of Alchemie’ (London, 1650), but perhaps these were not accessible to Dr. Hathaway. There is also a glossary of forty columns, and finally an index. Each section is marked by thorough work and painstaking study on the part of the editor; the glossary in par- ticular may be of much assistance in explain- ing archaic and obsolete terms in the alchem- ical writings of other authors than Jonson. The notes refer to passages in a variety of languages, show judicious selection and a wide acquaintance with literature. The deep study of alchemical jargon has familiarized SCIENCE. 557 the editor with incomprehensible gibberish to such an extent that he himself is not always perfectly clear. (See note on page 288, last three lines.) And he is sometimes tempted to substitute conjectures for more definite in- formation, especially in discussing the signifi- cation of impossible words. Dr. Hathaway shows the relations which Jonson’s comedy. bears to John Lyly’s ‘ Galla- thea,’ printed in 1592, to Gower’s and Chau- cer’s well-known poems, to Lydgate’s ‘ Secrees of old Philisoffers’ and to the principal metrical treatises on alchemy preserved by Elias Ashmole in his ‘ Theatrum Chemicum Britannicum’ (London, 1652), from which he gives many citations. The editor has been very successful in demonstrating that ‘Nothing in Jonson is done at random.’ The whole work is eredit- able to the editor, and for its typographical excellence to the publisher. Henry Carrineton Bourton. BLATCHLEY’S ORTHOPTERA OF INDIANA. Ix the Twenty-seventh Annual Report of the Department of Geology and Nat- ural Resources of Indiana, 1902, Mr. W. S. Blatchley, State has de- voted over 350 pages to the Orthoptera of his state, and under this modest title has yeologist, given us one of the best pieces of entomo- logical work that has come to us during the present year. Not only are all of the species known to the author to occur in the state fully described, some of them for the first time, but he has given in connection therewith every scrap of information relating to them that he has been able to obtain, either by ob- servation, correspondence or found recorded in entomological literature. The list includes 148 species, many of which are figured, the illustrations consisting of 121 figures, one colored and two uncolored plates, which with a full bibliography and synonymy, keys to families, genera and species found in Indiana, sections relating to the external anatomy of the order, natural enemies, life zones of In- diana, a glossary of terms used in the text, together with a full index, gives the work a 508 finish that is seldom found in connection with such papers. The author has himself studied the orthoptera of his state in the field, during the last twenty years, and many of the state- ments given relative to habits have come first hand fresh from the observer. The student of geographical distribution will find much of interest, while even those not especially in- terested in the technical descriptions will cer- tainly not fail to appreciate the copious notes on habits, abundance, ete., ete., but it will be of the greatest value to those who make a specialty of the orthoptera. F. M. WeepstTer. UrBANA, ILLINOIS, September 30, 1903. SCIENTIFIC JOURNALS AND ARTICLES. Tue closing (October) number of volume 4 of the Transactions of the American Mathe- matical Society contains the following papers: “On the subgroups of order a power of p in the quaternary abelian group in the Galois field of order p”, by L. E. Dickson; ‘On the order of linear homogeneous groups,’ by H. F. Blichfeldt; ‘ Non-abelian groups in which every. subgroup is abelian,’ by G. A. Miller and H. C. Moreno; ‘On nilpotent algebras, by J. B. Shaw; ‘On solutions of differential equations which possess an oscillation theorem,’ by Helen A. Merrill; ‘On the reducibility of linear groups,’ by L. KE. Dickson; ‘ Semire- ducible hypercomplex number systems,’ by S. Epsteen; ‘A symbolic treatment of the theory of invariants of quadratic differential quan- ties of n variables, by H. Maschke; ‘ Con- gruences of curves,’ by L. P. Eisenhart; “Similar conics through three points,’ by T. J. Va Bromwich. THE opening (October) number of volume 10 of the Bulletin of the Society contains the following papers: ‘ Poincaré’s Review of Hil- bert’s Foundations of Geometry,’ translated by E. V. Huntington; ‘On linear differential congruences, by S. Epsteen; ‘Fields whose elements are linear differential expressions,’ by L. E. Dickson; ‘On directrix curves of quintic scrolls,” by C. H. Sisam; ‘Josiah Willard Gibbs, Ph.D., LL.D., a short sketch SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 461. and appreciation of his work in pure mathe- matics,’ by P. F. Smith; Notes; New Pub- lications. Tue November number of the Bulletin con- tains: ‘Report of the tenth summer meeting of the American Mathematical Society,’ by F. N. Cole; ‘Report of the committee of the American Mathematical Society on defini- tions of college entrance requirements’; ‘On the congruence x om mod. P”, by J. West- lund; Review of Mach’s Mechanics, by E. B. Wilson; Review of Forsyth’s Differential Equations, by E. J. Wilezynski; Notes; New Publications. The Journal of the Franklin Institute prints, in its October number, the paper of Mr. Thomas M. Gardner, instructor in Sibley Col- lege, on ‘The Graphics of Carbon-Disulphide, with Formulas and Vapor-Table.’ It is a practically important contribution to the literature of the subject, as it provides the essential entropy-values of a substance which is thought by some authorities to be likely to have importance as the working fluid of a secondary heat-motor, as in the ‘ waste-heat engines.’ A plate is given exhibiting the properties of the substance having importance in the thermodynamic operations; and another giy- ing the temperature-entropy diagram with MacFarlane Gray’s constant-volume lines. Several other plates present the constant-area lines, pvu=-(, the constant-quality lines, x= C, the constant-entropy lines, ¢ = (C; and the general temperature-entropy diagram, after Boulvyin, completes the series. A new and extensive table of the properties of the saturated vapor, in the form of the standard steam-tables, provides data hitherto uncomputed and in forms suitable to the thermodynamic discussion of heat-engines em- ploying this substance. The values of n, also, in pv” = C are determined and the curve is given for adiabatic expansion of qualities ranging from «0.10 to s=1. It is shown that, with hyperbolic expansion, the ‘quality’ of wet fluid improves, the pro- portion of moisture decreasing; with super- heated vapor, this expansion becomes isother- Ocroser 30, 1903.) mal, as with all gases, and all heat supplied is utilized as external work. The constant- quality curves have the equation pv'**=C. With adiabatic expansion, the quality im- proves with all mixture in which x <0.6 and the fluid progressively condenses for mixtures of initially z= 0.7 and above. The value of n is found to be 1 — 6.36 2\— n= (2) 536; an en ce the logarithmic curve is given, graphically illustrating the law of variation of n. The specific volume of CS, is 2.6258 times that of air. Its boiling point is, according to Thorpe and Freidburg, 115.88 F. and its critical temperature is 504.5° F’., at a pressure of about 65 atmospheres. The paper is one of special value and is the outcome, in part, of work for the Ph.D. at Cornell. eva 2 Capel be SOCIETIES AND ACADEMIES. NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. : Tue first meeting of the academic year was held at the American Museum of Natural History on October 12, Professor Wilson act- ing as temporary chairman. As in former years, this first meeting after the long vaca- tion was devoted to reports on scientifie work carried on by members of the section during the summer. The following notes indicate the lines of the work of the members who reported. Professor Bristol, in association with Pro- fessor Mark, of Harvard, directed the summer work at the Bermuda Biological Station. Dr. Hay was very successful in collecting in Wy- oming materials for his studies of fossil tur- tles. Professor Osborn directed explorations in Wyoming, Nebraska and South Dakota in the interest of the American Museum of Nat- ural History, securing much valuable material which supplements collections previously made. Professor Grabau collected in Michigan ma- terials for continuation of his studies on De- vonian faunas. Dr. Summer directed the Biological Laboratory of the United States Fish Commission at Woods Hole, Mass. Pro- SCIENCE. 559 fessor Calkins studied the relation of Protozoa to cancer and smallpox. Professor Cramp- ton continued the accumulation of data re- lating to selection in Lepidoptera. Mr. Bige- low studied the early embryology of some crustaceans. Mr. Yatsu experimented on reg- ulation and organization of nemertean eggs. Professor Wilson at Naples studied problems of localization and mosaic development of mollusean eggs. M. A. BicELow, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY. Ar the meeting of the section on October 5, Professor Harold Jacoby and Dr. S. Alfred Mitchell exhibited a combined prismatic transit and zenith telescope. This instrument, just received by the Department of Astronomy of Columbia University, was made by Bamberg of Berlin. It includes all the latest observa- tional devices, including an eye-piece of the Repsold pattern for the automatic registration of transit observations. Dr. George F. Kunz and Dr. Charles Bask- erville gave an exhibition of radium of 300,- 000 activity, with some notes on the action of the Roentgen ray, ultra-violet light and ra- dium on mineralogical substances. This pa- per will be published elsewhere in Scrence. S. A. MircHe.t, Secretary of Section. DISCUSSION AND CORRESPONDENCE. THE INTERNATIONAL CONGRESS OF ARTS AND SCIENCE. To rue Eprror or Scrence: I returned only a few days ago from Europe and, therefore, have not seen until now the letter of Professor Dewey in Science of August 28 and that of Professor Woodward in Scrence of September 4, both of which deal with the International Congress of Arts and Science and especially with my essay on that congress, published in the May number of the Atlantic Monthly. Professor Woodward’s document gives me hardly a chance for a reply, since I can not see that it contains an argument. It is only a general expression of his contempt, on prin- ciple, for every effort to classify sciences from 560 a logical point of view. “While we may not go out of our way,” he says, “to oppose philosophers and literary folk who indulge in such extravagances, it is our duty to repudiate them when they appear in the public press in the guise of science; for they tend only to make science and scientific men ridic- ulous.” It may appear surprising if my chief aim was to make science ridiculous for the amusement of literary folk, that I took my medical degrees and have since been conduct- ing scientific laboratories. But the worst of it is that those ‘ philosophers and literary folk’ who have indulged in the acceptance of a pro- gram ‘which bordered on absurdity’ are the president of the congress, Professor Simon Newcomb, Mr. Pritchett, the president of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, and others who were up to this time believed to have a certain interest in ‘science ’—for Pro- fessor Woodward is mistaken if he doubts that the program and classification which he saw has the endorsement of the entire committee. But the kind criticism of Professor Wood- ward requires the less discussion as he is also mistaken in his second presupposition. He thinks that the classification of sciences swhich has been accepted for the International Congress was sketched in my article for the purpose of inviting criticism of the scheme. That was not the case. It was merely a com- munication concerning a settled arrangement, fully discussed and definitely voted by the proper authorities. If I had been longing for criticism, I should hardly have published it in a form which offers merely results and not reasons; and however ‘absurd and ridic- ulous’ my system may be, I have at least never evaded the duty to give the reasons and arguments for my positions. A ‘scientific man’ can not of course read what philos- ophers and literary folk are writing; other- wise, I might refer him to the first volume of my ‘Grundzuege der Psychologie,’ in which about 500 pages are devoted to just this dis- cussion; perhaps also to a short essay in the first volume of the ‘Harvard Psychological Studies’ (Maemillans), where he might find a large map with a tabular view of such classi- fication. There is no doubt that it is more SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 461. comfortable to ‘repudiate’ such ‘ extray- agances’ than to argue about them; but is it really more ‘ scientific ’? It is quite different with the very interest- ing letter from Professor Dewey of Chicago. His letter is full of important arguments worthy of serious consideration. He points clearly to certain dangers in the scheme, and the question is only whether those disadvan- tages ought not to be aecepted in order to gain certain advantages which strongly out- weigh them. Every one of the points he raises has been indeed matter for long dis- cussion in the committees, and only after eon- scientious deliberation have we come to the decisions which he regrets. As I tried to bring out in my Aélantic Monthly article, our real aim is to haye a congress which has a definite task and which does not simply do the same kind of work that men of science are attempting every day and everywhere. We do not want, therefore, a bunch of disconnected congresses and in each one a bundle of disconnected papers which could just as well have appeared in the next number of the’ scientific magazines. We want to use this one great opportunity to work, in a time of scattered specialization, to- wards the unity of thought. We want to bring out the interrelations of all knowledge and to consider the fundamental principles which bind the sciences together. We want to ereate thus a holiday hour for science, with a purpose different from that of its workaday functions, an hour of reposeful self-reflection. Therefore, not everybody who would like to be heard could be admitted to the platform, but only those who are leaders in their field, and even these may not speak on their chance researches of the last week, but on definite subjects which all together form one systematic whole. Such a monumental work could be created only under the exceptional conditions of a congress embracing all sciences and all countries, and important enough to attract those who are masters in their work with a wide perspective. This was our aim and this alone our chief claim, as I tried to bring out in my essay, and I see with great: satisfaction that Professor Dewey feels in full . - OcToBeR 30, 1903.) harmony with this essential part of the under- taking. The aspect which he dislikes is this: If we are to invite the leaders of all special sciences, each to consider the relations of his science to the other departments of knowledge, then we must clearly chop the one totality of knowledge into many special parts. That in- volves at once certain principles of division about which different opinions may exist. We have agreed to recognize 25 different de- partments with 134 sections, and such de- cision involves, of course, at once a certain grouping. The sections of the same depart- ment stand nearer together than the sections of different departments, and some of those departments again stand in close relations and thus form larger units. We grouped our 25 departments into 7 such chief divisions. Now Professor Dewey says we had no right to do all this, because our classification partly anticipates the work which is to be done by those who are to give the addresses. If each department has from the beginning a definite place on the program, its relations to all other sciences are determined beforehand and it has become superfluous to call in the scholars of the world simply to concur in the committee’s ideas concerning the system of knowledge. But I might ask, what else ought we to have done? I know very well that instead of the 134 sections, we might have been satisfied with half that number or might have indulged in double that number. But whatever number we might have agreed on, it would have re- mained open to the reproach that our decision was arbitrary, and yet we did not see a plan which allowed us to invite the speakers without defining beforehand the sectional field which each was to represent. A certain courage of opinion was then necessary and a certain ad- justment to external conditions was unavoid- able; in every case we consulted a large number of specialists. Quite similar is the question of classification. Just as we had to take the responsibility for the staking out of every section, we had also to decide in favor of a certain grouping if we desired to organize the congress and not simply to bring SCIENCE. 561 out a helter-skelter performance. Professor Dewey says: “The essential trait of the sci- entific life of to-day is its live-and-let-live character.” I agree with that fully. In the regular work in our libraries and laboratories the year round everything depends upon this democratic freedom in which every one goes his own way, never asking what his neighbor is doing. It is that which has made the specialistie sciences of our day as strong as they are. But it has brought about at the same time this extreme tendency to discon- nected specialization with its discouraging lack of unity; this heaping up of informa- tion without an ordered and harmonious view of the world; and if we are going to do what we aim at, if we want really to satisfy, at least once, the desire for unity, the longing for coordinations, then the hour has come in which we must not yield to this live-and-let- live tendency. It would mean to give up this ideal if we were to start at once without any principle of organization, ordering the sci- ences according to the alphabet, perhaps, in- stead of according to logic. The principles which are sufficient for a directory would un- dermine from the first the monument of sci- entific thought which we hope to see erected through the cooperation of the leaders of science. Therefore, some principle had to be accepted. And just as with number of sec- tions, it may be said here too, that whatever principle could have been chosen would prob- ably have had its defects and would certainly have been open to the criticism that it was a product of individual arbitrary decision. A classification which in itself expresses all the practical relations in which sciences stand to each other is of course absolutely impos- sible. Professor Dewey’s own science, psy- chology, has relations to philosophy, relations to physiology, and thus to medicine, relations to education and sociology, relations to his- tory and language, relations to religion and law. A program which should try to ar- range the place of psychology in the classified list in a way that psychology should become the neighbor of all these other sciences is unthinkable. On the other hand, only if we had tried to construct a scheme of such ex- 562 aggerated ambitions, should we “Have been really guilty of anticipating a part of that which our speakers are to tell us. We leave it to the invited scholar to diseuss the totality of relations which practically must exist be- tween psychology and other departments of knowledge. We confine ourselves to that minimum of classification which indicates the pure logical relation of the science in the sense of subordination and coordination, that minimum which every editor of an encyclo- pedie work would be asked to indicate with- out awakening suspicion of interference with the ideas of his contributors. The only justified demand which could be made was that we choose.a system of division and classification which should give fair play to every existing scientific tendency. And here alone came in the claim which I made for that scheme which has been accepted for _ the congress. I believed that our classification, more fully than any other, would leave room for every wholesome tendency of our times. I showed that a materialistic system would give fair opportunity to the natural sciences but not to the mental sciences; that a positivistie system would offer room for both mental and natural sciences; but that only an idealistic system has room for all; for the naturalistic and mental sciences, and also for those tendencies which are aiming at an in- terpretative as well as a descriptive account of civilization. And while we are trying to get, as I said, an organization with a mini- mum of classification, we were thus trying to provide at the same time for a maximum of freedom. Whatever other principles of classification we might have chosen would have led to an arbitrary suppression of some existing tendencies in modern thought. To use Professor Dewey’s illustration: Those students of art, history, polities and education who treat them as systems of phenomena and those who treat them as systems of purposes, alike find in different sections their full op- portunity. I have a slight impression that Professor Dewey would have preferred a classification which would have room only for one of the two groups. Our congress will SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. XVIII. No. 461. be less partial’ than our critics. We shall have place and freedom for all. But there is no reason to speak to-day, as I had to do in May, of a plan for the future. Our undertaking has already a little history. The program has been tried. Then was the moment for the appearance of those destructive effects which Professor Dewey feared. Professor Newcomb, Pro- fessor Small and I, who have been honored by the invitation to work as an organizing committee, have just returned from Europe, where we were to bring personal invitations to those who had been selected for the chief addresses. Professors Newcomb and Small visited France, England, Austria, Italy and Russia. I had to see the scholars of Ger- many and Switzerland. As the Germans have the reputation of being the most ob- stinate in their scientific ideas, their attitude towards the presented program may be con- sidered as the severest test of it. J had to approach 98 scholars in Germany. Every one saw the full program with the ominous classi- fication of science before he made his decision. Only one third of those whom I invited felt obliged to decline, and among them was not a single one who refused to come on account of the objections foreshadowed by Profesor Dewey. Some can not come because of ill health, some because of public engagements, some on account of the expense, and some be- cause they are afraid of sea-sickness, but not a single one gave the slightest hint that he was disturbed by the limitations which the program might put on him. On the other hand, among those two thirds whom we hope to see here next September, very many ex- pressed their deep sympathy with the plans and the program, and not a few insisted that it was just this which tempted them to risk the cumbersome voyage, while they would have disliked to participate in a routine congress without connected plan and program. Of course that would not count for much in the minds of my eritics, if those who have promised to come and deliver addresses under the conditions of our program were merely ‘literary folk who indulge in such extray- aganees.’ I may pick out some of the German OcroBER 30, 1903.] names. For human anatomy there comes Waldeyer of Berlin; for comparative anatomy, Fuerbringer of Heidelberg; for embryology, Hertwig of Berlin; for physiology, Engelmann of Berlin; for neurology, Erb of Heidelberg; for pathology, Marchand of Leipzig; for pathological anatomy, Orth of Berlin; for biology, Weismann of Freiburg; for botany, Goebel of Munich; for mineralogy, Zirkel of Leipzig; for geography, Gerland of Strass- burg; for physical chemistry, Van’t Hoff of Berlin; for physiological chemistry, Kossel of Heidelberg; for geophysics, Weichert of Gét- tingen; for mechanical engineering, Riedler of Berlin; for chemical technology, Witt of Ber- lin, and so on. Or to turn to the department of Professor Dewey: For history of philosophy, Windelband of Heidelberg; for logic, Riehl of Halle; for philosophy of nature, Ostwald of Leipzig; for methodology of science, Erd- mann of Bonn; for esthetics, Lipps of Munich; for psychology, Ebbinghaus of Breslau; for sociology, Toennies of Kiel; for social psychology, Simmel of Berlin; for ethnology, von den Steinen of Berlin; for pedagogy, Ziegler of Strassburg. Or to men- tion some other departments: Among the philologists I notice Brugman of Leipzig, Paul of Munich, Delitzsch of Berlin; Sievers of Leipzig, Kluge of Freiburg, Muncker of Munich; Oldenberg of Kiel and _ others. Among the economists, Schmoller of Berlin, Weber of Heidelberg, Stieda of Leipzig, Con- rad of Halle, Sombart of Breslau, Wagner of Berlin. Among the jurists, Binding of Leipzig, Zorn of Bonn, Jellineck of Heidel- berg, von Lizst of Berlin, Wach of Leipzig, von Bar of Gottingen, Kahl of Berlin, Zitelmann of Bonn, and so on. Among the theologians, Harnack of Berlin, Budde of Marburg, Pfleiderer of Berlin. For classical art, Furtwaengler of Munich; for modern art, Muther of Breslau; for medieval history, Lamprecht of Leipzig. Enough of the enu- meration. The list from England and from France is on the same level, and I anticipate that when we soon shall send out invitations to several hundred Americans for definite ad- dresses, their response will not be less general, their list not less noble. But American par- SCIENCE. 563 ticipatign is a question of the future. The list of acceptances which I have given here stands as a matter of fact beyond discussion. Is there really any doubt still possible that we have secured on the basis of that disastrous program the greatest combination of leaders of thought which has ever been brought to- gether? When we three came home from our European mission after four months of hard labor to secure this result surpassing our own expectations, we might have felt justified in the hope that scientific men of this country would welcome us otherwise than with the ery that we, under the guise of science, have made science ridiculous. Huco MUnsTErRBERG. Harvarp UNIVERSITY, October 12, 1903. SHORTER ARTICLES. A PLEA FOR BETTER ENGLISH IN SCIENCE. Tuat to genuine scholarship is not always conjoined power of expression is common knowledge. Not a few men who haye re- ceived academic: training and have been hon- ored with university degrees, who have ex- plored profound mysteries of nature and dis- covered hidden laws, seem to be incapable of clearly explaining the processes they employ in their researches or of plainly setting forth their discoveries. Not long ago a contributor to The Critic said: The development of scientific method is alleged to be one of the foremost characteristics of the present century. Philologists will ransack the earth, if not the heavens, for exact information as to date and authorship of even the fragments of ancient literature; botanists will tramp the forests for months to verify or disprove the rumor of a new orchid, and astronomers will go to any accessible point on the face of the globe for more exact figures on an eclipse or a transit of Venus. We might expect, then, to find a corresponding effort for exactness in the expression of thought, but an examination of the evidence is not alto- gether encouraging. A few months ago a Boston editor pub- lished the following paragraph: The English language is suffering violence in many ways. Among those who are forgetting its 564 grace and beauty, the elements of its power, and the right use of it, are the students of pure and applied science, who, being eager in youth to get at their work directly, despise such mere scholastic accomplishments as rhetoric, grammar and logic. The result often is that, when they have discoy- ered something which they are eager to give to the world and which the world ought to know, they have no vehicle of language and style worthy to convey their noble facts and great ideas to the public. * * * Many a scientific man has learned in middle life, with bitter regret, that he must take a lower place than he deserves among his fellow-workers because he can not tell what he knows in language that is intelligible and attrac- tive. Others have been hindered in their course, and never knew the reason why. But worse than inability to write vigorously and pleasingly is the widespread lack of ap- preciation of clear and precise expression. De Quincey, in his celebrated essay on ‘ Style,’ said, referring especially to professional au- thors: Proof lies before you, spread out upon every page, that no excess of awkwardness, or of inele- gance, or of unrhythmical cadence, is so rated in the tariff of faults as to balance, in the writer’s estimate, the trouble of remoulding a clause, of interpolating a phrase, or even of striking a pen through a superfluous word. The evidence is per- petual, not so much that they rest satisfied with their own random preconceptions of each clause or sentence, as that they never trouble them- selves to form any such preconceptions. What- ever words tumble out under the blindest accidents of the moment, those are the words retained. In his ‘ Principles of Success in Litera- ture,’ George Henry Lewes, referring to the writings of philosophers and men of science, said: If you allude in their presence to the deplorably defective presentation of the ideas in some work distinguished for its learning, its profundity, or its novelty, it is probable that you will be de- spised as a frivolous setter up of manner over matter, a light-minded dilettante, unfitted for the simple austerities of science. But this is itself a light-minded contempt; a deeper insight would change the tone, and help to remove the diserace- ful slovenliness and feebleness of composition which deface the majority of grave works, except those written by Frenchmen, who have been taught _ SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 461. that composition is an art, and that no writer may neglect it. If these strictures are just, the subject de- mands attention. I am well acquainted with the writings, as found in manuscripts submitted for publica- tion, of about one hundred scientists, young, middle-aged and old. One is justified in sup- posing that on such manuscripts the authors have done their best work. I have classified these authors in three groups: Good, fair, poor— good’ meaning those whose writing is clear, orderly and forcible; ‘fair’ meaning those whose writing is, indeed, clear and pas- sably methodical, but is not forcible; and ‘poor’ meaning those whose writing is tur- bid or chaotic or has other defects which render it of little value, such as extreme ver- bosity. In the good group fall 19 per cent., in the fair group 57 per cent. and in the poor group 24 per cent. That is to say, neglecting such formal bagatelles as the split infinitive, and merging the details of purity, propriety and precision in the larger qualities, I find that fewer than one fifth of these authors write with clearness, method and force, and that al- most one fourth of them do not write even clearly. Into this evaluation there enters, of course, whatever weakness may reside in my individ- ual judgment. I am sure, however, that the finding is not vitiated by prejudice or favorit- ism, conscious or unconscious; and in mak- ing the assignments to the three classes I gave every author the benefit of a doubt. Of these men about 75 per cent. have had collegiate or university training; their alm matres are our leading universities and schools of science. No fewer than twenty of them are now professors or instructors in such institutions of learning, and most of these fall in the fair class: their writing is not strong. In a few cases it is markedly weak; in other cases there is manifested an abundance of energy, but it is not under good control. In the good class there is at least one who is self-educated. Thus it appears that scientific and university life, with the Ocroser 30, 1903.] preparation in lower schools which this im- plies, does not insure good English. If the results given seem somewhat depress- ing, let us take courage from the Frenchman who declared that ‘it needs more delicate tact to be a great writer than a great thinker,’ and inquire whether, after all, the condition presented is markedly exceptional. It is probable that if any other large body of writers were similarly classified they would not make a much better showing. My evalu- ation, unlike that of the writers quoted, is of manuscripts as they are received from the authors. Literature of belletristic character, having little if any immediately practical or economic content, is necessarily dependent for existence upon its intrinsic merit and must be at least fair if it is accepted for publi- cation. On the other hand, many abominably written scientific papers are so richly laden with the results of observation and experiment that they are given prompt publication—so prompt that they can receive but a modicum of editorial attention. That is to say, nearly everything written by men of science is pub- lished, whereas only the supposed cream of ‘polite’ productions is thus honored. If practically all that is written in the line of novels, of essays or of poetry were published, the ‘poor’ percentage would doubtless be higher than twenty-four. Although, therefore, scientific writing, rela- tively considered, is not in a desperate plight, its condition is bad enough and is, I be- lieve, susceptible of no little improvement. Recognizing that the able writer is born rather than made—that the chief requisites are, as Herbert Spencer has said, a sense of logical dependence, constructive ingenuity, a good verbal memory and a sensitive ear, and that these qualities are largely innate—I neverthe- less believe that in many cases the ability is present but is never used; it lies dormant, and could be awakened and brought into ser- vice. What it needs is appreciation and utili- zation. “In England and Germany,” says Lewes, “men who will spare no labor in re- search, grudge all labor in style; a morning is cheerfully devoted to verifying a quotation SCIENCE. 565 by one who will not spare ten minutes to re- construct a clumsy sentence; a reference is sought with ardor, an appropriate expression in lieu of the inexact phrase which first sug- What are we to say to a man who spends a quarter’s income on a diamond pin which he sticks in a greasy cravat?” One can hardly escape the conviction that this criticism applies to America as well as to England and Germany. It is true that, according to the figures, 2 large majority write clearly, but clearness alone is not sufficient. Sentences and para- graphs may themselves be perfectly clear, but the ideas they clothe be so inconsequent if not inconsequential, that their total effect on the reader is weariness. Effective composition implies sequence and unity, symmetry and proportion. Vital writing, whether it be a sentence, a paragraph or a disquisition, is characterized by structure and _ integrity. Such are the famous paragraphs of Macaulay, whose ‘astonishing power of arranging facts and bringing them to bear on any subject * * * joined with a clear and vigorous style,’ says McMaster, ‘enabled him to pro- duce historical scenes with a grouping, a finish and a splendor to which no other writer can approach’; such are the exquisite essays of Lowell, who ‘ added to the love of learning the love of expression’; and such are the philosophical dissertations of Herbert Spen- cer, whose power of presentation is remark- able. Schopenhauer classified authors into three kinds: “ First,” said he, “come those who write without thinking. They write from a full memory, from reminiscences. This class is the most numerous. Then come those who do their thinking while they are writing, and there is no lack of them. Last of all come those writers who think before they begin to write; they are rare.” If Addison’s definition of good writing (a definition which was warmly endorsed by Hume)—that it consists in the expression of sentiments or ideas which are natural but not obvious—is valid, it is apparent why the productions of authors who fall in the first class are poor: the lucid statement of relations which are not obvious gests itself does not seem worth seeking. 566 requires thought. Papers by writersof this class are inevitably amorphous and weak. If those by the second class do exhibit power, the power is apt to be lawless, and the tectonics are likely to be distractingly apparent to the reader. Only papers by the third class can possess structure and grace. Schopenhauer declares further that an author’s style is an exact expression of his mode of thought; that it shows the formal nature—which must al- ways remain the same—of all the thoughts of a man; and, therefore, that when he has read a few pages of an author, whatever the subject, he knows about how far that author can help him. Similarly wrote Dean Alford in his ‘Plea for the Queen’s English’: “If the way in which men express their thoughts is slipshod and mean, it will be very difficult for their thoughts themselves to escape being the same.” Again, effective composition implies con- centration, distillation, a process akin to chemical rectification; and this it is that energizes. Josh Billings said: “I don’t care how much a man talks if he only says it in a few words.” lLecky calls this power the su- preme literary gift of condensation, which Gibbon possessed in so high degree. In the ease of a talented writer this process is sub- conscious and rapid, but others achieve the result through conscious effort if not down- right labor. Macaulay made almost endless changes, both of matter and of style. Said Joubert: “If there is a man tormented by the accursed ambition to put a whole book into a page, a whole page into a phrase, and that phrase into a word, it is I.” Little wonder that Joubert has succeeded La Rochefoucauld as the most famous coiner of aphorisms. John Burroughs has lately said, in his ‘ Literary Values’: “There is a sort of mechanical equivalent between the force expended in compacting a sentence and the force or stimu- lus it imparts to the reader’s mind. * * * So much writing there is that is like half-live coals buried in ashes—dead verbiage.” Spen- cer, in his essay on ‘ The Philosophy of Style,’ observes that the strongest effects are pro- duced by interjections, which condense en- SCIENCE. [N.S. Vou. XVIII. No. 461. tire sentences into syllables, and that signs are still more forcible. For instance, to say ‘Leave the room’ is less expressive than to point to the door. Doubtless science would make slow progress if obliged to use the sign language; yet in the prolixity and tenuity which characterize much of the scientific writ- ing of the day there is no progress, but only vexation of the spirit of the reader. “It is with words as with sunbeams,” says Saxe, “the more they are condensed the deeper they burn.” In sententiousness there is strength. We feel it in the epigrammatic sentences of Emerson, who wrote to Carlyle of ‘paragraphs incompressible, and most of whose titles are single words. On the other hand, some of Kant’s sentences have been measured by a carpenter and been found to run two feet eight by six inches. “A sentence with that enormous span,” says De Quincey, “is fit only for the use of a megatherium.” As an example of scientific writing which is not only clear and methodical, but forcible, I may mention that of the late George H. Williams, in whose untimely death the sci- entific world suffered a loss. That clearness and force are desiderata in scientific writing will be admitted by all. It may be somewhat rash, however, even to men- tion in such connection a higher quality; but I observe that into this article the words “orace’ and ‘beauty’ have already crept and I am not disposed to cancel them. Says Jou- bert: “In the mind of certain writers nothing is grouped or draped or modeled; their pages offer only a flat surface on which words roll.” Says Lewes: “A man must have the art of ex- pression or he will remain obscure.” Says Buffon: “ Only well-written works will sur- vive; abundance of knowledge and singularity of facts are not a guaranty of immortality.” Rhetoric, we know,, was to Huxley an abomination—a vile cosmetic; yet it is not difficult to discover in Huxley’s writings pages that are rhetorically elegant. The fact that with him the action was spontaneous is merely evidence of his artistic endowment; and there can be no doubt that his shafts were hurled at the foolishness of literary foppery, not at OcroBER 30, 1903.) that natural grace of style which, like ele- gance of manners, can be felt but not ana- lyzed. Doubtless the technical description of a dinosaur or of an aboriginal shell-heap can derive little aid from metonymy or climax; but the field of the scientific specialist merges insensibly in common ground, and when he is on the borders he is within view of the whole world of letters. Moreover, the man of sci- ence often takes literary excursions into neighboring provinces—at least many of the great men of science do. Witness Huxley himself, with his ‘Lay Sermons’; and John Tyndall, who almost made a specialty of feed- ing ‘ Fragments’ to the unscientific, and whose fame is due chiefly to his brilliant advocacy, oral and in writing, of physical science; and Ernst Haeckel, with his ‘Riddle of the Universe.’ “The importance of style,” says Lewes, “is generally unsuspected by philosophers and men of science, who are quite aware of its advantage in all departments of belles lettres. * * * Had there been a clear understand- ing of style as the living body of thought, and not its ‘dress’ * * * the error I am noticing would not have spread so widely. The matter is confluent with the manner, and only through the style can thought reach the reader’s mind.” Here Lewes but repeats De Quincey, who cites Wordsworth to the ef- fect that it is the highest degree unphilo- sophical to call language or diction ‘ the dress of thought’; Wordsworth would call it the incarnation of thought. ‘ Never in one word,’ says De Quincey, ‘was so profound a truth conveyed.’ Of the authors whose writings I have classi- fied as ‘ good,’ there are five or six whose writ- ings I should place in the highest class, that of excellent; for to the characteristics of clearness, orderliness and forcibleness they add the final quality of elegance or attractiveness. As an example of scientific writing of this class, mention may be made of that of the late Dr. John S. Newberry. If one doubts it one should read his paper on ‘ The Ancient Lakes of Western North America,’ in the Fourth Hayden Annual. SCIENCE. 567 Scientific men,.especially the young men, are prone to spend most of their time in observ- ing and experimenting; comparatively little is devoted to studying the accumulated data and their relations, and little indeed is re- served for composition. Phenomena are sought with eagerness, but, once discovered, The field and the laboratory are too alluring to be resisted for long, and the time to be devoted to reflection and to writing is minimized. Neglecting what Coleridge termed ‘ratiocinative meditation,’ they produce with facility papers consisting of erude raw materials which can but repel persons endowed with a strength and beauty. Doubtless these writers are, as Henry James says, ‘strangers to the pangs and the weariness that accompany the sense of exactitude, of proportion and of beauty,’ but in many cases it is also true that they are writers who ‘have been hindered in their course and never knew the reason why.’ I appeal to the scientific men of America, es- pecially the younger men, to cast off this shameful indifference to the power and beauty of their marvelously rich and adaptable lan- guage, and to devote to their writing some of the energy they manifest in the field and some of the patience they exercise in the laboratory. In a recently issued university catalogue, under the heading ‘Admission’ and the sub- heading ‘English, appears the following item of gratifying information: “The can- didate should read all the prescribed books, but knowledge of them will be regarded as less important than ability to write English.” That a young man entering on a scientific course at a university should have read care- fully ‘Silas Marner’ and ‘The Sir Roger de Coverley Papers’ is doubtless desirable, but that he should be able to express, in English that is at least clear and vigorous, whatever he may know on any subject is of far more importance. Without the property of reversi- bility, giving the motor, the dynamo-electrice machine would lack the greater portion of its usefulness. Though a man be sur- charged with knowledge, his usefulness to mankind must be slight unless he is able to interest in them wanes. sense of order, 568 impart the knowledge through the medium of clear and forcible language; and there are indications that both the preparatory schools and the universities are awaking to a realiza- tion of this fact. P. C. Warman. A CONTRIBUTION TO THE CRANIOLOGY OF THE PEOPLE OF SCOTLAND.* Unper this title Professor Sir William Turner, than whom no one is better qualified to deal with this subject, presents the first systematic account of the cranial characters of the people of Scotland. The study is based on 176 carefully gathered skulls (417 males and 59 females) obtained principally in the counties south of the Clyde and Tay (low- land Scotland’). The memoir is written in the same clear - style, eminently fit for instruction, which marks all the works of this author, and the- results of the study are of much interest. These results are briefly summarized as fol- fows: “The Scottish cranium is large and capa- cious; the'vertex is seldom heeled or roof-like, but has a low rounded arch in the vertical transverse plane at and behind the bregma.” The side walls “bulge slightly outwards in the parieto-squamous region, so that the great- est breadth is usually at or near the squamous suture. The occipital squama bulges behind the inion.” The glabella and supraorbital ridges, in men, ‘are fairly but not strongly pronounced, the forehead only slightly recedes from the vertical plane and the nasion is scarcely depressed.’ From the “analysts of the cephalic indices, it would appear that a brachycephalic type of skull prevailed in Fife, in the Lothians, in the northeast counties of Forfar, Kincardine and Banff; and it occurred to some extent in Shetland, in Ayr, in the border county of Peebles, and in Stirlingshire.” “The dolichocephalic type of skull was feebly represented in Fife; it was propor- tionally more numerous in the Lothians; it *Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, Vol. Xl., Part TII., No. 24, 1903. SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 461. was represented in Lanark, Ayr, Shetland and the Hebrides. It formed the prevailing type in Wigtonshire, in Caithness, in the skulls from the Highland counties, and in the important series of skulls from Renfrewshire.” The vertical diameter—basion-bregma— (mean, in males, 132.4 mm.), was only in two out of 150 of the Seottish crania in which the measurement would be taken in excess of the breadth; the two measurements were equal in four others, while ‘in all the rest, whether cephalic index was high or low, the vertical diameter was less than the breadth.” ‘The Scottish skulls are platychamzcephalic.’ Among the 73 male and 42 female crania that were cubed (with shot, according to Turner’s method), ‘the maximum capacity in the male skulls was 1,855 ¢c., the minimum was 1,230 cc, and the mean was 1,478 e¢.c.’; ‘the maximum in the female was 1,625 c.c., the minimum 1,100 cc. and the mean 1,322 ce” Apparently the Scottish male skull is “somewhat in excess of the mean ascribed to the crania of European men.’ The female skull, similarly as in other races and people, is about ten per cent. less capacious than the male.’ ‘In twenty-five male dolichocephalic crania the mean capacity was 1,516 e.c.’; in twenty-one male ecrania of cephalic index ‘from 75 to 77.4, the mean capacity was 1,519 c.c.’; in fifteen with cephalic index of ‘77.5 to 79.9, the mean capacity was 1,452 c.c.’; and ‘in thirteen brachycephalic skulls the mean capacity was 1,469 «ec? The Scottish skulls “with dolichocephalic proportions had a dis- tinctly greater mean capacity than the brachy- cephalic.’ The highest mean cranial capacity was given in the males, ‘by the skulls from Fife, Mid-Lothian, Shetland and Renfrewshire’; while the mean was lowest in the skulls ‘ from Edinburgh and Leith, West Lothian, the northeastern counties, the highland counties and the dissecting-room.’ “The face was usually orthognathous, some- times mesognathous; the nose was prominent, long and narrow, leptorhine; the orbits had usually the vertical diameter high in relation to the transverse, mesoseme or megaseme; the hail OcroBer 30, 1903.] face was high in relation to the width, lep- toprosopic.” “The lower jaw had a well-de- fined angle, the body of the bone was massive in the males, and with a pronounced chin.” So much for this first memoir, which leaves to be desired only greater numbers of speci- mens from some of the counties and, especially with the relation to cranial capacity, estimates of height of the individuals. A second me- moir, to contain an account of prehistoric Scottish skulls, as well as ‘a discussion of the character of Scottish crania and heads in their general ethnographical relation to pre- historic races in Britain, and to the people of the adjoining part of the continent of Europe’ is to follow. ' A. Hrepuicka. U. S. NationaL Museum, WasuHineton, D. C. VERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY AT THE CARNEGIE MUSEUM. Turovucu the continued generosity of Mr. Carnegie the usual activity has been main- tained during the past year in the Depart- ment of Vertebrate Paleontology at this museum. The Bayet Collection of Fossils—Negotia- tions begun more than a year ago by- the present writer resulted in July in the acquisi- tion of the paleontological collections of Baron de Bayet of Brussels, Belgium. This collec- tion is especially rich in Mesozoie vertebrates from Solenhofen, Cerin, Holzmaden, Lyme Regis and the province of Benevento, Italy; in Tertiary fishes and other vertebrates, in- vertebrates and plants from the famous lo- eality of Monte Bolea, near Verona, Italy; from Armissan, near Narbonne, France; from the Belgian Tertiaries; from Sicily, ete. It also contains large and valuable collections of insects and other invertebrates from the Solenhofen beds of Bavaria, a superb collec- tion of European cephalopoda from the Meso- zoie and of Paleozoic trilobites and other in- vertebrates. Though containing no types and little thac is new to paleontology, its acquisition by an American museum is of importance as making aecessible for the first time to American stu- SCIENCE. 569 dents any considerable collection of European vertebrates without the necessity of a trip to Europe. Dr. C. R. Eastman has undertaken to prepare a memoir descriptive of the fishes in the collection, and it is the desire of the -eurator of the department to arrange for the treatment of the other groups in a similar manner by equally competent specialists, so that the material in the collection may be made known and available for purposes of comparison to students of paleontology. It will doubtless be many years before a similar opportunity will present itself for ac- quiring at a single stroke so large and varied a collection of European fossil vertebrates, and American paleontologists are indebted to Mr. Carnegie for his generosity in supplying the funds necessary for the purchase of this valuable collection. Field Work during the Season of 1903.— During the season just drawing to a close four parties have been engaged, under the general direction of the curator, in studying the geology and in collecting vertebrate and other fossils from various Tertiary, Mesozoic and other horizons of the west, chiefly in Kansas, Wyoming and Montana. Pursuant to a general plan undertaken some time since, Mr. Earl Douglass has continued his explorations of the Tertiary lake basins of western Montana and has been successful in securing considerable collections representa- tive of the fossil faunas and floras of those deposits. Of greatest importance among the results of his labors in that region may be mentioned the discovery of Oligocene beds referable to the White River and containing the remains of a rich and varied vertebrate fauna in a good state of preservation. Here- tofore the White River formations of that region have yielded comparatively few and for the most part poorly preserved verte- brates. In addition to his work in the Ter- tiary Mr. Douglass was also able to make some interesting collections from, and observations relating to the Carboniferous and Permian(?) of that region. During the earlier part of the season Mr. C. W. Gilmore was engaged in completing the 570 work in a Jurassic dinosaur quarry opened by him during the preceding season at the base of the Freezeout Mountains in southern Wy- oming. After successfully completing this work he began, early in June, explorations in the chalk (Niobrara) of western Kansas, where he was joined by Dr. E. H. Sellards as assistant. It is the earnest desire of the curator of this department that the paleon- tological collections of the museum shall eventually represent in a creditable manner the faunas of all the more important fossil- bearing horizons of our own country at least. It was with the idea of acquiring such a repre- sentative collection of Niobrara fossils that the work in Kansas by Mr. Gilmore and Dr. Sellards was undertaken. Already some forty- five boxes of material have been collected and we hope to continue the work in this for- mation for some years. Mr. W. H. Utterback completed the unearth- ing of the splendid skeleton of Diplodocus, discovered by him the preceding year in the Jurassic deposits on the Red Fork of Powder River at the foot of the Big Horn Moun- tains in central Wyoming. In this same re- gion he also secured considerable portions of the skeletons of two other colossal Jurassic dinosaurs. In the latter part of August Mr. Utterback was transferred to central Mon- tana to continue the work in the Cretaceous of that region carried on during the month of August by the present writer. In this field considerable new and interesting material has been discovered, coming chiefly from the Judith River beds. ? Research Work.—In research, beside several shorter papers ,by the curator, Mr. Douglass and Mr. Gilmore, there have appeared or are now in press an important paper by Mr. Douglass on the yertebrate fauna of the Ter- tiary lake beds of Montana (Annals Carnegie Museum, Vol. 2, pp. 145-199 with Plate and 37 figures in the text); a paper by the present writer on the ‘ Oligocene Canide’ (Memoirs Carnegie Museum, Vol. I., No. IL. pp. 65-108, 6 plates and 7 figures in text) and another by the same author on the ‘ Osteology of Haplocanthosaurus’ (Memoirs Carnegie Mu- SCIENCE. [N.S. Von. XVIII. No. 461. seum, Vol. II., No. I., pp. 1-75, 6 plates and 30 figures in text). The most important additions to the exhi- bition series during the year have been the skeleton of Daphanus felinus mounted by Mr. A. S. Coggeshall and the skeletons of a Loup Fork camel and of an Oligocene sabre- toothed cat (Hoplophoneus) mounted by Mr. O. A. Paterson. Two splendid skeletons of Ichthyosaurus have also been placed on exhi- bition. Considerable progress has also been made in the preparation of casts of the skeleton of Diplodocus carnegii tor exchange with other , museums. J. B. Harcuer, Curator Vertebrate Paleontology. CARNEGIE MUSEUM, October 6, 1903. ETHNOLOGICAL AND ARCHEOLOGICAL SUR- VEY OF CALIFORNIA. For several years the University of Cali- fornia, through its Department of Anthro- pology and by the liberal. assistance of Mrs. Phoebe A. Hearst, has been engaged in an Ethnological and Archeological Survey of the State. A large amount of material, illustra- tive of Indian life and culture in past and present times, has been obtained and will form an important part of the anthropological col- lections which®will in the future be exhibited in a museum of the university at Berkeley. At the present time this collection, with others of the department, is temporarily placed in one of the buildings of the affiliated colleges belonging to the University in San Francisco. Here the large and valuable collections are safely cared for until the permanent museum building is secured. Systematic explorations are being made of the later gravel deposits, of several caves, and of the ancient shellheaps, in order to ascer- tain when man first occupied this region. The languages of the existing Indians are being studied by experts of the department; the customs and mythology of the different tribes are being carefully recorded; and collections illustrating their arts are being formed for the museum. A study of the physical characters of the various groups of Indians, combined ~ OcToBER 30, 1903.] with that of the skeletons found during the archeological explorations, is being made in order to determine the physical relations of the Indians of California with those of other regions. By correlating the physical char- acters, the particular cultures of the past and present Indians, and the various linguistic stocks or families still extant, it is hoped to solve the great problem of the relationship of the numerous groups of Indians in California, and their relationship with peoples of other parts of the continent and possibly with cer- tain tribes of Asia. Nowhere in America has there been such a diversity of Indian languages as in Cali- fornia, a condition which has long puzzled anthropologists. During the past five years more investigations of these languages have been made by the University and by eastern institutions than in all previous time. These Indian languages are now fast disappearing. Several are at the present moment known only by five or six, others by twenty or thirty individuals, and hardly a year passes without some special dialect, or even language, be- coming extinct. For this reason it is desired that students should be instructed in the -methods of recording and studying Indian languages, and then devote themselves to special research. The University is, therefore, giving instruction in this branch of linguistics with the hope of preparing students to carry on the research before the opportunities pass away. Similar reasons apply to researches in other divisions of ethnology, and in archeol- ogy; hence the training of students in these subjects is also undertaken by the Department of Anthropology. ' The officers of the department make a special appeal to persons in all parts of the State and adjacent regions for aid in this survey. Hundreds of Indian objects are found an- nually, which if carefully labelled as to where and how found and sent to the university, would, when brought together for comparative study, aid in the settlement of many important questions. The distribution of a particular kind of stone implement or of an ancient form of basket, and of many other objects of Indian manufacture (even the peculiar stone SCIENCE. 571 of which an implement is made is of great im- portance), will aid in determining the distri- bution of a tribe or group of which other rec- ords may be lost or so uncertain that just such confirmatory evidence to establish a particular point is required. Information relating to the location of caves, shellheaps, old burial places, ancient village sites, and scattered fragments or survivors of nearly extinct tribes, is earnestly solicited, that such may be investigated by the depart- ment and may be correctly recorded on its ethnological and archeological maps of the State. The university is by this survey carrying on a research of great importance in obtain- ing a knowledge of the first peopling of the Pacific Coast and of the early migrations, and of the relationships of the recent and present Indians, a research that is required by an- thropologists and by all interested in the early history of man. This work has been well be- gun, but assistance of many kinds is needed for its progress. This assistance it is hoped will be given to aid the University of the State in an undertaking of such general interest. Two volumes of the publications of the de- partment, relating to the languages, myths and customs of certain tribes of California, are now in press and are to be followed by others as the material is prepared. Correspondence leading to aid in this sur- vey is solicited by the Department of Anthro- pology of the University of California. Bens. In— WHEELER, President of the University. F, W. Putnam, Director of the Department of Anthropology. BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA, October 15, 1903. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS. Proressor RapHaeL Pumpeiy, of Newport, R. I., has recently returned from a summer’s journey in Turkestan, where he made a recon- naissance under the auspices of the Carnegie Institution of the ancient human occupation of the region in relation to its physiography. The other members of the expedition were Professor W. M. Davis, of Harvard; Mr. 572 Ellsworth Huntington, Carnegie research as- sistant, and Mr. R. W. Pumpelly, with Mr. S. de Brovtzine of St. Petersburg as inter- preter. Mr. Richard Norton, director of the American School of Classical Studies in Rome, was an independent member of the party. From Baku, the great petroleum port on the west coast of the Caspian, the travelers crossed by steamer to Krasnovodsk May 23, whence the Central Asiatic railway carried them, with many stops and side excursions on the way, to the end of the main line at Tash- kent and to the end of a branch line at Andiz- han June 26. Professor Pumpelly, with Messrs. Norton and Pumpelly, then made an excursion southeastward across the Alai range and valley to Lake Karakul on the northern Pamir, returning via Andizhan, Baku and Constantinople, and reaching America on September 4. Professor Davis and Mr. Hunt- ington went northeast, crossing the western Tian Shan ranges to Lake Issikul, where they separated; Professor Davis turned north- ward and came home via Semipalatirsk, Omsk and St. Peterburg; Mr. Huntington went south to Kashgar and west to Samarkand and Aschabad, where he has lately arrived and where he will make his winter headquarters after an excursion into northern Persia. Tue Research Laboratory of Physical Chemistry at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, the establishment of which was announced in Science for June 5, 1903, was opened on September 20 with a staff of eight research associates and assistants and two graduate scholars working under the direction of Professors A. A. Noyes, H. M. Goodwin and W. R. Whitney. The following investi- gations are already in progress: ‘The Elec- trical Conductivity of Aqueous Solutions at High Temperatures (up to 306° and higher),’ three separate researches carried on by Dr. W. D. Coolidge, Dr. H. CG. Cooper and Mr. A. C. Melcher; ‘The Conductivity of Fused Salts, by Mr. R. Haskell; ‘Electrical Trans- ference Determinations with Nitric Acid,’ by Mr. Y. Kato; ‘The Migration and Coag- ulation of Colloids, by Dr. J. C. Blake; ‘The Kquilibrium in Solution between Milk Sugar SCIENCE. [N.S. Vor. XVIII. No. 461. and Its Hydrate, by Mr. ©. S. Hudson; “The Dissociation-Relations of Sulphuric Acid at Various Temperatures,’ by Mr. M. A. Stewart; ‘The Hydrolysis of Ammonium Sulphide determined by Vapor Pressure Meas- urements, by Mr. C. F. Sammet. The re- searches upon the conductivity of aqueous solutions and upon transference are assisted by grants made to Professor Noyes by the Carnegie Institution. Besides these physico- chemical investigations, work is being contin- ued with the assistance of Mr. C. S. Bryan in developing a new system of qualitative analysis which shall include nearly all the rare metallic elements. Av the ceremonies attending the installa- tion of the Rev. Dr. Gordon as principal of Queen’s University, Kingston, Ont., the de- gree of LL.D. was conferred, among others upon Dr. J. E. Creighton, professor of phi- losophy at Cornell University, and Dr. Victor Goldschmidt, professor of mineralogy, Heidel- berg University, Germany. Tuer Harvard correspondent of the Hvening Post states that the Hon. William H. Moody, secretary of the Navy, and Mr. Gifford Pin- chot, chief of the Bureau of Forestry, will speak at a meeting of the members of Harvard University on November 2, under the auspices of the Political Club, a non-partisan organiza- tion of students organized to promote interest and active participation in politics on the part of university men. Secretary Moody’s . subject will be ‘The Administration of the Navy,’ and Mr. Pinchot’s ‘ The Opportunities in the Government Scientific Departments.’ Dr. Encar J. Banks has been given charge of the archeological excavations to be under- taken near Bysmias by the University of Chi- cago with the permission of the Turkish goy- ernment. P. G. Nurtine, A.B. (Stanford), Ph.D. (Cor- nell), has been appointed to a position in the National Bureau of Standards. Dr. L. Mrsserscumipt has been appointed assistant to the director of the Royal Museum in Berlin. ‘ OcroBeR 30, 1903.) A course of lectures on tropical medicine will be given at the Jefferson Medical College by Capt. Charles F. Kieffer, assistant surgeon, U. S. Army. The lectures will be given at 4 p.M. each Monday in the amphitheater of the hospital. AccorpING to a eablegram to the daily papers, Mr. L. A. Fischer, of the National Bureau of Standards, has compared the Ameri- ean meter with the international standard and has found it accurate. Mr. Fischer is investi- gating the systems of weights and measures of European countries with the view of drawing up a report upon which Secretary Cortelyou, of the Department of Commerce and Labor, will make recommendations to Congress. Tue Stockholm correspondent of the Lon- don Morning Advertiser says that the Acad- emy of Science proposes to confer the Nobel prize for physies on Mr. William Marconi. A MONUMENT is to be erected at Brussels as a memorial to Zenobe Gramme, known for his work in electricity. M. Léon Janssen is chair- man of the committee in charge. Aw obelisk of unpolished grey granite has been placed over Virchow’s grave in the old Matthai graveyard, Berlin. It bears on one side a black marble tablet, on which ‘is in- seribed ‘ Rudolph Virchow,’ and the date of his birth and death.